Canon Ir3250 - SM

iR3250
REVISION 0
JUNE 2000
FY8-13GP-000
COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation,
maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For
this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or
changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual,
Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents
of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with
local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the
individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be
copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent
of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Imprim au Japon
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of
confidential information.
INTRODUCTION
This Service Manual has been prepared for the iR3250 proper, duplex unit (accessory), and
envelope feeder (accessory).
The machine is designed as a copying machine equipped with printer functions and the SEND
function, and this Service Manuel provides basic facts and figures needed to service the machine in
the field.
This Service Manual consists of the following five volumes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
System Manual
Reader Manual
Printer Manual
Controller Manual
FAX Manual
The System Manual offers outlines of the machines overall functions, and details of each
function is found in its respective manual.
The machine provides the following functions:
Item
Copy
SEND
NetWork Print
Memory control (Box)
Installation
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Function
Local copying
Remote copying
E-mail
File
Database
PDL
Description found in
Reader Manual
Printer Manual
Controller Manual
Memory control
-
Controller Manual
System Manual
Controller Manual
Table 1
CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
System Configuration
The IR3250 may be configured as follows:
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Figure 1
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
ii
Finisher-G1
Super G3 FAX Board-H1
Envelope Feeder
1000-Sheet Paper Deck-D1
iR3250
Duplex Unit
SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
I.
1.
2.
3.
4.
II.
A.
1.
2.
3
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
D.
III.
Features ........................................... 1-1

Various Document Handling
Functions ..................................... 1-1
Large-Size Color Display ........... 1-1
Two-Way Communication on a
Network ...................................... 1-1
Full Color Scanner as Standard .. 1-1
Specifications .................................. 1-2
Reader Unit ..................................... 1-2
Type............................................. 1-2
Functions ..................................... 1-2
Others .......................................... 1-3
Printer Unit ...................................... 1-4
Type............................................. 1-4
Method ........................................ 1-4
Performance ................................ 1-5
Others .......................................... 1-6
Default Ratios .................................. 1-7
Copying Speed ................................ 1-8
Names of Parts................................. 1-9
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
IV.
A.
B.
C.
D.
V.
VI.
A.
B.
C.
External View .................................. 1-9

Copier ......................................... 1-9
Duplexing Unit ......................... 1-12
Envelope Feeder........................ 1-13
Cross Section ................................. 1-14
Reader Unit ............................... 1-14
Printing Unit ............................. 1-15
Duplexing Unit ......................... 1-16
Envelope Feeder........................ 1-17
Using the Copier............................ 1-18
Turning On the Power Switch ....... 1-18
Control Panel ................................. 1-19
Extension Mode............................. 1-20
User Mode ..................................... 1-21
Routine Maintenance by the User . 1-30
Safety ............................................. 1-31
Safety of Laser Light ..................... 1-31
Points to Note ................................ 1-31
Safety of Toner .............................. 1-31
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
I.
II.
A.
B.
C.
1.
D.
Selecting the Site ............................. 2-1

Unpacking and Installation ............. 2-3
Unpacking ....................................... 2-3
Assembling the Rack ....................... 2-4
Unpacking ....................................... 2-7
Reader Unit ................................. 2-7
Removing the Fixing Members
from the Printer Unit .....................2-8
E. Mounting the Reader Unit and the

Printer Unit to the Rack................... 2-9
F. Installing the Reader Unit ............. 2-13
G. Installing the Control Panel ........... 2-17
H. Connecting the Cables ................... 2-23
I. Making Settings and Checking
Images/Operations ......................... 2-25
J. Connecting to the Network ........... 2-28
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I.
II.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Periodically Replaced Parts ............. 3-1

Consumables and Durables ............. 3-1
ADF ................................................. 3-2
Reader Unit ..................................... 3-2
Printer Unit ...................................... 3-2
Duplexing Unit (accessory) ............. 3-4
Envelope Feeder (accessory) ........... 3-4
Replacing the Consumables ............ 3-5
1.
ADF ............................................ 3-5
2.
Reader Unit ................................. 3-5
3.
Printer Unit ................................. 3-8
III. Servicing Chart .............................. 3-16
A. Items to Clean ................................ 3-17
1.
ADF .......................................... 3-17
2.
Reader Unit and Printer Unit .... 3-18
3.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge .. 3-19
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING
I.
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
1.
Standards and Adjustments ............. 4-1

Mechanical System ......................... 4-1
Non-Image Width ....................... 4-1
Image Margin .............................. 4-1
Checking and Adjusting the Non
Image Width and Margin ............ 4-2
Correcting the Displacement of
Images in Main Scanning
Direction (each cassette;
adjusting the margin) ................4-3
Routing the Scanner Drive
Cable...........................................4-4
Electrical System ...........................4-5
When Replacing the Reader
Controller PCB ........................... 4-5
Upgrading the Reader Unit ......... 4-5
Upgrading the Controller Unit.... 4-5
When Replacing the DC
Controller PCB ..........................4-6
When Replacing the CCD Unit 4-6
When Replacing the Scanning
Lamp ........................................... 4-6
When Removing/Mounting the
Scanning Lamp and Replacing the
Light Intensity Detection PCB ... 4-7
When Replacing the Standard
White Plate.................................. 4-8
Checking the Photointerrupters .. 4-8
Printer Driver Checker .................... 4-9
Outline ........................................4-9
D. Special Tools ............................... 4-10

1. Outline ..................................... 4-10
2. List of Connector Signals ...... 4-10
3. Control Panel .......................... 4-11
E. Using the Checker ...................... 4-12
1. Installation .............................. 4-12
2. Checking the State of the
Printer Unit ............................. 4-13
3. Making Various Settings
(printer unit) .............................. 4-17
F. List of Mode .................................. 4-21
1.
Selection of Modes ................... 4-21
2.
List of Paper Sizes .................... 4-21
3.
List of Print Densities ............... 4-22
4.
Details of Display/Settings ....... 4-23
II. Troubleshooting Image Faults ....... 4-33
1.
The output is too light. .............. 4-33
2.
The output is too dark. .............. 4-34
3.
The output is blank. .................. 4-34
4.
The output is solid black. .......... 4-35
5.
The output has dots. .................. 4-36
6.
The back of the output is soiled.4-36
7.
The output has horizontal lines
(main scanning direction). ........ 4-36
8.
The output is soiled................... 4-37
9.
White spots ............................... 4-38
10. The output has white vertical
lines. ........................................ 4-38
11. The output has white horizontal
lines (main scanning direction). .. 4-39
CONTENTS
12. The output has poor fixing. ... 4-39
13. The image is distorted............ 4-40
14. Troubleshooting Reader
Unit Image Faults ................... 4-40
III. Troubleshooting Malfunctions .. 4-42
A. Error Codes ................................. 4-42
1. E000/E003 .............................. 4-42
2. E001......................................... 4-43
3. E009......................................... 4-43
4. E010/E011 .............................. 4-43
5. E040......................................... 4-44
6. E054......................................... 4-44
7. E055......................................... 4-45
8. E100/E102 .............................. 4-46
9. E110......................................... 4-46
10. E202......................................... 4-47
11. E203......................................... 4-47
12. E211/E215 .............................. 4-48
13. E216/E219 .............................. 4-49
14. E217......................................... 4-49
15. E220......................................... 4-49
16. E400/E402/E403/E404/E421 4-50
17. E606......................................... 4-50
18. E676/E677 .............................. 4-50
19. E710/E711/E712/E713 .......... 4-51
20. E731/E734/E735 .................... 4-51
21. E732......................................... 4-52
22. E733......................................... 4-52
23. E736......................................... 4-53
24. E737......................................... 4-53
25. E738/E741 .............................. 4-54
26. E804......................................... 4-54
27. E805......................................... 4-54
28. E807......................................... 4-55
29. E826......................................... 4-55
B. Faults Other Than Those
Indicated by Error Codes ........... 4-56
1. The reader unit AC power
is absent. ................................. 4-56
2. The reader unit DC power
supply is absent. ..................... 4-57
3. The printer unit AC power
supply is absent. ..................... 4-57
4. The printer unit DC power
is absent. ................................. 4-58
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
IV.
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
V.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.
2.
3.
4.
VI.
A.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
VII.
A.
The controller unit AC power

supply is absent. ........................ 4-59
The controller unit DC power
supply is absent. ........................ 4-60
The scanner fails to move
forward/in reverse. .................... 4-60
Pickup fails. (multifeeder
manual pickup) ....................... 4-62
Pickup fails (upper/lower
cassette) .................................. 4-62
Troubleshooting Feeding Faults 4-63
Paper Jams ................................... 4-63
Multifeeder Pickup Assembly 4-63
Cassette pickup assembly ..... 4-64
Transfer/Feeding assembly ... 4-64
Fixing/Delivery Assembly .... 4-65
Faulty Feeding ............................ 4-67
Double Feeding ...................... 4-67
Wrinkles, Bending of
leading edge ........................... 4-67
Skew ........................................ 4-68
Arrangement and Functions of
Electric Parts ................................. 4-69
Sensors........................................... 4-69
Thermistor, Lamps, and Heaters ... 4-71
Clutches and Solenoids ................. 4-73
Fans, Motors, and Heater .............. 4-75
PCBs .............................................. 4-77
Duplex Unit ................................... 4-79
Variable Resistors (VR),
Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check
Pins by PCB .................................. 4-80
Reader Unit ............................... 4-80
Printer Unit ............................... 4-83
Controller Unit .......................... 4-86
Fax Unit .................................... 4-90
Upgrading the Controller System . 4-92
Before Starting the Work ............... 4-92
Managing Data .............................. 4-93
Downloading ................................. 4-95
Connection ................................ 4-95
Starting Downloading ............ 4-95
After Downloading ................ 4-99
Service Mode ............................ 4-100
Outline ....................................... 4-100
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
F.
G.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Starting Service Mode and

Making selections ................ 4-101
Ending Service Mode .......... 4-102
Backing Up the RAM ........... 4-102
Basic operation ..................... 4-103
DISPLAY (control display
mode) ......................................... 4-105
I/O Mode .................................... 4-114
R-CON (input/output state of
reader controller PCB) ............ 4-114
FEEDER (state of feeder
controller PCB) ....................... 4-117
SORTER (state of finisher
controller PCB) ....................... 4-119
ADJUST (adjustment mode) ....... 4-123
<AE> ...................................... 4-125
<ADJ-XY> ............................. 4-125
<CCD> .................................... 4-126
<BLANK> .............................. 4-127
<COLOR> .............................. 4-127
FUNCTION
(operation check mode) ............... 4-128
OPTION (settings mode) ............ 4-138
TEST (test mode) ........................ 4-145
Grid (PG-TYPE1) ................... 4-147
17 Gradations (w/o density
correction; PG-TYPE2) .......... 4-147
17 Gradations (w/o density
correction; PG-TYPE3) .......... 4-147
Blank (PG-TYPE4) ............... 4-148
Halftone (PG-TYPE5) .......... 4-148
Solid Black (PG-TYPE6) ..... 4-148
Vertical Lines (PG-TYPE7) . 4-149
8.
Horizontal Lines
(PG-TYPE3) .......................... 4-149
H. COUNTER (counter mode) ...... 4-150
I. FEEDER (feeder mode) ............ 4-152
1. DISPLAY ............................... 4-153
J. BOARD (board mode) .............. 4-155
K. Fax Board .................................. 4-157
1. Service Data .......................... 4-157
2. Registering the Bit Switch
(#1 SSSW) .............................. 4-162
3.
Setting the Menu Switch
(#2 MENU) ............................. 4-175
4.
Making Various Settings
(#3 NUMERIC Param.) .......... 4-177
5.
Setting the Site of Installation
(#5 TYPE) ............................... 4-179
6.
Setting the Printer Parameters
(#7 PRINTER) ........................ 4-179
7.
Initializing the Settings
(#8 CLEAR) ........................... 4-183
8.
Test Mode (#9 TEST) ............. 4-184
9.
PRINT Test ............................. 4-185
VIII. Service Report ............................. 4-189
A. System Data List ......................... 4-189
B. System Dump List ....................... 4-201
C. Error Transmission Report .......... 4-204
D. Error Reception Report
(for servicing) ........................... 4-205
IX. Self-Diagnosis ........................... 4-206
A. Machine Proper ......................... 4-206
B. Fax .............................................. 4-211
C. Paper Deck ................................ 4-211
D. Finisher ...................................... 4-211
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....... A-1
1.
Reader Unit ................................ A-1
2.
Printer Unit ................................ A-2
B. LIST OF SIGNALS ....................... A-3
1. Input/output Signals to/from
DC controller PCB.................... A-3
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A-9

1. controller unit ........................... A-9
2. Reader unit ............................. A-11
3. Printer unit .............................A-13
D. Special Tools ............................... A-15
E. Solvents and Oils ........................ A-16
CHAPTER 1
FEATURES
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
I . Features
1.
Various Document Handling Functions

The machine may be set up in a network environment, enabling the following document handling functions.
2.
copying
printing
faxing
I-faxing
e-mailing
Large-Size Color Display
The machines control panel uses a 7.8-in display, facilitating operation.
3.
Two-Way Communication on a Network

The machine is equipped with a remote UI function, capable of sending status and job end
notices.
4.
Full Color Scanner as Standard

The machine is able to read both black-and-white and color originals, and is capable of sending
the resulting data to a Notes or PC system over a network.
1-1
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
II . Specifications
A.
1.
Reader Unit
Type
Body
Desktop
Copyboard
Fixed
Source of light
Fluorescent lamp
Lens
Single focal point lens
Image reading
Light-receiving elements (RGB 3-line CCD)
Table 1-201
2.
Functions
Type of original
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum size of original
A3, 279.4 431.8 mm (11" 17")
Reproduction ratio
Direct ( 0.5%), default enlargement/reduction

( 1.0%; Table 1-208)
Zoom: 25% to 400% ( 1.0%)
Resolution
Main scanning direction
600 dpi
Sub scanning direction
600 dpi
Continuous copying
999 copies max.
Auto clear
Yes (2 min standard; may be changed in user mode;

cannot be disabled)
AE
Yes
Auto paper selection
Yes
Auto zoom
Yes
Sleep mode
Yes (2 hr standard; may be changed in user mode)
Silent mode
Yes (1 min standard; may be changed in user mode)
Power save mode
Yes (- 66% standard; may be changed in user mode)
Wait time
125 sec or less
Table 1-202
1-2
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
3.
Others
Operating environment
Temperature range
: 10C to 32.5C
Humidity range
: 20% to 80% RH
Atmospheric pressure range: 760 to 1013 hPa

Power supply
Power supply
Serial number
(voltage 10%)
115V 60Hz
230V 50Hz
230V 50Hz
NQTxxxxx
UQQxxxxx
RQQxxxxx
Maximum power
1.5 kW or less (approx.)
consumption (reader
unit + printer unit)
Dimensions (WDH)
Reader unit only : 666 315 708 mm

(including ADF; not including original delivery tray)
Overall
Weight (approx.)
: 1097 764 1181 mm
Reader unit only : 50 kg

Rack assembly
: 36 kg
Overall
: 152 kg
Table 1-203
1-3
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
B.
1.
Printer Unit
Type
Body
Console type
Photosensitive medium
OPC drum (30-mm dia.)
Table 1-204
2.
Method
Reproduction
Laser beam indirect electro photographic method
Laser
Semiconductor laser
Scanning system
6-facet mirror scanning
Charging
Roller charging
Exposure
Laser beam
Toner
Magnetic single-component dry toner
Development
Toner projection
Toner supply
Tone cartridge method
Transfer
Roller transfer
Separation
Curvature separation + static separation
Cleaning
Blade cleaning
Fixing
Heat roller (main: 600 W; sub: 450 W)
Pickup
2 special cassettes
Manual feed tray
Envelope feeder (accessory)
1000-sheet paper deck (accessory)
Table 1-205
1-4
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
3.
Performance
Wait time
90 sec or less
First copy time
A4: 12.9 sec or les; A3: 14.3 sec or less
Copying speed
A4: 32 copies/min (approx.); A3: 18 copies/min (approx.)
Cassette
Universal cassette: 50 mm deep

(approx.; about 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 paper)
Manual tray
10 mm in height (approx.; about 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 paper)
Duplexing unit
Stackless method (accessory)
Delivery tray
Face-down (about 500 sheets of 75 g/m2)
Copy size
Upper cassette
Universal cassette: B4, A4, LGL, LTR
Lower cassette
Universal cassette: A3, B4, A4, 279.4 431.8 mm (11" 17"), LGL,
LTR
Manual tray
(D L)
Minimum: 98.4 190.5 mm; Maximum: 297 432 mm

Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m2)
Copy paper Cassette

Manual feeder
Plain paper (60 to 128 g/m2), colored paper, label sheet, transparency,
postcard
Double-sided
copying
(accessory)
A3, A4, A5R, B4, B5R, 279.4 431.8 mm (11" 17"), LGL, LTR, plain
paper (60 to 105 g/m2)
Image margin
Non-image width
Single-sided
Double-sided
Leading edge : 3.0 2.0mm

Trailing edge : 3.0 2.0mm
Left/right
: 3.0 2.0mm
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Left/right
Single-sided
Double-sided
Leading edge : 2.5 2.5mm

Trailing edge : Not specified
Left/right
: 2.5 2.5mm
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Left/right
Main scanning direction
600 dpi
Sub scanning direction
600 dpi
: 3.0 2.0mm
: 3.0 2.0mm
: 3.0 2.0mm
: 2.5 2.5mm
: Not specified
: 2.5 2.5mm
Table 1-206
1-5
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
4.
Others
Operating environment
Humidity range
: 10C to 32.5C
Humidity range
: 20% to 80% RH
Atmospheric pressure : 760 to 1013 hPa

Power supply
Power supply
Serial number
(85 to 132 VAC)
120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz
230V 50Hz
NRRxxxxx
RRTxxxxx
URRxxxxx
Maximum power consumption
1.5 kW or less (approx.)
Dimensions (W D H)
Printer unit only

Overall
: 566 648 590 mm

: 1097 764 1181 mm
Weight (approx.)
Printer u6nit only

Rack assembly only
Overall
: 60 kg
: 36 kg
: 152 kg
Table 1-207
1-6
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
C.
Default Ratios
Model
Reduction
AB-configuration
25%
Japan (6R5E)
A3A5
50%
A3B5
61%
Enlargement
B4A3
B5RA4R
B5A4
A4RB4, A5B5
A3A4R, B4B5R
70%
A4RA3, B5RB4
141%
B4A4R
81%
A5RA3
200%
A3B4, A4RB5R
86%
400%
Inch-configuration
25%
LGL11 17
121%
North America (5R4E)
50%
LTRR11 17
129%
11 17LTR
64%
200%
11 17LGL
73%
400%
LGLLTRR
78%
A-configuration
25%
A4RA3
141%
Europe (3R3E)
A3A5
50%
A5RA3
200%
A3A4R
70%
400%
25%
B4A3
B5RA4R/LTRR
115%
50%
A4R/LTRRB4
122%
A3B5
61%
A4R/LTRRA3
B5RB4
141%
A3A4R/LTR
B4B5R
70%
200%
B4A4R
81%
400%
A3B4
A4R/LTRRB5R
86%
AB/Inch-configuration
General (6R6E)
115%
122%
Table 1-208
1-7
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
D.
Copying Speed
Reproduction mode
Size
Copy paper size
Number of copies
Direct
A3
A3
18
B4
B4
20
A4
A4
32
B5R
B5R
27
A5R
A5R
32
A3B5R
B5R
27
B4B5R
B5R
27
A3B4
B4
20
A5RA3
A3
18
B5RB4
B4
20
B4A3
A3
18
Size
Copy paper size
Number of copies
11 17
11 17
17
LGL
LGL
20
LTR
LTR
32
III
(64.7%)
11 17LTR
LTR
20
IV
(73.3%)
11 17LGL
LGL
20
VI
(78.6%)
LGLLTR
LTR
32
Enlargement II
(129.4%)
LTR11 17
11 17
17
III
(121.4%)
LGL11 17
11 17
17
Reduction
III
(61.1%)
IV
(70.7%)
VI
(86.5%)
Enlargement II
(200.0%)
III
(141.4%)
V
(115.4%)
Table 1-209
Reproduction mode
Direct
Reduction
Table 1-210
1-8
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
III . Names of Parts

A.
1.
External View
Copier
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[11]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Control panel
Original tray
ADF
Original delivery tray
Reader unit main power switch
Upper cover
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Manual feed tray

Right cover
Cassette 2
Cassette 1
Center tray
Figure 1-301 External View 1
1-9
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
Copyboard glass
Front cover
Printer unit main power switch
Left cover
I/O port
1-10
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Toner cartridge
Fixing unit
Duplexing unit
Reader unit leakage breaker
Printer unit leakage breaker
1-11
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
2.
Duplexing Unit
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Horizontal registration guide

Pickup guide plate
Duplexing feed roller 1
Duplexing unit releasing lever
Figure 1-304
1-12
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
3.
Envelope Feeder
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[1] Connector
[2] Positioning pin
[3] Front guide
[4] Weight
[5] Rear guide
[6] Extension tray
Figure 1-305
1-13
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
B.
1.
Cross Section
Reader Unit
[1]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[2]
[3]
Figure 1-306 Cross Section
[1] No. 1 mirror

[2] No. 2 mirror
[3] No. 3 mirror
1-14
[4] Scanning lamp

[5] Lens
[6] CCD
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
2.
Printing Unit
[1]
[2]
[22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Delivery roller
Laser scanner unit
Primary charging roller
Photosensitive drum
Developing cylinder
Multifeeder pickup roller
Separation pad
Multifeeder tray
Feed roller 1
Feed roller 2
Separation roller
[3]
[4]
[5]
[16] [15] [14] [13]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[6] [7]
[12]
[8]
[11] [10] [9]
Pickup roller
Registration roller
Transfer charging roller
Upper cassette
Lower cassette
Fixing upper roller
Fixing lower roller
Fixing cleaning roller
Duplexing flapper
Face-up flapper
Delivery roller

1-15
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
3.
Duplexing Unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[5]
[4]
Reversing roller releasing plate

Reversal paper sensor
Re-pickup sensor lever
Reversing roller
1-16
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
4.
Envelope Feeder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4]
Feed roller
Separation guide
Envelope feeder pickup sensor lever
Pickup roller
Separation roller
1-17
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
IV . Using the Copier

A.
Turning On the Power Switch
The copier is equipped with the following switches: the main power switch on its reader side,
and the main power switch and the control power switch on its printer side.
When the main power switch is turned on, the main power lamp on the control panel will turn
on. Once the main power switch is turned on, the control panel power switch will normally be the
only switch to use; when the control panel power switch is turned off, the copier will enter sleep
state.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Main power lamp (green)

Control panel power switch
Main power switch (reader unit)
Main power switch (printer unit)
Figure 1-401 Arrangement of the Switches
1-18
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
B.
Control Panel
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Reset
Guide
Additional
Functions
C
Stop
Start
ON/OFF
Display
Contrast
Energy
Saver
ID
Transmission/Memory
[16]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[15]
[14]
Counter key
Guide key
Touch panel
Clear key
ID key
Reset key
Power save key
[13]
Error
[12]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[11] [10]
[9]
[8]
Main power lamp

Stop key
Start key
Error lamp
Online/memory lamp
Keypad
Screen contrast dial
User mode key
Figure 1-402
1-19
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
C.
Extension Mode
Mode
Description
Twop-page Separation
Use it to copy the left and right pages of an open book on separate sheets of
paper by a single operation.
Transparency
Interleaving
Use it to insert a sheet between transparencies when copying on

transparencies.
Shift
Use it to copy the entire image of an original by moving it to the center or

corner.
Image Combination
Use it to automatically reduce 2, 4, or 8 originals for copying on a single

sheet of paper.
Different Size Original
Use it to make copies of originals which are different in size yet the same in
width.
Job Done Notice
Use it to communicate the end of copying by e-mail.
Margin
Use it to create a margin on the edge of the copy for binding or the like.
Image Separation
Use it to automatically enlarge a single image by first dividing it into two or

four and copying them on a selected size of paper.
Sharpness
Use it to make crispy copies.
Image Quality
Adjustment
Use it to prevent see-through images.
Frame Erase
Use it to erase the image of the frame or holes on the original from copies.
Mode memory
Use it to store or call a copying mode.
Recall
Use it to call a copying mode (three most recently used modes) for copying.
Table 1-401 List of Functions
1-20
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
D.
User Mode
Common
Settings
Initial Function
selects initial function: copy*/transit/box

[system status/stop] bring up initial screen: yes/no*
[system sate/stop] give priority to [device] screen: yes*/no
Auto Clear Setting
sets display screen after auto clear

(bring back*/do not bring back)
Audible Tones
turns on/off buzzer

(turn on*/off input sound/warning sound/job end sound)
AE Adjustment
sets auto density adjustment method

(text mode for copying: priority on speed*/priority on image
quality)
(color mode for transmission: on/off*)
(black-and-white mode for transmission: priority on speed*/
priority on image quality)
Inch Entry
sets inch input

(on/off*) (on*/off, USA)
Drawer Eligibility
For APS/ADS
sets cassette auto selection for each cassette

sets for copying, printing, reception
(manual feed: on/off*, each cassette: on*/off)
(consider copy/paper type: yes/no*)
Envelope Feeder
registers envelopes used in envelope feeder
Paper Type
selects type of paper placed in cassette

(plain paper*, bond paper, thin paper, recycled paper, colored
paper, letterhead, slip, extra thick paper)
Energy Saver Mode
changes level of power save mode

(-66%*, no return time)
Tray Designation
sets tray for finisher

(tray A: copier*/printer/other)
(tray B: copier/printer*/other)
(tray C: copier/printer/other*)
Printing Priority
sets priority on printing

(1: copier/ 2: printer/ 3: other)
E-mail Address List
sets e-mail address list (50 items)

(used when sending/returning e-mail and communicating end
of job for copying and transmission)
Special Fusing Mode
yes (H1, H2, H3)/no*
Standard Stack Bypass Settings
sets manual feed envelope type (on/off*)
Standard Stack Bypass Settings
yes/no* (selects manual feed paper size/paper type)
Standard Local
Print Settings
selects paper
auto paper /manual feed/cassette 1/cassette 2
number of prints
sets number of prints (1* to 999)
sorter
sets sorting method
(sort/group/stapler sort/shift sort*/shift group)
*Factory settings.
1-21
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
double-sided print
sets double-side print (yes (left-right/top-bottom)/no*)
deletes file after printing
delete file after printing (yes/no*)
joins files
prints multiple files in box as single job (yes/no*)
Timer Settings
Adjustment/
Cleaning
Initial Common Settings
initialize common settings (yes/no)
Date & Time Settings
sets time zone (GMT +9:00*), daylight saving time (on/off*),

current date and time
Auto Sleep Time
sets interval before starting sleep state by turning off control

panel power switch at end of operation (0: no, 30-min, 1,2*, to
24 hr)
Auto Clear Time
sets interval before bringing up basic screen to touch panel at

end of operation (0: no, 1, 2* to 9 min)
Time Until Unit Quiets Down
sets interval before staring silent mode at end of operation (0:

no, 1* to 9 min)
Zoom Fine Adjustment
adjusts minute difference between original and copy image

sizes for vertical and horizontal ratios (for X and Y each, -1.0
to 0* to 1.0%)
Auto Gradation Adjustment
executes color gradation correction

test print output > read-in
Exposure Recalibration
sets degree of density correction

copying/black-and-white transmission/color transmission; for
each 9 steps (5*)
Feeder Cleaning
executes cleaning of ADF
Roller Cleaning 1
executes cleaning of fixing assembly roller
Roller Cleaning 2
executes cleaning of fixing assembly roller

*Factory settings.
1-22
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
Report Settings
Settings
transmission results report

for error only*/yes/no
displays transmission original
(black-and-white only): on*/off
communications control report
executes auto printing at 100th: on*/off
prints at specified time: on/off*
specifies time: 00:00* to 23:59
separate transmission/reception: on/off*
fax transmissions result report
for error only*/no
displays transmission original
(black-and-white only): yes*/no
fax history
executes auto printing at 100th: on*/off
prints at specified time: on/off*
specifies time: 00:00* to 23:59
separates transmission/reception: yes/no*
Print List
address list
prints settings of address list
user mode settings
prints settings of user mode
System
Settings
System Manager Settings
system administrators name: 32 characters

system administration department ID: 7 characters max.
mail address: 64 characters
contact person: 32 characters
comment: 32 characters
Dept.ID Management
yes/no*
register ID No. (group ID: 7 characters max.; ID No.: 7
characters;
limit on side: 0* to 999999; print restriction: yes/no*)
count control (group ID: 7 characters max.; limit on print side:
0* to 999999; count delete, count print)
print unidentified ID job (yes*/no)
Communications
Settings
sets e-mail/I-fax
transmission data size upper limit: 0=none,
1 to 3* to 99 MB
name when abbreviated: 32 characters max.
Attached Image*
memory reception: yes*/no
fax settings
transmission start speed: 33.6*/14.4/9.6/7.2/4.8/
2.4 kbps
reception start speed: 33.6*/14.4/9.6/7.2/4.8/2.4 kbps
reception password: do not set
memory reception: yes*/no
database communication time-out
sets communication time-out (3 to 5* to 15 min)
Remote UI
sets remote UI: on*/off
Clear Message Board
delete bulletin board: yes/no
Device Information
Settings
device name
32 characters iR3250
*Factory settings.
1-23
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
Device Information
Settings
site of installation
32 characters
Network Settings
TCP/IP Settings
IP address: 0.0.0.0*
subnet mask: 0.0.0.0*
gateway address: 0.0.0.0*
DNS: 0.0.0.0*
DHCP: on/off*
RARP: on/off*
BOOTP: on/off*
host name: 48 characters max.
domain name: 48 characters max.
Net Ware Settings
use NetWare: on*/off
frame type: auto detection*/Ethernet II/
Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/
Ethernet SNAP
IPX external network No.: auto setting, display only
node No.: auto setting, display only
print service: Bindery Pserver/Rprinter/
NDS Pserver*/Nprinter
Bindery PServer
print server name: 47 characters
file server name: 47 characters
print server password: 19 characters
printer No.: 0* to 15
service mode: only for paper being used/
may be changed to suit
needs
minimum change of paper*/
minimum change of paper
within queue
paper definition form: 0 to 255
polling interval: 1 to 5* to 255 sec
data buffer size: 1 to 20* (in KB)
RPrinter
file server name: 47 characters
NDS PServer
tree name: 32 characters
context name: 256 characters
print server password: 20 characters
service mode: only for paper being used/ may be
changed to suit needs
minimum change of paper*
/minimum change of paper within queue
paper definition form: 0* to 255
polling interval: 1 to 5* to 255 sec
data buffer size: 3 to 20* (in KB)
NPrinter
tree name: 32 characters
context name: 256 characters
packet sign
used in response to request by server
Apple Talk Settings
use AppleTalk: on/off*
*Factory settings.
1-24
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
phase to use
service name: 31 characters iR3250
registered zone in service: 31 characters
Ethernet Driver Settings
auto detection: yes*/no
communication method: half duplex*/full duplex
Ethernet type: 10Base-T*/100Base-TX
MAC address
e-mail/I-fax
SMTP server; e-mail, I-fax transmission account: 48
characters
e-mail address: e-mail, I-fax transmission account: 64
characters
POP server: (POP server name when I-fax file is received
using POP): 48 characters
POP address: (account when I-fax file is received using
POP) 32 characters
POP password: (password when I-fax file is received using
POP) 32 characters
POP issue interval: 0* to 99 min
Forwarding Settings
registration
transfer condition name
50 characters
transfer condition
fax/I-fax
address: 128 characters/destination No.: 20
sender: 128/F code: 20
item name: 128 characters/password: 20
transfer destination
destination setting transmission/reception
specifications setting
process received file after transfer
yes*/no
Memory RX Box Password
settings: 7 characters
*Factory settings.
1-25
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
Copy Settings
Standard Key 1 Settings
register preference key for display on basic screen

from each key on basic screen, from each mode key on
extension mode screen, from each memory key in mode
memory (no selection*)
Standard Key 2 Settings
register preference key for display on basic screen (no

selection*)
Auto Collate
switch from sorter mode to sort mode upon placement of

original in feeder (yes*/no)
Photo Mode
add print photo/film photo mode to copy screen (on/off*)
Store Remote Device
name
32 characters (16 characters)
register, check, change, delete remote printer
register 7 devices max.
IP address
Communications
Setting
Remote Device Transmission

Timeout
sets remote copy transmission time-out

(5 to 10* to 30 sec)
Standard Settings
changes copying mode registered as standard mode (register/

initialize)
upon shipment
number of prints: 1; paper selection: auto; density/image
quality: auto; printer: local
Initialize Copy Settings
returns copy specifications to factory settings

(auto sort: on/ face-down delivery: on; preference key setting:
none)
Common Settings
(not displayed if fax board is
absent)
Erase Failed TX
automatically clears files with transmission error from
memory (yes*/no)
JPEG Compression Ratic
(sets compression rate for transmission of e-mail file or
I-fax file in JPEG)
(high/average*/low)
Photo Mode
(add print photo/film photo mode to read-in setting
screen: on/off*)
Edit Standard Send Settings
sets read-in mode and file type
Store Send Function One-touch Buttons
sets register/change/delete for one-touch button
24 items max.
TX Terminal ID
sets source record
(inside image/outside image*/do not add)
Retry Times
sets number of re-tries for auto transmission in
response (receiver busy): 0 to 3* to 5
*Factory settings.
1-26
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
Gamma Value For Color Send Jobs

sets gamma value to suit receiver so that printing may
be at proper density
(1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2*)
# of Received Copies
sets number of prints for printing received file
(1* to 999)
Two-sided Print
sets double-sided printing of received file (yes/no*)
Select Cassette
sets printing if received file image does not match size
of paper
switch A: divide received image to fit existing paper
switch B: use same configuration paper (A/B) and
create margin
switch C: reduce to different configuration (A/B)
switch D: use larger paper
(each switch: on*/off)
Receive Reduction
prints by automatically reducing image to fit existing
paper
(yes*/no)
reduction mode: auto ratio*/fixed
reduction rate: 97%, 95%, 90%*, 75%
reduction direction: vertical horizontal, vertical*
Memory RX
yes*/no
Received Page Footer
on/off*
initializes common settings
yes/no
Fax Settings
(displayed only when fax
board is installed)
ECM transmission
yes*/no
pause interval setting
(1 to 2* to 15 sec)
auto re-dial
yes*/no
number of tries:1 to 2* to 99 sec
redial interval: 2* to 99 min
redialing at transmission error:
1st page and error page, all pages, error page, none
ECM reception
yes*/no
registers user abbreviation
katakana: character string (24 characters)
registers user tel No.
character string
selects line type
100 V: push/dial 10 pps/dil 20 pps*
120 V, 230 V: push (tone)*/dial (pulse) 10 pps
internal/external line switch (230 V only)
external*/internal
*Factory settings.
1-27
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
internal settings (230 V only)

EARTH/PREFIX*/HOOKING
If PREFIX is selected, enter Prefix Code using 20
characters max.
source record tel. No. marking
(FAX*/TEL)
source record date/time type
initial settings
120V: MM/DD/YYYY
230V: DDMM/YYYY
100V: YYYYMM/DD
Mail Box
Settings
User Box Settings
registers box name/ID No., sets file storage interval, initializes

settings
box selection: 0 to 99
box name registration: 24 characters
ID No.: 7 characters
file storage interval: 0 = none, 1, 2*, 3, 6, 12 hr; 1, 2, 3 days
initializes box attributes: initialize
Address Book
Settings
Store/Edit Address Book
personal
name
superscript for address (100 V only)
24 characters
address as member
fax, e-mail, I-fax, database, file, box selection
(existing in address book)
default transmission class
check button enabling registered class for member
group
name
superscript of address (100 V only)
24 characters
address as member
individuals, fax, e-mail, I-fax, database, file, box
printer selection (existing in address book)
fax
address
superscript (100 V only)
24 characters
dial no.
120 characters
sub address
20 characters (0 to 9, *, #, SPC)
password
20 characters (0 to 9, *, #, SPC)
transmission start speed
4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 14.4 kbps, 33.6 kbps*
communication mode
PSTN domestic line*, PSTN international line 1,
PSTN international line 2, PSTN international
line 3
ECM transmission
yes*/no
OCR transmission
yes/no*
*Factory settings.
1-28
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
e-mail
address
24 characters
e-mail address
128 characters
I-fax
address
24 characters
I-fax address
128 characters
default sentence 1
40 characters
default sentence 2
16 characters
database
address
superscript for address
24 characters
host name
128 characters
folder ID
value: 0 to 4294967295
FU name
24 characters
file
address name
24 characters
host name
128 characters
path to folder
128 characters
user name
24 characters (15 characters for SMB only)
password
24 characters (14 characters for SMB only)
Store Address Book Name
maximum address list: 10

name: 16 characters
*Factory settings.
1-29
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
V . Routine Maintenance by the User

Advise the user to clean the following at least one a week.
No.
1
2
3
Part
Description
Copyboard glass
ADF feed belt
Static eliminator
Wipe with a moist cloth; then, dry-wipe.

Wipe using solution of mild detergent; then, dry-wipe.
Clean with the cleaning brush (attachment stored behind the upper cover).
Table 1-501 Part to Clean
1-30
CHAPTER 1 FEATURES
VI . Safety
A.
Safety of Laser Light
Laser light can be harmful to the human body. To prevent possible accidents, the machines
laser system is sealed inside a protective housing and external covers so that its light will not leak
outside the machine as long as the machine is used under its normal operating conditions.
B.
Points to Note
The laser light used by the laser/scanner is invisible to the eye. Its beam can damage the eye
upon contact, and the laser/scanner must not be disassembled.
The machines laser/scanner is designed so that it cannot be adjusted in the field.
The following label is attached to the cover of the laser/scanner. Take note of the descriptions.
DANGER- Invisible laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION- INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D'O UVERTURE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.

VORSICHT - UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG.WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ATTENZIONE - RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA.
EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
PRECAUCION - RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE.
EVITAR EXPONERSE-AL RAYO.
VARO!
- AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA N KYM TTM LLE
LASERS TEIL YLLE. L KATSO S TEESEEN.
VARNING! - OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNIN G NAR DENNA DEL R PPNAD.

BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN.
ADVARSEL! - USYNLIG LASER STR LING,N R DENNE ER BEN.

UNDG BESTR LING.
ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LIN G N R DEKSEL PNES .

UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN.
Figure 1-601 Caution Label
C.
Safety of Toner
The toner used by the machine is composed of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye, and it is
non-toxic.
If your skin or clothes come into contact with toner, however, remove as much as possible with
dry paper, and wash the rest with cold water. Do not use hot water, as it will cause the toner to
become jelly-like and fuse permanently with the fibers of cloches.
Further, take care to keep toner from coming into contact with vinyl material, which can react
against the ingredients of toner.
Caution:
Do not throw toner into fire. Such can lead to explosion.
1-31
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
I . Selecting the Site

The site of installation must meet the following requirements; if possible, pay a visit to the
users before the delivery of the machine.
1) There must be a power outlet that provides the rated voltage (10%) and that may be used
exclusively by the machine.
Note that sharing a power outlet with an electric appliance that repeatedly turns on and off
(e.g., refrigerator) will affect the image quality because of fluctuations in voltage.
2) The temperature and humidity of the site must be as indicated in Figure 2-101. In particular,
avoid areas near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, and refrigerators.
Humidity (%RH)
80
60
40
20
10
0
(32)
10 12.5 15
20
(50)
(59) (68)
Temperature
27.5 30
(81.5)(86)
C
(F)
Figure 2-101 Site Environment

3) The site must not be near a source of fire or an area subject to ammonium gas, dust, or direct
sunshine. As necessary, provide curtains to avoid direct rays of the sun.
4) The site must be in a well-ventilated room.
2-1
Note:
The level of ozone generated by the copier will not affect the health of the individuals around
it. Some, however, may find the odor unpleasant. Be sure that the room will remain properly
ventilated to maintain a good working environment.
5) The site must ensure that the copier will remain level, with its feet in contact with the floor.
6) There must be adequate space for maintenance work.
2-2
II . Unpacking and Installation

A.
Unpacking
Unpack the rack unit; then, check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Reader mounting unit ........................ 1 pc.

Extention frame ................................. 1 pc.
Right frame ........................................ 1 pc.
Rear cover .......................................... 1 pc.
Bottom cover ..................................... 1 pc.
Printer mount unit .............................. 1 pc.
Left frame .......................................... 1 pc.
Screws............................................. 32 pcs.
Pins ................................................... 2 pcs.
Face label ........................................... 1 pc.
Figure 2-201
2-3
B.
Step
1
Assembling the Rack

Work
Check/remarks
Mount the extention frame with 6 screws.
Screws
Extention
frame
Attach the face label to the extension frame.
Face label
Turn the adjuster on the bottom frame counterclockwise, and slide out the adjuster by about
30 mm.
adjuster
2-4
Step
4
Work
Check/remarks
Mount the right frame and left frame to the

bottom frame with two screws each.
Screws
Screws
Left frame
Screws Bottom frame
Right frame
Screws
Caution:
When mounting the left/right frame to the
bottom frame, be sure that the side of the
base frame farther from the stays is toward the front.
Stays
Front
a
b
Rear
a>b
2-5
Step
5
Work
Check/remarks
Mount the reader mount unit with 14 screws.

Screws
Reader mount unit

Screws
Screws
Attach the cable clamps to the left frame.
Cable clamps
Mount the rear cover with 6 screws.

Screws
Rear cover
Screws
2-6
C.
Unpacking
Unpack the reader unit and printer unit; then, check to make sure that none of the following is
missing:
1.
Reader Unit
Reader main ............................................... 1 unit
Power cord ...................................................1 pc.
Original delivery tray ...................................1 pc.
Screw (M4x30) ............................................2 pc.
Stamp ...........................................................1 pc.
Printer Unit
Printer main ................................................ 1 unit
Control panel ................................................1 pc.
Control panel cable ......................................1 pc.
R-P communication cable ............................1 pc.
Connecting screw .........................................1 pc.
Power cable ..................................................1 pc.
Rack
Washer .........................................................4 pc.
Cable cover ..................................................1 pc.
Cable cover support plate.............................1 pc.
Control panel lower cover ............................1 pc.
Printer stacking assembly ............................1 pc.
Connecting pin .............................................2 pc.
Connecting upper unit ..................................1 pc.
Support plate ................................................2 pc.
Screw (M4x8) ............................................27 pc.
Printer fixing screw ......................................1 pc.
2-7
D.
Step
Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer Unit

Work
Check/remarks
Open the left cover, and remove the releasing spacers of the fixing unit.
Peel off the tape, and remove the fixing

member of the delivery assembly by shifting
it toward the rear.
Releasing spacers
Tape
Fixing member
Open the right upper cover; then, peel off

the tape and remove the fixing members
from inside.
Fixing member
Tape
Fixing
member Tape
2-8
E.
Mounting the Reader Unit and the Printer Unit to the Rack
Step
1
Work
Check/remarks
Move the rack to the site of installation.

Then, shift down the four adjusters of the
rack.
Adjusters
Remove both cassettes from the printer.

When doing so, slide out the cassette, and
take it out while shifting up the blue lever
with your fingers.
Cassette
Lever
2-9
Step
3
Work
Check/remarks
Lift the unit supporting it with your hands as

shown. (Work in a group of four. Then,
place it on the printer stacking assembly of
the rack.)
At this time, work while making sure that
the two pins (front, rear) of the printer
stacking assembly fit into the printer unit
(by looking from the right bottom, where the
cassettes have been removed).
Caution:
The printer unit weighs about 70 kg.
Be sure to work in a group of four and
with care. Further, the printer unit is
heavier on its rear. Take care to maintain good balance.
Pin (front)
Printer unit
Turn the printer unit fixing screw clockwise

to secure the printer unit and the printer
stacking assembly together in place.
Printer unit
Printer unit fixing screw
Printer stacking
assembly
2-10
Step
5
Work
Check/remarks
Set the cassette removed in step 2). When doing

so, be sure that the arrow on the cassette and
the arrow on the body match.
cassette
Match the height of the bearing of the printer

stacking assembly and the rail of the rack main
by turning the adjuster found at the front.
Rail
Bearing
Adjuster
2-11
Step
7
Work
Check/remarks
Push in the printer unit into the rack; then, push in

the pins (2 pc.; left, right).
Printer unit
Pins
2-12
F.
Installing the Reader Unit
Step
Work
Check/remarks
Caution:
The reader unit weighs about 50 kg.
Be sure to work in a group of two and
with care.
Holding position
Place the reader unit on the stacking assembly. At this time, be sure to fit the rubber
feet (left, right) of the reader unit into the
holes in the reader stacking assembly.
Caution:
When placing the reader unit on the
stacking assembly, take care not to
trap the cable.
When holding the reader unit, be
sure to support it with your hands as
shown. Do not hold it on its front.
Caution:
There are two holes used to position
the rubber foot at the rear of the reader
unit mount. However, be sure to use
the hole on the right when installing
the reader unit.
Reader unit
Holes
2-13
Step
Work
Check/remarks
Turn the positioning pin (right, left) found at

the bottom of the reader unit mount clockwise (viewing from below) to secure the
reader unit and the mount in place.
Remove the packing tape from the reader

unit; then, remove the protective sheet from
the copyboard glass.
2-14
Positioning pin
(left)
Step
4
Work
Check/remarks
Remove the two scanner fixing screws

(orange) from the left of the reader unit (by
turning them counterclockwise); then, slide
the scanner fixing plate to the front to
detach.
Tags
Fixing screws
Scanner fixing plate
Remove the two screws from the reader

right. cover.
Screws
2-15
Step
6
Work
Check/remarks
Mount the ADF delivery tray using the two

screws (M4x30) that come with the reader unit
where you removed screws in step 3).
Delivery tray
Screws
2-16
Connect the ADF interface cable to the reader

unit.
G.
Installing the Control Panel
Step
1
2
Work
Slide out the printer unit to the front.
Insert the control panel connecting upper
unit from the front of the rack; then, secure
it temporarily in place with three screws.
Check/remarks
Control panel conecting

upper unit
Screws
Control Panel
conecting upper
unit
2-17
Step
3
Work
Check/remarks
Mount the control panel connecting plate

(lower) with two screws.
Screws
Control panel conecting

plate (lower)
4
5
2-18
Push in the printer unit and insert the both

side pins.
Slide the control panel linking upper unit to
the front until it butts against the control
panel linking plate (lower); then, fully
tighten the screws tightened halfway in step
2).
Panel linking upper unit
Screws
Step
6
Work
Check/remarks
Mount the control panel linking plate

(lower) to the control panel linking upper
unit with four screws and four washers.
Screw
Washers
Washers
Screw
Insert the Control panel unit in the Control

panel conecting upper unit.
Position the control panel face up, and

secure it in place with four screws.
Control panel unit
Control panel
Screws
2-19
Step
9
Check/remarks
Work
Mount the control panel lower cover with two
screws
Control panel
lower cover
Screws
10
Mount the two support fittings with one screw

each.
Screws
Support
fittings
11
Mount the cover support plate with two screws.

Cover support plate
Screws
2-20
Step
12
Work
Mount the control panel cable to the cable
cover.
Check/remarks
Cable cover
Control panel
cable
13
While butting the cable cover against the rack

front, secure it in place with three screws.
Screws
Cable cover
Screws
14
Connect the control panel cable to the connector found on the back of the control panel.
Connector
control panel cable
2-21
Step
15
Work
Check/remarks
Mount the face plate with four screws.

Screw
Screw
2-22
Face plate
H.
Connecting the Cables
Step
1
Work
Check/remarks
Connect the printer-reader communication cable to the connector found on the

back of the reader unit.
Connector
printer-reader
communication cable
Connect the control panel cable and the

printer reader communication cable to
the connectors found on the left of the
printer unit.
Control panel cable

Connector
Printer reader
communication
cable
Connector
2-23
Step
3
Work
Check/remarks
Connect the two power cables to the reader

unit and the printer unit.
Reader unit
Power cable
Printer unit
Power cable
2-24
I.
Making Settings and Checking Images/Operations
Step
1
Work
Check/remarks
Take out the cartridge from its protective

bag, and shake it gently five to six times as
shown to even out the toner inside it and
remove the sealing tape.
Sealing tape
Open the top cover of the printer unit, and

set the cartridge in place.
3
4
Close the top cover of the printer unit.

Slide out the cassette 1 fully.
Remove the following from inside the

pickup cassette: stopper, protective sheet,
and the plastic bag containing a paper size
card and labels.
Cartridge
Protective sheet
Stopper
[2]
Plastic bag containing
paper size card and labels
[1]
2-25
Step
6
Work
Check/remarks
Set the paper guide to suit the size of paper suited to

the needs of the user.
The pickup cassette is equipped with a paper guide on
its left edge and at the front/rear of its right side.
Lift the front of the paper guide found on the left edge
to remove, and relocate it to suit the size of paper
used.
[1]
[2]
Turn the locking lever of the paper guide on the right

to release it [1]; then, slide the paper guide to suit the
size of paper used [2]. Thereafter, turn the locking
lever to lock the paper guide in position.
[2]
To unlock
[1]
To lock
Locking lever
2-26
Place paper against the paper guides on the left and at

the rear.
Step
8
Work
Check/remarks
Holding down on the right side of the stack of paper,

check to make sure that the stack is not above the limit
index on the paper guide.
Stack limit index
Attach the label indicating the appropriate size to the

paper size card; then, insert it into the card slot found on
the front left of the pickup cassette.
10
Slide in the cassette 1 fully to the rear; then, perform the

same on the cassette 2.
11
12
Check to make sure that the Add Paper message

on the LCD has gone out.
Press a key other than the Start key on the control
panel, and check to make sure that the operations
are normal.
Execute auto gradation correction in user mode.

Place the Test Chart on the copyboard, and check the
images using all sources of paper:
Be sure there is no abnormal sound.

Be sure all copying operations and images are
normal at each default ratio.
Be sure that as many copies as specified are
made normally.
2-27
J.
Step
1
2
Connecting to the Network

Work
Check/remarks
Turn off the power.

Connect the network cable to the machine.
Network cable
3
4
5
2-28
For information on setting the iR3250 to a network,

refer to the accompaying documentation.
If the users network is set up in a TCP/IP, go to step
5; if in a NetWare or AppleTalk, go to step 9.
Inform the system administrator that the connection to
the network will be checked, and find out the IP
address for the P ING command.
In service mode, select Copier>Test>NETWORK>PING, and enter the IP address obtained in
step 5 using the keypad on the control panel; then,
press the OK key and START key.
If the connection to the network has been made
successfully, OK will be indicated; go to step 9. If
NG is indicated, on the other hand, check the connection of the network cable; if the connection is
correct, go to step 7. If a fault is found in the connection, correct the fault, and try step 6 once again.
In service mode, select Copier>Test> NETWORK>PING, and enter the loop-back address *
(127.0.0.1); then, press the OK key and START
key.
If NG is indicated, the machines TCP/IP settings
have a fault; go back to step 3, and check the settings.
If OK is indicated, on the other hand, the machines
TCP/IP settings are likely to be free of problems; go
to step 8.
*For a loop-back address, the signal will be returned
before reaching the network PCB, thus enabling a
check on the TCP/IP settings of the machine that
sends the address.
Step
8
9
10
11
Work
Check/remarks
In service mode, selectCopier>Test> NETWORK>PING, and enter the machines IP

address; then, press the OK key and
START key.
If NG is indicated, a fault in the connection
of the network interface PCB or on the network interface PCB may be suspected; check
the connection of the network interface PCB
or replace it.
If OK is indicated, the machines network
settings and the network interface PCB are
likely to be free of a problem, suggesting a
problem in the network environment. If such
is the case, report to the system administrator
for action.
Check to see that the external covers are free
of scratches and deformations.
Clean up the area around the machine.
Fill out the Service Sheet.
2-29
CHAPTER 3
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I . Periodically Replaced Parts

The machine does not have parts requiring periodical replacement.
II . Consumables and Durables

Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the period of product
warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the following table.
3-1
A.
No.
ADF
Part name
A-1 Feed belt (pickup assembly)

A-2 Separation roller
A-3 Feed belt
B.
No.
No.
Part name
FB3-5702
FF5-5207
FC1-7815
4
1
1
Part number
Q'ty
FH7-3336
FH6-1463
1
2
Part number
Q'ty
RB1-9526
RF5-2703
RG5-4318
RG5-4319
RF5-1834
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
Estimated life
(copies)
Remarks
250,000
250,000
250,000 If dirt cannot be removed.
Estimated life
(copies)
Remarks
500 hr
30,000 hr
Printer Unit
Part name
P-1
P-2
P-3
Manual feed pickup roller

Manual feed separation pad
Fixing assembly
P-4
P-5
P-6
P-7
P-8
P-9
P-10
P-11
P-12
P-13
Feed roller
Separation roller
Transfer roller
Scanner cooling fan
Power supply cooling fan
Controller cooling fan
Delivery fan
Manual feed tray cooling fan
Controller cooling fan
LCD unit
3-2
Q'ty
Reader Unit
R-1 Scanning lamp

R-2 Cooling fan
C.
Part number
RF9-1394
RH7-1266
RH7-1396
RH7-1289
RH7-1271
RH7-1397
FH6-1544
FG6-4486
Estimated life
(copies)
200,000
200,000
350,000
350,000
350,000
350,000
350,000
25,000 hr
25,000 hr
25,000 hr
25,000 hr
25,000 hr
50,000 hr
10,000 hr
Remarks
Replace at the same time.
100/120V model
230V model
Replace at the same time.
[A-1] [A-2]
[A-3]
Figure 3-201 Arrangement of Consumables 1
[P-3]
[P-6]
[P-2] [P-1]
[P-5] [P-4]
3-3
[R-2]
[P-13]
[R-1]
[R-2]
[P-12]
[P-10]
[P-7]
[P-11]
[P-9]
[P-8]
D.
Duplexing Unit (accessory)

The duplexing unit does not use consumables.
E.
Envelope Feeder (accessory)

The envelope feeder does not use consumables.
3-4
F.
Replacing the
Consumables
1.
ADF
For details, see the DADF-C1 Service
Manual.
2. Reader Unit
a. Scanning Lamp
1) Remove the right glass retaining cover.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
magnet catcher [2] and the scanning lamp
cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 3-204
[5]
4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach

the scanner inside cover [5].
[4]
Figure 3-205
3-5
5) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to where the

scanning lamp cover was removed.
the anti-reflection plate [7].
[7]
[6]
Figure 3-206
Caution:
When mounting the anti-reflection plate,
be sure to fit the anti-reflection plate into
the cut-off (front, rear) of the No. 1 mirror base. In addition, be sure that the
connector is fully fitted to the anti-reflection plate.
Cut-off (front)
Cut-off (rear)
Figure 3-207
3-6
7) Disconnect the connector [6], and remove

the two screws [7]; then, detach the scanning lamp [9] from the electrode plate
(front) [8].
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Figure 3-208
8) Remove the scanning lamp [10] (w/ scanning lamp heater) to the front.
9) Remove the scanning lamp heater and the
heater rings (front, rear) from the scanning lamp.
[10]
Figure 3-209
b.1 Power Supply Cooling Fan
1) Remove the rear upper cover, left upper
cover, and rear cover in the order given.
the two screws [2]; then, detach the fan
[3].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-210
3-7
b.2 Scanner Motor Cooling Fan

1) Remove the front cover.
the two screws; then, detach the fan [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-211
3. Printer Unit
a. Manual Feed Pickup Roller
1) Open the manual feed tray.
2) Remove the cover [1].
[1]
Figure 3-212
3) While pressing on the holding plate [2],

pickup the tab on the manual pickup roller
[3] and pull out the manual feed pickup
roller.
[3]
[2]
Figure 3-213
3-8
b. Manual Feed Separation Pad

1) Remove the manual feed pickup roller.
2) Using a flat-blade screwdriver [1], detach
the manual feed separation pad [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-214
c. Fixing Assembly
1) Open the left cover.
2) If a duplexing unit is installed, push down
the knob [1] and pull out the duplexing
unit [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-215
3) Push down the knobs on both ends of the
fixing assembly unit, and pull out the fixing assembly.
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-216
3-9
4) Holding the fixing assembly unit with

both your hands, take out the fixing assembly carefully.
Figure 3-217
5) Remove the packing material from the
new fixing assembly, and pull out the two
spacers.
Figure 3-218
6) Slide the new fixing assembly into the
machine along the rails.
Figure 3-219
7) Push the fixing assembly fully inside the
machine.
Figure 3-220
3-10
8) Check to make sure that the fixing assembly [1] is securely in place, turn the knob
[2] to fix it in place.
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-221
d. Feed Roller and Separation Roller
1) Remove the upper cassette and the lower
cassette by releasing the stopper.
Figure 3-222
2) Take note of the position of the feed roller
and the separation roller of each cassette
holder.
[1]
[2]
B
[1]
[2]
[1] Feed roller

[2] Separation roller
Figure 3-223
3-11
3) Turn the roller until the tab is where it

may be operated easily.
Figure 3-224
4) Pick the tab, and pull out the roller.
Figure 3-225
5) Pull put the other rollers by repeating
steps 3) and 4).
3-12
7) Mount the new rollers. Thereafter, check

to make sure that each one is securely in
place.
Figure 3-226
Figure 3-227
e. Transfer Roller
1) Open the supper cover, and take out the
toner cartridge.
2) Lift the gear assembly of the transfer
charging roller as shown.
Figure 3-228
3-13
3) Remove the transfer roller together with

the paper guide as shown.
Figure 3-229
4) Remove the transfer charging roller [1]

from the paper guide [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-230
5) Mount the new transfer charging roller to

the paper guide.
6) Insert the shaft of the new transfer charging roller into the machines bushing;
then, push in the shaft of the gear assembly.
Figure 3-231
3-14
Caution:
1. If you have replaced the scanning lamp, perform the following; for details, see p. 4-6:
Clean the No. 1/2/3 mirror, reflecting shade, and standard white plate.
Clean and lubricate the scanner rail.
Adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp (Function>MISC-R>LAMP-ADJ in service
mode).
Adjust the CCD (Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode).
2. Check Display>MISC>FL-LIFE in service mode.
3-15
III . Servicing Chart

The machine does not have part that require periodical servicing. So that its parts may last
longer, however, observe the following during visits to the users for replacement of consumables
or the like:
No.
Work
Checks
Report to the person in charge.
Check the general condition.
Record the counter reading.
Check faulty copies.
Make test copies in Direct,

Reduce, and Enlarge modes.
a. Image density
b. White background (for
soiling)
c. Characters (for clarity)
d. Leading edge margin
e. Left/right margin
f. Trailing edge margin
g. Fixing, registration (for
displacement), back (for
soiling)
h. Abnormal sound
Clean any soiled areas. (See the

next page for items.)
Make test copies.
Press the leakage breaker test

switch of the reader unit and the
printer unit to make sure each
operates normally.
Thereafter, turn off the power
switch, and shift the lever to ON;
then, turn on the power switch.
Caution:
Check to make sure that
grounding is made correctly.
Otherwise, leakage may not
trip the breakers.
Execute auto gradation correction

in user mode.
Make sample copies.
Put the sample copies in order,

and clean up the area around the
machine.
10
Record the counter reading.
11
Fill out the Service Sheet, and

report to the person in charge.
3-16
Remarks
While the power switch is on

and the lever of the leakage
breaker is at ON, press the
test switch. If normal, the
lever will shift to OFF to
turn off the power; otherwise, replace the leakage
breaker, and make a check
once again.
Enter the result of checking

the leakage breakers.
A.
1.
Items to Clean
ADF
: Clean
: Replace
: Lubricate
Maintenance interval
every 100,000 every 200,000
Ref.
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Feed/reversing roller
Registration roller
Registration paper sensor (S3)
Separation belt
Feed roller
Original tray paper sensor (S1)
Pickup roller
Feed belt
Delivery roller
Copyboard glass retainer (right)
Pre-separation guide
Vertical size plate
[1] [2] [3]
: Adjust
: Inspect
Remarks
On the reader side.

Or, 6 mon, whichever is earlier.
On the reader side.
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[12]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[10]
Figure 3-301
3-17
2.
Reader Unit and Printer Unit

Unit
Part
Remarks
Externals and Controls
No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors
Use a blower brush.*
Reflecting shade (scanning

lamp)
Pickup/feeding
Scanner rail
Clean with alcohol; then, apply silicone oil

(FY9-6011).
Lens CCD
Use a blower brush.*
Standard white plate
Use lint-free paper or alcohol.
Multifeeder roller
Use lint-free paper or alcohol.
Cassette pickup roller

Feed roller
Separation roller
Separation pad
Use lint-free paper.
Registration roller assembly
Use lint-free paper; if dirt is excessive, use

alcohol.
Do not remove the spring during cleaning; a
displaced spring will cause skew movement
or jams.
If the spring is found to be displaced, correct
it.
Paper guide
Fixing assembly
Fixing assembly inlet guide
Transfer
Static eliminator
Use the special brush (attachment).
*Take care not to touch the mirrors and lenses, and keep the CCD free of dust.
3-18
3.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Caution:
Never throw the toner cartridge into fire.
The toner will catch fire, causing burns
or fires.
Be sure to use a toner cartrdige specially
designed for the machine.
1) Open the upper cover.
Figure 3-302
2) Hold the toner cartridge by its grips with

both your hands. Then, lift it to remove.
Figure 3-303
3) Take the new toner cartridge out of its

protective bag.
Keep the bag. You will need it when removing the toner cartridge.
Figure 3-304
3-19
4) Pull up the tape [1] slowly to remove it

together with the protective sheet [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-305
5) Rotate the toner cartridge as shown
slowly five to six times as shown to even
out the toner inside it.
Figure 3-306
6) Place the toner cartridge on a firm, level
place.
7) While holding the toner cartridge with
one hand, shift the orange tab and pull it
slowly so that the sealing tape (about
71cm in length) is completely out of the
cartridge.
Figure 3-307
Figure 3-308
3-20
8) Fit the toner cartridge in such a way that it

will slide in at the indicated angle; slide it
fully into the machine slowly.
Figure 3-309
9) Push in the toner cartridge in the direction
of the arrow.
Figure 3-310
10) Close the upper cover.
Figure 3-311
3-21
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
I . Standards and Adjustments

A.
Mechanical System
1.
Non-Image Width
The non-image width on copies made in Direct must be as follows:
Leading edge: 2.5 2.5 mm
Left/right:
2.5 2.5 mm
Trailing edge: Not specified.
2.
Image Margin
The image margin on copies made in Direct
must be as follows:
Leading edge: 3.0 2.0 mm
Left/right:
3.5 2.0 mm
Trailing edge: 3.0 2.0 mm
5.0 2.0mm
5.0 2.0mm
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Figure 4-101 Leading Edge Non-Image

Width
Figure 4-103 Leading Edge Image

Margin
5.0 2.0mm
5.0 2.0mm
4
5
6
4
5
6
10
10
Figure 4-102 Left/Right Non-Image

Width
Figure 4-104 Left/Right Image Margin
4-1
3.
Checking and Adjusting the Non-Image Width and Margin

Observe the following sequence when making checks and adjustments:
Adjusting the left/right image margin (COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-L,R)

Adjusting the leading edge/trailing edge non-image width (COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>
BLANK-T,B)
Adjusting the image read start position (COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X,Y)
Checking the image margin
For details of the above, see VII.D Adjustment Mode (ADJUST) in Chapter 12.
Reference:
The machine does not require the adjustment of registration as part of the adjustment of the
leading edge margin.
4-2
4.
Correcting the Displacement of Images in Main Scanning Direction (each

cassette; adjusting the margin)
If the image in main scanning direction is displaced or the margin shows a discrepancy when
the upper cassette or the lower cassette is used as the source of paper, adjust the margin as follows:
Reference:
The multifeeder or the duplex unit (accessory) do not require adjustment of the margin.
1) Remove each cassette from the machine, and adjust the roll in the cassette with a screwdriver
to eliminate displacement of images.
w [3] [4]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
0.5mm
[3]
[4]
Figure 4-105
Feed direction
Feed direction
Displacement
toward top of
image
Displacement
toward bottom
of image
Match the
displacement
Figure 4-106
4-3
5.
Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

For instructions used to route the scanner drive cable, see Reader service manual VII.B.4
Routing the Scanner Drive Cable in Chapter 2.
[6]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7]
Fix in place
temporarily
Wind 7 times
Put the steel ball

into the hole
[5]
Be sure to avoid a gap between runs
[4]
Figure 4-107
Caution:
1. Check the scanner drive cable for twisting, and check to make sure that it has not ridden
over the pulley.
2. Move the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base by hand to make sure that they
move smoothly. At this time, avoid touching the reflecting plate.
3. Take care not to damage the cable by the edge of the metal plate.
4-4
B.
Electrical System
1.
1)
2)
When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

Remove the reader unit front cover.
If service mode is available,
Copy the values of the items (11 in all) indicated on the reader unit service label (remove the
reader unit front lower cover) and also in service mode to the reader unit service label; then,
go to step 3).
If service mode is not available,
Go to step 3).
3) Remove the reader controller PCB. (See Reader service manual IV.B.1 Removing the
Reader Controller PCB in Chapter 3.)
4) Assemble the machine. (Keep the cover removed in step 1) as it is.)
5) Connect the reader unit power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the rear power switch,
printer unit power switch, and control panel power soft switch in the order indicated.
6) Clear the RAM on the reader controller PCB in service mode: Function>CLEAR>R-CON.
7) In service mode (COPIER>Adjust>DJ-XY, CCD), enter the values copied to the reader unit
service label in step 1). Be sure to press the OK key after entering the values.
If service mode was not available in step 2), enter the values initially indicated on the service
label.
8) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER> Function>MISC-R>USE-LAMP.
9) Turn the VR (VR1601) designed for the adjustment of the scanning lamp and found on the
reader controller PCB to the left and the right; stop it when a beep is heard, and press the OK
key on the control panel screen. (See the instructions given for removing and mounting the
scanning lamp and for replacing the light intensity detection PCB.)
10) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>Function>CCD-CCD-ADJ.
11) When CCD-ADJ is highlighted (reverse video), press the OK key on the control panel
screen to start CCD auto adjustment.
12) See that END is indicated on the screen when CCD auto adjustment ends. (The indication at
the top of the Service Mode screen changes from READY to SERVICE and then to
READY.)
13) Mount the front lower cover (w/ service label) removed in step 1).
14) When all operations end, turn off and then on the printer unit power switch, and turn on the
control panel power switch.
15) Execute auto gradation correction in user mode.
16) End.
2.
Upgrading the Reader Unit

The reader unit is upgraded by replacing the ROM DIMM on the reader controller PCB.
A. Replacing the ROM DIMM on the Reader Controller PCB

a-1 Removing the ROM DIMM
See the instructions on how to remove the ROM DIMM (on the reader controller PCB).
a-2 Mounting the ROM DIMM
1) Mount the ROM DIMM by referring to the instructions on how to mount the ROM DIMM
(on the reader controller PCB).
2) Assemble the machine.
3) Go to step 9) of 1. Replacing the Reader Controller PCB in the previous section.
3.
Upgrading the Controller Unit

Upgrade the controller unit by means of downloading. For instructions, see VI. Upgrading the
Controller System.
4-5
4.
When Replacing the DC Controller PCB

No item needs to be executed.
5. When Replacing the CCD Unit

1) Copy the values (AL-RG, AL-GB) indicated on the new CCD unit to the service label attached to the reader unit front lower cover.
2) Turn off the machine, and mount the new CCD unit.
3) Turn on the machine.
4) Enter the new values in service mode: Adjust>CCD>AL-RGAL-GB.
5) Execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode: Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
6) Attach the reader unit front lower cover.
8) End.
6. When Replacing the Scanning Lamp
1) Replace the scanning lamp with a new one according to the instructions in the following, and
assemble the machine: Reader service manual VII.C.1 Removing the Scanning Lamp/Scanning Lamp Heater in Chapter 3.
2) Turn on the rear power switch/control panel power soft switch.
3) Remove the two screw face plates and the two screws, and detach the reader unit front lower
cover.
4) Turn on the control panel power soft switch.
5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>Function>MISC-R>LAMP-ADJ.
Then, press the OK key. Check that the indication on the Service Mode screen changes to
SERVICE, and wait five min (until the scanning lamp warms up).
6) When the scanning lamp has turned on, turn the VR designed for adjusting the scanning lamp
shown in the following figure to the left and the right until a beep is heard.
COPY
LOAD
Scanning lamp
adjusting VR
Figure 4-108
7) Press the OK key on the control panel screen. (The indication on the Service Mode screen
changes to READY.)
8) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>Functions>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
10) See that the screen indicates END at the end of CCD auto adjustment. (The indication on
READY.)
11) Mount the front lower cover removed in step 3).
13) End.
4-6
7.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
When Removing/Mounting the Scanning Lamp and Replacing the Light

Intensity Detection PCB
Mount the removed scanning lamp back to the machine. Or, replace the light intensity detection PCB according to the instructions in the following to assemble the machine: Reader
service manual VII.D.1 Removing the Light Intensity Detection PCB in Chapter 2.
Turn on the rear power switch/control panel power soft switch.
Remove the two screw face plates and the two screws, and detach the reader unit front lower
cover.
Turn on the control panel power soft switch.
Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>Functions>MISC-R>USE-LAM,
and press the OK key. Check that the indication at the top of the Service Mode screen has
changed to SERVICE, and wait for about 5 min (until the scanning lamp warms up).
When the scanning lamp has turned on, turn the VR designed for adjusting the scanning lamp
shown in the following figure to the left and the right until a beep is heard.
COPY
LOAD
Scanning lamp
adjusting VR
Figure 4-109
7) Press the OK key on the control panel screen. (The indication at the top of the Service Mode
screen changes to READY.)
8) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
10) See that END has appeared on the screen to indicate the end of CCD auto adjustment. (The
indication at the top of the Service Mode screen changes from READY to SERVICE and
then to READY.)
11) Mount the front lower cover removed in step 3).
13) End.
4-7
8. When Replacing the Standard White Plate

1) Make the following selections to open the CCD screen in service mode:
COPIER>Adjust>CCD.
2) Enter the value indicated on the new standard while plate by making the following selections
in service mode: COPIER>Adjust>CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z. Then, press the
OK key.
XXXX YYYY ZZZZ

Value of W-PLT-Z
Value of W-PLT-Y
Value of W-PLT-X
Figure 4-110
3) Turn off the control panel power soft switch and the rear power switch, and mount the new
standard white plate to the machine.
4) Turn on the rear power switch, and turn on the control panel power soft switch.
5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
7) At the end of CCD auto adjustment, see that the screen indicates END. (The indication at
READY.)
9) End.
9.
Checking the Photointerrupters

The machine allows checks on its photointerrupters using a service tool (RY9-0104) or a conventional meter.
a. Using a Meter
1) Set the meter range to 30 VDC.
2) Connect the - probe of the meter to GND of the DC controller PCB or the reader controller
PCB.
3) Connect the + probe of the meter to the terminals (on the DC controller PCB or the DC
controller PCB) indicated on the pages that follow.
4) Make checks as instructed.
b.
4-8
Using the Service Tool

See the instructions under C. Printer Diver Checker.
C.
Printer Driver Checker
1.
a.
Outline
Outline
The printer driver checker is designed to operate the printer unit on its own for making checks
on the printer unit; the checker may be used for the following three functions:
a. A solid black, horizontal-line, vertical-line, or solid white image may be printed on the
printer unit. A choice may be made of the pickup slot and the delivery slot.
b. The state of each sensor used in the printer unit may be monitored, and solenoids, motors, and
other loads may be forced to operate.
c. If a fault has occurred, the error data sent to the video controller (external device) from the
printer unit may be indicated using the LEDs of the checker.
PRIN
TER
bit 1
6 b
it 1
5 b
it 1
4 b
it 13
Alligator clip (not used)
DRI
VER
bit 1
2 b
it 11
bit 1
0 b
it 9
bit 8
1
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
Connector 2 (not used)
DAT
A
bit 8
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
DAT
bit 5 A SE
T
bit 4
1
0
0
bit 2
bit 1
DC2
4V
bit 3
1
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
ENT
ER
0
0
TE
PRINST
T
ON
DISP
LAY
MOD
5
OFF
RY9
-0
SET
104
E SE
6
3
UP
1
11
C
MAD ANON
E IN INC
JAP .
AN
LEC
9
10
Connector 1
Figure 4-111
Caution:
The checker may be used only for the printer unit and the duplexing unit (accessory).
4-9
D.
Special Tools
1.
Outline
With the checker, the condition of the printer unit may be monitored and various settings may
be made combining the mode select switch and display/setup switch (Table 4-201).
DISPLAY/
SETUP
DISPLAY
Mode
SETUP (various data settings to be sent to

(indicates state of
printer)
sensor and load sent by printer)
operator call/service call
service call details/faulty print details/warning
print density selection
fan/fan fault details

3
pickup assembly composition/selected pickup
ready inhibit/sleep setting
assembly/paper in pickup assembly

4
sensor state 1
selected paper size
multifeeder manual feed tray paper size selection
6
7
upper/lower cassette paper size/sensor state 2
paper jam cause/fan fault details 2
paper feed system electrical part state/sensor state 3 paper feed system electrical part drive 1
10
motor state
test print pickup/delivery slot selection/pattern setting

paper feed system electrical parts drive 2
paper feed system electrical parts drive
11
Table 4-101
2.
a.
List of Connector Signals

Connector 1
Table 4-202 shows the pin numbers of connector 1 and their functions:
Function
Pin No.
Signal
J1-1
+24VA
J1-2
IN
Serial communications line (input)
J1-3
OUT
Serial communications line (output)
J1-4
GND
GND
+24VA
Table 4-102
4-10
3. Control Panel
DATA LED
The settings of each sensor and load sent from the printer unit is monitored with reference to 16
LEDs.
24VDC LED
It turns on when the checker is supplied with 24 V.
MODE SELECT Switch
It is used to select various modes. (Table 4-201)
DISPLAY/SETUP Switch
It is used to switch between DISPLAY and SETUP.
It is used to indicate the state of each sensor and load sent by the printer unit with reference to
DATA LED.
SETUP
It is used to set data using the DATA SET switch.
TEST PRINT Switch
When it is turned ON, the test print pattern selected by the DATA SET switch is printed on the
printer unit.
ENTER Switch
It is used to enter the data selected by the DATA SET switch.
DATA SET Switch
It is used to set various data to be sent to the printer unit. (Table 4-201)
PRINTER DRIVER
DATA
bit 16 bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10
bit 9
bit 8
DC24V
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
DATA SET
bit 8
1
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
bit 5
1
bit 4
1
bit 4
bit 3
ENTER
bit 3
1
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
bit 2
bit 1
TEST
PRINT
ON
MODE SELECT
DISPLAY
2
0
OFF
RY9-0104
SET UP
10
1
11
CANON INC.
MADE IN JAPAN
Figure 4-112
4-11
E.
Using the Checker
1. Installation
1. Turn off the copier's power switch.
2. Connect the connector 1 [2] of the checker [1] to the connector J24 [3] of the envelope feeder
of the printer unit. (Figure 4-301)
(However, the checker and the envelope feeder cannot be used simultaneously; if the envelope feeder is connected to the connector for the envelope feeder, disconnect the envelope
feeder.)
3. Turn on the copier's power switch.
4. When the copier has entered standby state, operate the checker and make checks.
[3]
[2]
[1]
PRIN
TER
bit 16
bit 8
1
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
bit 15
bit 14
DATA
bit 5
1
DRIV
ER
bit 13
bit 12
bit 11
bit 10
bit 9
DATA
bit 8
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
DC24V
SET
bit 4
1
bit 3
1
0
0
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
ENTE
0
0
TEST
PRINT
0
ON
DISPLA
Y
MODE
5
OFF
RY901
3
SET
04
UP
CT
7
8
11
CA
MADE NON
INC.
IN JAP
AN
SELE
9
10
Figure 4-113
Caution:
A buildup of static charges, if any in your body, can cause the copier to malfunction or go out
of order when you operate the printer driver checker. Be sure to touch a metal portion of the
copier before connecting the checker to discharge the buildup.
4-12
2.
Checking the State of the Printer Unit

Select 'DISPLAY' using the display/setup switch, and select the item to monitor using the
mode select switch, and check the state of the printer unit. (Table 4-201)
EX 1
To check the nature of an operator call/service call,
[1] When the copier has entered standby mode, set the display/setup switch of the checker to
'DISPLAY'.
[2] Set MODE SELECT to '1'.
[3] Find out the bit whose data LED is on with reference to the mode list.
For instance, if bit 16 is on, we know that the fixing assembly has a fault from the mode list
(Table 4-301).
[3]
PRINTER DRIVER
DATA
bit 9
bit 8
DC24V
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
[1]
DATA SET
bit 8
1
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
bit 5
1
bit 4
1
ENTER
bit 3
1
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
TEST
PRINT
ON
[2]
MODE SELECT
DISPLAY
2
0
OFF
RY9-0104
SET UP
10
1
11
CANON INC.
MADE IN JAPAN
Figure 4-114
Caution:
If MODE SELECT is selected while the display/setup switch is in 'SET UP, the mode selected before the display/setup switch is set to 'DISPLAY' will be maintained.
4-13
MODE SELECT 1
bit
[3]
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Details of display/settings
fault in fixing assembly
fault in beam detection
fault in laser
fault in main motor
fault in scanner motor
fault in fan motor
fault in duplexing re-pickup roller
fault in holding plate lifter
fault in duplexing horizontal registration guide
faulty print
absence of cartridge
absence of paper
door open
jam
printer ready
Table 4-103
4-14
EX2
To check the paper size selected for the upper cassette,
[1] When the copier has entered standby state, set the DISPLAY/SETUP switch of the checker to
'DISPLAY'.
[3] Read the bits whose LED is on from the mode list.
A paper size is indicated using bit 11 through bit 16 for the upper cassette and using bit 5
through bit 10 (a total of 6). The same combinations are used for both upper and lower cassettes,
and bit 11 through bit 16 and bit 5 through bit 10 are used to represent A through F. Table 4-302)
For instance, if bit 12 (B) and bit 11 are on, we know that the paper size is A3 from the paper
size list (Tables 4-302, -303).
[3]
PRINTER DRIVER
DATA
bit 9
bit 8
DC24V
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
[1]
DATA SET
bit 8
1
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
bit 5
1
bit 4
1
ENTER
bit 3
1
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
TEST
PRINT
ON
[2]
MODE SELECT
DISPLAY
2
0
OFF
RY9-0104
SET UP
10
1
11
CANON INC.
MADE IN JAPAN
Figure 4-115
List of paper sizes
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
D
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
C
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
B
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Ledger
A3
B4
Legal
Letter
A4
B5
A5
A4-R (vertical)
Executive
Universal
Envelope
Free
Table 4-104
4-15
MODE SELECT 7
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
E
D
Used to monitor the paper size selected for the upper cassette (Table 4-402).
C
B
A
F
E
D
Used to monitor the paper size selected for the lower cassette (Table 4-402).
C
B
A
Remains on when the duplexing re-pickup roller is in home position (see Note).
Remains on when the upper cassette is set in place.
Remains on when the lower cassette is set in place.
Remains on when the LED on the DC controller PCB is on.
Table 4-105
Caution:
The state of the sensor inside the duplexing unit is not monitored while test printing is being
executed.
4-16
3.
Making Various Settings (printer unit)

Select 'SET UP' using the display/setup switch, and select the desired mode using the mode
select switch (Table 4-201). After selecting the mode of operation using the data switch, press the
enter switch to start the selected mode.
EX1
To select 3 for the multifeeder tray,
[1] When the printer has entered standby state, set the display/setup switch of the checker to
'SETUP'.
[3] Find out the bits corresponding to the paper size from the table (Tables 4-304, -305). In the
case of A3, set bit 4 (B) and bit 3 (A) of the data set switch to '1'.
[4] Press the enter switch to select A3 for the paper size.
PRINTER DRIVER
DATA
bit 8
1
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
bit 9
bit 8
DC24V
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
[3]
[4]
DATA SET
ENTER
bit 5
1
bit 4
1
bit 3
1
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
bit 2
bit 1
[1]
TEST
PRINT
ON
[2]
MODE SELECT
DISPLAY
2
0
OFF
RY9-0104
SET UP
10
1
11
CANON INC.
MADE IN JAPAN
Figure 4-116
List of paper sizes
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
D
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
C
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
B
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Ledger
A3
B4
Legal
Letter
A4
B5
A5
A4-R (vertical)
Executive
Universal
Envelope
Free
Table 4-106
4-17
MODE SELECT 5
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
E
D
C
B
A
Used to monitor the paper size for the multifeeder (Table 4-402).
Used to monitor the print density.

For print density, see Table 4-403.
F
E
D
Used to select paper size for the multifeeder (Table 4-402); however, for test printing only.
C
B
A
Table 4-107
4-18
EX4
To execute test printing on the printer unit,
To cause the multifeeder tray to pick up paper, the horizontal-line test pattern to be printed on
both sides, and the output to be delivered on the face-up tray, go through the following steps:
[1] When the printer unit has entered standby state, set the display/setup switch to 'SETUP'.
[3] Set the following bits of the data set switch as follows: bit 8 to '0', bit 7 to '1', bit 6 to '0', bit 5
to '0', bit 4 to '1', bit 3 to '1', bit 2 to '0', and bit 1 to '1'. (Table 4-306)
[4] Press the enter switch.
[5] Shift the test print switch to ON to make a single test print.
PRINTER DRIVER
DATA
bit 9
bit 8
DC24V
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
[3]
bit 7
1
bit 6
1
bit 5
1
bit 3
[4]
DATA SET
bit 8
1
bit 4
bit 4
1
ENTER
bit 3
1
bit 2
1
bit 1
1
bit 2
bit 1
[5]
[1]
TEST
PRINT
ON
[2]
MODE SELECT
DISPLAY
2
0
OFF
RY9-0104
SET UP
10
1
11
CANON INC.
MADE IN JAPAN
To select the horizontal-line (image) pattern

To select double-sided printing
To select delivery to the face up tray
To select pickup from the multifeeder
Figure 4-117
Caution:
[1] Once selected in this mode, the test print data will be maintained when any other mode is
used for test printing.
[2] When the test print switch is kept at 'ON', continuous printing will take place.
[3] When selecting an image pattern, avoid using double-sided printing if solid black has
been selected.
4-19
MODE SELECT 8
bit
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
Details of display
machine internal stationary jam
door open jam
face-down delivery stationary jam
face-down delivery delay jam
duplexing feeding assembly stationary jam
duplexing feeding delay jam
reversing assembly stationary jam
reversing assembly delay jam
fixing assembly delivery stationary jam
fixing assembly delivery delay jam
pickup delay jam
cassette pickup delay jam
fault in power supply fan
fault in fixing assembly/scanner fan
fault in electrical unit fan
fault in fixing assembly fan
SET UP
Pickup slot
Delivery slot
Print
mode
bi t 3
Image pattern
bi t 8
bi t 7
bi t 6
Pickup from lower cassette
Pickup from upper cassette
Pickup from multifeeder tray
bi t 5
bi t 4
bi t 2
bi t 1
Delivery to face-down tray
Delivery to face up tray
[3]
Single-sided tray
0
1
Double-sided printing
0
Vertical lines
Horizontal lines
Solid white
Solid black
Table 4-108
4-20
F.
1.
List of Mode
Selection of Modes
Table 4-401 outlines each mode and its settings:
DISPLAY/
SETUP
Mode
DISPLAY (indicates state of

sensor and load sent by printer)
SETUP (various data settings to be sent to

printer)
operator call/service call
service call fault/faulty print details/warning

fan/fan fault details
print density selection
pickup assembly composition/selected pickup

assembly/paper in pickup assembly
ready inhibit/sleep setting
sensor state 1
selected paper size
multifeeder manual feed tray paper size selection
6
7
upper/lower cassette paper size/sensor state 2
paper jam cause/fan fault details 2
paper feed system electrical part state/sensor state 3 paper feed system electrical part drive 1
10
motor state
test print pickup/delivery slot selection/pattern setting

paper feed system electrical parts drive 2
paper feed system electrical parts drive
11
Table 4-109
2.
List of Paper Sizes

Table 4-402 shows combinations indicating paper sizes.
List of paper sizes
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
D
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
C
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
B
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
A
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Ledger
A3
B4
Ledger
Letter
A4
B5
A5
A4-R (vertical)
Executive
Universal
Envelope
Free
Table 4-110
4-21
3.
List of Print Densities

The selected print density may be displayed or an print density may be selected by a specific
combination of bits 4, 3, 2, and 1 (LED) and switches; Table 4-403 shows possible combinations.
Print densities
Lighter
Darker
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table 4-111
4-22
4.
Details of Display/Settings
The following are details of display and settings of each mode:
Mode Select 1
DISPLAY: operator call/service call
SETUP:
not used
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
bit
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
fault in fixing assembly
fault in beam detection
fault in laser
fault in main motor
fault in scanner motor
fault in fan motor
fault in duplexing re-pickup roller
fault in holding plate lifter
fault in duplexing horizontal registration guide
faulty print
absence of cartridge
absence of paper
door open
jam
printer ready
Table 4-112
4-23
Mode Select 2
DISPLAY: service call fault/faulty print details/warning details/fan fault details 1
SETUP:
print density settings
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
bit
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
abnormal level of fixing assembly temperature
abnormal level of fixing assembly temperature
error in fixing assembly warm-up
abnormal drop in fixing assembly temperature
fixing assembly type mismatch
The revolution does not reach a specific number when the scanner motor is starting up.
The revolution deviated from a specific number while the scanner motor is being driven.
The revolution does not reach a specific number while the main motor is starting up.
The revolution deviates from a specific number while the main motor is being driven.
fault in multifeeder pickup fan
paper size mismatch
VSYNC absent error
BD error
toner level drop warning
face-down tray delivery full warning
print density setting

(For a print density, see Table 4-403. )
Table 4-113
4-24
Mode Select 3
DISPLAY: pickup assembly composition/selected pickup assembly/presence/absence of paper in pickup assembly
SETUP:
ready inhibit/sleep settlings
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Remains on if the printer is equipped with an upper cassette pickup function.
Remains on when the printer is equipped with a lower cassette pickup function.
Remains on when the printer is equipped with a multifeeder tray pickup function.
Remains on when the printer is equipped with an envelope feeder pickup function.
Remains on when the duplexing unit is set in place.
Remains on if the upper cassette is selected.
Remains on if the lower cassette is selected.
Remains on if the multifeeder tray is selected.
Remains on if the duplexing unit is selected.
Remains on if the paper deck is selected.
Remains on if paper exists in the upper cassette.
Remains on if paper exists in the lower cassette
Remains on if paper exists on the multifeeder tray.
Remains on if paper is in re-pickup position.
RDYINH set (Note 1)
special service mode (0: end; 1: start)

sleep mode (1: deep mode; 0: nap mode) (Note 2)
sleep set (Note 3)
Table 4-114
Caution:
[1] To set RDYINH, select mode select 3, and turn on the copier while holding down the
enter switch.
[2] In deep mode, all drive systems are stopped (i.e., the supply of 24 V is withheld).
In nap mode, all drive systems except the fan motor are stopped.
[3] Sleep mode cannot be turned off. To do so, turn off and then on the copier.
4-25
Mode Select 4
DISPLAY: sensor state 1
SETUP:
not used
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Remains on when the delivery cover or the upper cover is open.
Remains on when the delivery cover or the upper cover is open.
Remains on when the pickup unit door is open.
Remains on when the holding plate is moving up.
Remains on when the face-down tray is full of paper.
Remains on when the horizontal registration guide is in home position. (Note)
Turns on when the duplexing unit paper sensor detects paper. (Note)
Turns on when the reversal sensor detects paper. (Note)
Turns on when the face-down tray delivery sensor detects paper.
Turns on when the fixing delivery sensor detects paper.
Turns on when the registration paper sensor detects paper.
Turns on when the pickup assembly paper sensor detects paper.
Remains on when the upper cassette paper level sensor 2 is blocked.
Remains on when the upper cassette paper level sensor 1 is blocked.
Remains on when the lower cassette paper level sensor 2 is blocked.
Remains on when the lower cassette paper level sensor 1 is blocked.
Table 4-115
Caution:
The state of the sensors inside the duplexing unit is not monitored while test printing is being
executed.
4-26
Mode Select 5
DISPLAY: monitors selected paper size/print density
SETUP:
selects multifeeder tray paper size
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
E
D
C
B
A
Monitors the paper size selected for the multifeeder tray.

(For paper size, see Table 4-402.)
Monitors the print density.

(For print density, see Table 4-403.)
F
E
D Selects a paper size of the multifeeder tray. (For paper size, see Table 4-402);
C however, this is good for test printing only.
B
A
Table 4-116
Mode Select 6
DISPLAY: not used
SETUP:
not used
4-27
Mode Select 7
DISPLAY: paper size of upper/lower cassette/state of sensor 2
SETUP:
not used
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
E
D Monitors the paper size of the upper cassette. (For paper size, see Table 4-402.)
C
B
A
F
E
D Monitors the paper size of the lower cassette. (For paper size, see table 4-402.)
C
B
A
Remains on when the duplexing re-pickup roller is in home position. (Note)
Remains on when the upper cassette is set in position.
Remains on when the lower cassette is set in position.
Remains on when the LED on the DC controller PCB is on.
Table 4-117
Caution:
The state of the sensors inside the duplexing unit is not monitored while test printing is being
executed.
4-28
Mode Select 8
DISPLAY: paper jam cause/fan fault details 2
SETUP:
pickup for the printing/delivery slot selection/pattern selection
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Details of display
machine internal stationary jam
door open jam
face-down delivery stationary jam
face-down delivery delay jam
duplexing feeding assembly stationary jam
duplexing feeding assembly delay jam
reversing assembly stationary jam
reversing assembly delay jam
fixing delivery stationary jam
fixing delivery delay jam
pickup delay jam
cassette pickup delay jam
fault in power supply fan
fault in fixing assembly/scanner fan
fault in electrical unit fan
fault in fixing assembly fan
SET UP
Pickup slot
bi t 8
0
0
0
bi t 7
0
0
1
Delivery slot
bi t 6
0
1
0
bi t 5
bi t 4
Print Image pattern

mode
bi t 3 bi t 2
bi t 1
Lower cassette pickup
Upper cassette pickup
Multifeeder tray pickup
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
Face-down tray delivery

Face-up tray delivery
Single-sided printing
Double-sided printing
Vertical lines
Horizontal lines
Solid white
Solid black
Table 4-118
4-29
Mode Select 9
DISPLAY: state of electrical parts of feeding system/state of sensor 3
SETUP:
drive setting 1 for electrical parts of paper feeding assembly
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Remains on while the pickup motor drive signal is being generated.
Remains on while the pickup solenoid drive signal is being generated.
Remains on while the feeding clutch drive signal is being generated.
Remains on while the registration clutch drive signal is being generated.
Remains on while the multifeeder pickup clutch drive signal is being generated.
Turns on when the upper cassette paper sensor detects paper.

Turns on when the lower cassette paper sensor detects paper.
Remains on when the face-up clutch drive signal is being generated.

Remains on while the delivery paper present signal is being sent to the finisher or the like.
Remains on while the holding plate solenoid drive signal is being generated.
main motor drive
scanner motor drive
pickup solenoid drive
pickup motor control
pickup roller selection
pickup motor speed selection
feed clutch drive
registration clutch drive
0: stop; 1: drive
0: stop; 1: drive
0: stop; 1: drive
0: stop; 1: drive
0: upper cassette; 1: lower cassette
0: low speed; 1: high-speed
0: stop; 1: drive
0: stop; 1: drive
Table 4-119
Caution:
If you must force each load to operate using SETUP, be sure the operation will not be too
long.
4-30
Mode select 10
DISPLAY: state of motors
SETUP:
drive setting 2 of electrical parts for paper feeding system
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
bit
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Remains on while the motor is rotating and, in addition, when the state is motor ready.
Remains on while the scanner motor is rotating and, in addition, the state is motor ready.
Remains on while the power supply fan motor is rotating at high speed.
Remains on while the fixing assembly/scanner fan motor is rotating at high speed.
Remains on while the electrical part fan motor is rotating at high speed.
Remains on while the fixing assembly motor is rotating at high speed.
Remains on while the multifeeder fan motor is rotating. (Note)
Remains on while the multifeeder fan is rotating. (Note)
Remains on when the upper cassette size detecting switch 4 is pressed.
Remains on when the lower cassette size detecting switch 4 is pressed.
0: stop; 1: drive
multifeeder pickup clutch drive
multifeeder fan motor drive (Note)

multifeeder fan motor drive (Note)
Table 4-120
Caution:
[1] If you must force the clutch to operate using SETUP, be sure to avoid operating it too
long.
[2] For the state of the multifeeder fan and drive, see the following tables.
Display
Stop
Low-speed
rotation
High-speed
rotation
bit 10
Off
Off
On
bit 9
Off
On
Off
Stop
Low-speed
rotation
High-speed
rotation
bit 2
bit 1
Set up
Table 4-121
4-31
Mode Select 11
DISPLAY: not used
SETUP:
drive setting 3 for electrical part of feeding system
bit
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
S
E
T
U
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
duplexing unit drive

face-up flapper solenoid drive
delivery selection signal (output ignal to finisher)
holding plate solenoid drive
power supply drive
fixing assembly/scanner fan drive
electrical unit fan drive
fixing assembly fan drive
0: stop; 1: drive
0: stop; 1: drive
0: stop; 1: output
0: stop; 1: drive
low-speed rotation; 1: high speed rotation
Table 4-122
Caution:
[1] If you must force each load to operate using SETUP, be sure not to operate it too long.
[2] The power fan, fixing scanner/scanner fan, electrical unit fan, and fixing assembly fan is
driven under the same control mechanism at the same time; be sure that the settings of all
four fans are the same.
In addition, keep in mind that these settings are invalid for about 10 min following the
end of printing.
4-32
II . Troubleshooting Image Faults

1.
The output is too light.
1) Make a test print in service mode: Test>PG>TYPE.

Is the output too light?
NO: The cause is the reader unit. Go to step 2).
YES: Go to step 3).
2) Perform the instructions given for troubleshooting image faults in the reader
unit. II.14 in Chapter 4.
3) General condition
Open the upper cover in the middle of printing operation, and remove
the cartridge. Then, open the drum cover shutter of the cartridge, and
check the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum. Is
there enough toner on the drum?
NO: Go to step 6).
YES: Go to step 4).
4) Poor contact
Is the contact for the transfer charging roller of the high-voltage
power supply assembly or the contact of the transfer charging roller
soiled or deformed/damaged?
YES: Clean it. If the contact is deformed/damaged, replace the part.
5) Transfer charging roller
Is the transfer charging roller deformed/damaged?
YES: Replace the transfer charging roller.
6) High-voltage power supply PCB
Replace the high-voltage power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-33
2.
The output is too dark.
1) Grounding contact (cartridge)

Is the grounding contact of the cartridge or the drum grounding contact of the printer unit soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the contact is soiled/damaged, replace the part. Replace the part also if the contact is displaced.
2) Contact for primary charging bias (cartridge)
Is the contact for the primary charging bias of the high-voltage power
supply assembly or the contact of the cartridge soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the contact is deformed/damaged, replace the fuulty
part. If displacement is found, also replace the part.
Try replacing the high-voltage power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
3.
The output is blank.
Make a test print of stripes: Test>PG>TYPE=10, 16. Is the output
normal?
YES: Is the wiring of the following PCBs normal?
Reader controller PCB
CCD driver PCB
2) Laser shutter
Is the protrusion used to open/close the laser shutter of the cartridge
damaged?
YES: Replace the cartridge.
Do the laser shutter arm and the laser shutter move smoothly?
NO: Replace the faulty part.
High-voltage power supply assembly
Is the contact for the developing bias of the high-voltage power supply
assembly and the contact of the cartridge soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the contact is deformed or damaged, replace the faulty
4-34
YES: End.
4.
The output is solid black.
1) Contact for primary charging bias (cartridge)

Is the contact for the primary charging bias of the high-voltage power
supply assembly or the contact of the cartridge soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the contact is deformed/damaged, replace the faulty
2) Scanning lamp
Does the scanning lamp turn on?
YES: See The scanning lamp fails to turn on.
3) Drum cartridge
Try replacing the cartridge (primary charging roller). Is the problem
corrected?
YES: Replace the high-voltage power supply PCB.
Items to Check in the Original Scanning System
1. Check to find out if the copyboard glass has ridden over an obstacle.
2. Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, No. 1/2/3 mirror, standard while plate, and
copyboard glass; then, execute the following in service mode: Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ. Is
the problem corrected?
Caution:
Be sure to execute CCD adjustment in service mode whenever the components of the scanning system of the reader unit (scanning lamp, mirror, CCD unit) has been replaced:
Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
If the scanning lamp has been removed and then mounted again, be sure to execute intensity
adjustment in service mode: Function>MISC-R>USE-LAMP.
4-35
5.
The output has dots.
1) Static eliminator
Is the static eliminator soiled?
YES: Clean the static eliminator.
2) Static eliminator contact
Is the contact for the static eliminator of the high-voltage power supply assembly or the contact of the static eliminator soiled?
YES: Clean it. If the contact is deformed or damaged, replace the faulty
3) Transfer roller
Is the transfer roller deformed/worn?
YES: Replace the transfer roller.
YES: End.
6.
The back of the output is soiled.
1) Copy paper
Is the copy paper soiled?
YES: Replace the copy paper with fresh paper. At the same time, advise
the user on the correct method of storing copy paper.
2) Pickup roller, Transfer charging roller, Fixing lower roller
Does the soiling occur on a cyclical basis?
YES: See Table 4-201 on p. 4-41 to identify the soiled roller, and clean
it. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace it.
NO: Clean the soiled areas of the feeding guide and the fixing guide.
7.
The output has horizontal lines (main scanning direction).
1) Development
Make a test print of halftone (TYPE=5). Doe the output have black
horizontal lines?
4-36
YES: Go to step 6).

NO: Go to step 2).
2) Optical path
Is the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, No. 1/2/3 mirror, standard white
plate, or copyboard glass soiled?
YES: Clean the soiled areas. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace the
part.
3) Reader unit power supply voltage, Scanning lamp, Inverter PCB
Does the scanning lamp flicker?
YES: 1. Check the voltage of the power supply.
2. Check the scanning lamp and the inverter PCB; if a fault is
found, replace it.
4) Original exposure system
Does the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base move smoothly?
NO: Remove the cause that prevents smooth movement.
5) CCD unit
Remove the CCD cover, and clean the surface of the CCD with a
blower brush. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the CCD unit.
6) Photosensitive drum, Fixing roller
Are there scratches in the horizontal (main scanning) direction on the
photosensitive drum?
NO: Replace the fixing upper roller.
8.
The output is soiled.
1) Copy paper
Is the copy paper soiled?
YES: Replace the paper with fresh paper. At the same time, advise the
user on the correct method of storing copy paper.
2) Pickup roller, Transfer charging roller, Fixing lower roller, Cartridge, Delivery
roller
Is the soiling at specific intervals?
4-37
YES: Identify the soiled roller by referring to Table 4-201 on p. 4-41,

and clean it. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace it.
NO: Clean the delivery roller.
9.
White spots
1) Toner (lack of)

Take out the cartridge, shake it several times, and put it back to the
machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End. If the symptom occurs again soon, replace the cartridge.
2) Transfer charging roller, Photosensitive drum, Developing cylinder
Is the transfer charging roller soiled or deformed?
YES: Replace the transfer charging roller.
NO: Replace the cartridge.
10. The output has white vertical lines.
1) Toner (lack of)

Take out the cartridge, shake it several times, and put it back in the
machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End. If the problem occurs again soon, replace the cartridge.
2) Photosensitive drum
Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive
drum?
3) Developing cylinder
Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the developing cylinder?
4) Laser optical system
Is there foreign matter in the laser outlet or the laser inlet of the cartridge?
YES: Remove the foreign matter.
5) Fixing upper roller, Laser scanner
Is there a scratch or a dent in the surface of the fixing upper roller?
YES: Replace the upper fixing roller.
NO: Replace the laser scanner unit.
4-38
11. The output has white horizontal lines (main scanning direction).
1) Development
Generate a halftone test print (TYPE=5). Are there white horizontal
lines on the output?
YES: Go to step 4).
NO: Go to step 2).
2) Optical path
Is the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, No. 1/2/3 mirror, standard white
plate, or copyboard glass soiled?
YES: Clean the soiled areas. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace the
part.
3) Original exposure system
Does the No. 1/No. 2 mirror mount move smoothly?
YES: Remove the cause that prevents smooth movement.
4) Photosensitive drum, Fixing roller
Are there scratches in the horizontal direction of the photosensitive
drum?
NO: Replace the fixing upper roller.
12. The output has poor fixing.
1) Fixing assembly envelope position lever

Does the envelope position lever of the fixing assembly remain up?
YES: Shift down the lever.
2) Fixing nip
Is the fixing nip within specification?
NO: Replace the fixing assembly.
3) Fixing roller
Is there a scratch or dent in the fixing roller?
YES: Replace the fixing roller.
4-39
4) Fixing lower roller, Thermistor

Is the fixing lower roller soiled?
YES: Clean the fixing lower roller. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace it.
NO: Replace the thermistor.
13. The image is distorted.
1) Connector (poor contact; on the DC controller PBC)

Are J202 and J207 on the DC controller PCB connected securely?
YES: Connect them securely.
2) Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
14. Troubleshooting Reader Unit Image Faults
1) Reader unit
Has the copyboard glass ridden over an object?
YES: Remove the foreign object.
Execute auto image adjustment in user mode. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Do the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base move smoothly?
NO: Remove the cause that prevents smooth movement.
Clean the standard while plate, No. 1/2/3 mirror, reflecting plate, and
copyboard glass; then, execute function>CCD>CCD-ADJ. Is the
problem corrected?
YES: End.
Compare the values indicated on the service label of the reader unit
against the values indicated under Adjust. Are they the same or
nearly the same?
NO: Enter the values indicated on the service label.
4-40
Remove the scanning lamp, and clear it. Then, mount the scanning
lamp, and execute Function>MISC-R>USE-LAM. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Remove the CCD cover, and clean the surface of the CCD with a
blower brush. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Clean it.
Is the contact of the CCD/CCD driver normal?
NO: Make the connection secure.
Try replacing the CCD/CCD driver. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Check to make sure that the connector of the reader controller
PCB is connected securely; if normal, replace the reader controller PCB.
Diameter
(mm)
Image interval
17.15
54
Fixing upper roller
45
141
Fixing lower roller
32
100
Pickup roller
24
75
Feed roller
24
75
Separation roller
24
75
Photosensitive drum
30
94
Developing cylinder
20
52
14
44
Faulty part
(mm; approx.)
Symptom
Soiling
White spot Soiled back Faulty fixing
Interval of soiling, white spot, or the like noted in images.
Table 4-201
4-41
III . Troubleshooting Malfunctions

A.
1.
Error Codes
E000/E003
Thermistor
1) Is the thermistor soiled?
YES: Clean the thermistor.
Is the thermistor in even contact with the fixing upper roller?
NO: Mount the thermistor correctly.
Turn off the power switch, and remove the fixing assembly. Measure the resistance between connectors J50B-2 (FSRTH) and J50B3 (GNDTH) on the fixing assembly side. Is it between 120k and 290k
?
NO: Check the wiring from J222 on the DC controller PCB to the thermistor; if normal, replace the thermistor.
Main heater
2) With the fixing assembly removed, is there electrical continuity between connectors J50-3 (FSRN1) and J50-5 (FSRL1) on the fixing
assembly side?
NO: Replace the main heater.
Sub heater
3) With the fixing assembly removed, is there electrical continuity between connectors J50-4 (FSRN2) and J50-5 (FSRL2) on the fixing
assembly side?
NO: Replace the sub heater.
Thermal switch, DC controller PCB
4) Remove the fixing assembly, and detach the wiring cover. Is there
electrical continuity between the terminals of the thermal switch?
NO: Replace the thermal switch.
YES: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-42
2.
E001
Thermistor
1) Turn off the power switch, and remove the fixing assembly. Then,
measure the resistance between connectors J50B-2 (FSRTH) and
J50B-3 (GNDTH) of the fixing assembly side. Is the resistance 1k
or less?
NO: Check the wiring from J222 on the DC controller PCB to the thermistor; if normal, replace the thermistor.
Power supply assembly, DC controller PCB
2) Replace the power supply assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
3.
E009
Fixing assembly
1) Is the fixing assembly rated at a voltage different from that of the
power supply?
YES: Replace the fixing assembly so that its voltage matches the fixing
assembly.
Power supply assembly, DC controller PCB
2) Replace the power supply assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4.
E010/E011
Connector
1) Is connector J12 of the main motor and connector J218 on the DC
controller PCB connected correctly?
YES: Connect them correctly.
4-43
Switch, Door switch of sensor PCB

2) Disconnect connectors J205 and J221 from the DC controller PCB.
Is there electrical continuity between J205-3 (+24 V) and J221-1
(+24 VB) on the harness side when the door switch (SW1401) is
turned on?
NO: Replace the switch/sensor PCB.
Main motor, DC controller PCB
3) Can the main motor be rotated using a printer driver checker?
NO: Replace the main motor.
5.
E040
Holding plate drive assembly

1) Is there any damaged part in the holding plate drive assembly?
YES: Replace any damaged part.
Holding plate position sensor
2) Check the condition of the sensor using the printer driver checker.
Is the result good?
NO: Replace the multifeeder tray PCB.
Holding plate solenoid, DC controller PCB
3) Disconnect connector J1302 of the holding plate solenoid, and measure the resistance between connectors J1302-1 and J1302-2 on the
harness side. Is the resistance about 100 ?
NO: Replace the holding plate solenoid.
6.
E054
Duplex feed roller 1 home position sensor lever

1) Is the duplex feed roller 1 home position sensor lever damaged?
YES: Replace the lever.
Duplex feed roller gear
2) Is the duplex feed roller gear worn or chipped?
YES: Replace the worn/chipped gear.
4-44
Duplex driver PCB

3) Are connectors J2003, J2004, and J2007 on the duplex driver PCB
connected securely?
NO: Connect them securely.
Duplex feed roller 1 home position sensor
4) Try replacing the duplex feed roller 1 home potion sensor. Is the
problem corrected?
YES: End.
Duplex feed clutch
5) Disconnect connector J2003 of the duplex feed clutch, and measure
the resistance between connectors J2003-1 and J2003-2 on the harness side. Is it about 140 ?
Duplex motor, Duplex motor driver PCB
6) Try replacing the duplex motor. Is the problem corrected?
NO: Replace the duplex driver PCB.
7.
E055
Horizontal registration guide

1) Is the horizontal registration guide mounted correctly?
NO: Mount it correctly.
Horizontal registration guide home position sensor lever
2) Is the horizontal registration guide home position sensor lever damaged?
YES: Replace the lever.
Horizontal registration guide drive gear
3) Is the horizontal registration guide drive gear worn/chipped?
YES: Replace the worn/chipped gear.
Duplex driver PCB
4) Are connectors J2006 and J2005 on the duplex driver PCB connected securely?
Horizontal registration guide home position sensor
5) Try replacing the horizontal registration guide home position. Is
the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the sensor.
4-45
Horizontal registration motor, Duplex drive motor PCB

6) Try replacing the horizontal registration motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the duplex driver PCB.
8.
E100/E102
Condensation
1) Leave the machine alone for 10 to 20 min. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
BD signal line connector
2) Are connector J6 on the BD PCB and connector J206 on the DC
controller PCB connected securely?
Laser driver signal line connector
3) Are connector J1001 on the laser driver PCB and connector J202 on
the DC controller PCB connected securely?
NO: Connect the connectors securely.
Laser scanner assembly, DC controller PCB
4) Try replacing the laser scanner assembly. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
9.
E110
Scanner motor drive line

1) Are connector J1 on the scanner driver PCB, relay connector J18,
and connector J207 on the DC controller PCB connected securely?
Scanner motor driver, DC controller PCB
2) Can the scanner motor be rotated using a printer driver checker?
NO: Replace the laser scanner.
4-46
10. E202
When this code is indicated, the control panel is locked, and the message will read
Please Wait.
This code is indicated only on the Error History screen in service mode.
Symptom
1) When E202 is indicated, is the scanner at home position?
NO: See The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse?
Original scanner home position sensor (PS1)
2) When the scanner is over PS1, is a 5-VDC output present at J117B8 on the reader controller PCB?
NO: Check the wiring from the reader controller PCB to PS1; if normal, replace PS1.
Wiring
3) Check the wiring from J113 of the reader controller PCB to J303/
302 on the original scanner motor driver PCB. Is there a fault?
YES: Correct the wiring.
Original scanner motor driver PCB
4) Try replacing the original scanner motor driver PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Original scanner motor (PM1), Reader controller PCB
5) Try replacing the original scanner motor (PM1). Is the problem
corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the reader controller PCB.
11. E203
Symptom
1) When E203 is indicated, does the scanner move?
NO: See The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.
4-47
Original scanner motor driver PCB, Original scanner motor

1) When the scanner starts to move forward, do the voltage between
J303-B1 (RST) and J303-B4 (GND) of the original scanner motor
driver PCB and between J303-B2 (MOVE*) and J303-B4 (GND)
change from 5 to 0 V?
YES: Try replacing the original scanner motor driver PCB. If the problem is not corrected, replace the original scanner motor.
12. E211/E215
Symptom
1) Disconnect connector J115 of the reader controller PCB, and measure the resistance between connectors J115-5 (GND) and J115-6
(FL-THE) on the harness side. Is it 10 or less or 100k or more?
NO: The reader controller PCB is faulty. Go to step 4).
YES: Go to step 2).
Lamp heater
2) Disconnect connector J2039 of the lamp heater, and measure the
resistance between connectors J2039-2 (GND) and J2039-3 (FLTHE) of the lamp heater. Is the resistance 100 or less or 100k or
more?
YES: Replace the lamp heater.
Flat cable and connector (poor contact)
3) Are connectors J115 of the reader controller PCB, connectors
J2037 and J2035 of the flat cable, and connector J2039 of the lamp
heater connected securely?
4) When the machine is turned on, is the voltage between HJ122-1
(GNDU) and J122-2 (+38 V) on the harness side of the connector of
the reader controller PCB 38 V?
NO: See The reader unit DC power supply is absent.
YES: Replace the reader controller PCB.
4-48
13. E216/E219
Scanning lamp (life)

1) Try replacing the scanning lamp. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Inverter PCB, Reader PCB
2) Try replacing the inverter PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
14. E217
Lamp heater
1) Try replacing the lamp heater. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
15. E220
Scanning lamp
1) Is the scanning lamp mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the scanning lamp correctly. (Caution)
2) Try replacing the scanning lamp. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the scanning lamp.
Inverter PCB
3) Are connectors J1002 and J1003 on the inverter PCB and connector
J129 on the reader controller PCB connected securely?
YES: Replace the inverter PCB.
Caution:
If you have to remove the scanning lamp and mount it back, be sure to
execute the following in service mode: Function>MISC-R>USELAMP.
If you have mounted a new scanning lamp, be sure to execute the following in service mode: Function>MISC-R>LAMP-ADJ for light intensity adjustment and then Function>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
4-49
16. E400/E402/E403/E404/E421
Perfrom the work according to the instructions in the service manual of the feeder.
17. E606
Connector (poor contact)

1) Are connectors J701 and J702 of the HDD and connectors J306 and
J307 of the relay PCB connected securely?
Relay PCB
2) Is connector J301 of the relay PCB and J1017 of the system controller PCB connected securely?
HDD, System controller PCB
3) Try replacing the HDD. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the system controller PCB.
18. E676/E677

1) Is the PDL PCB securely connected to J303 of the relay PCB?
NO: Connect it securely.
Relay PCB
2) Are connector J301 of the relay PCB and connector J1017 of the
system controller PCB connected securely?
PDL PCB, System controller PCB
3) Try replacing the PDL PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-50
19. E710/E711/E712/E713
Symptom
1) Turn off and then on the power. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End. If the problem occurs frequently, check the communication
cable to the finisher.
2) Is the connection between the machine and the finisher secure?
NO: Make the connection secure.
Communication cable
3) Try replacing the communication cable to the finisher. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Finisher controller PCB, System controller PCB
4) Try replacing the finisher controller PCB of the finisher. Is the
problem corrected?
YES: End.
20. E731/E734/E735

1) Are the network PCB, PDL PCB, relay PCB, system controller
PCB, and image processor PCB connected securely?
Relay PCB
2) Try replacing the relay PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
PDL PCB
3) Try replacing the PDL PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Network PCB
4) Try replacing the network PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-51
Image processor PCB, System controller PCB

5) Try replacing the image processor PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
21. E732
Communication cable
1) Is the communication cable between the reader and the controller
connected securely?
NO: Connect the cable securely.
2) Try replacing the communication cable. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the communication cable.
Reader unit power supply
3) Is the reader unit power supply normal?
NO: See The reader unit power supply is absent.
Interface PCB
4) Are connectors J102 of the interface PCB and J132 of the reader
controller PCB connected securely?
5) Try replacing the interface PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the interface PCB.
6) Try replacing the reader controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the reader controller PCB.
NO: Replace the image processor PCB.
22. E733

1) Is the controller unit mounted to the printer unit securely?
NO: Mount it correctly.
2) Are connector J1015 on the system controller PCB and connector
J501 on the image processor PCB connected securely?
4-52
Printer unit power supply

3) Does the printer unit execute initialization when the power is turned
on?
NO: See The printer unit power supply is absent.
DC controller PCB
4) Can the printer unit be operated using the printer checker driver?
NO: Replace the DC controller PCB
Controller unit
5) Try replacing the image processor PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the image processor PCB.
NO: System controller PCB
23. E736

1) Are connector J304 and J305 on the relay PCB and relay connector
J803 connected securely?
2) Are connector J301 on the relay PCB and connector J1017 on the
system controller PCB connected securely?
FAX PCB
3) Replace the FAX PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the FAX PCB.
24. E737
DIMM (controller)
1) Is the DIMM in the controller fitted to the socket firmly?
NO: Fit it firmly.
2) Try replacing the DIMM in the controller. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the DIMM.
4-53
25. E738/E741
Connection (poor contact)

1) Is the network PCB connected to the relay PCB securely?
Relay PCB
2) Is connector J301 of the relay PCB connected to connector J1017 of
the system controller PCB securely?
NO: Connect the connector securely.
Network PCB
3) Try replacing the network PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Relay PCB, System controller PCB
4) Try replacing the relay PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
26. E804

1) Is connector J216 on the DC controller PCB connected securely?
Printer unit power supply cooling fan (FM2)
2) Disconnect J210 of the DC controller PCB. Does the voltage between connectors J216-1 (FAN2D) and J2163 (GND) of the DC controller PCB change from 0 to about 18 V immediately after the
power switch is turned on?
YES: Replace the printer unit power supply cooling fan.
27. E805

1) Are connector J225 on the DC controller PCB and relay connectors
J25 and J26 connected securely?
4-54
Fixing assembly fan (FAN4)

2) Disconnect J225 from the DC controller PCB. Does the voltage between connectors J225-1 (FAN4D) and J225-03 (GND) on the DC
controller PCB change from 0 to about 18 V immediately after the
YES: Replace the fixing assembly fan (FM4).
28. E807

1) Is connector J208 on the DC controller PCB connected securely?
NO: Connect the connector securely.
Fixing/scanning fan (FAN1)
2) Disconnect J208 of the DC controller PCB. Does the voltage between connectors J208-1 (FAN1D) and J208-3 (GND) change from
0 to about 18 V immediately after the power switch is turned on?
YES: Replace the fixing/scanner fan (FM1).
29. E826

1) Are connector J229 on the DC controller PCB and relay connectors
J34 and J35 connected securely?
Multifeeder tray fan (FM5)
2) Disconnect J229 from the DC controller PCB. Does the voltage between connectors J229-1 (FAN5D) and J229-3 (GND) on the DC
controller PCB change from 0 to bout 18 V immediately after the
YES: Replace the multifeeder tray fan (FM5).
4-55
B.
1.
Faults Other Than Those Indicated by Error Codes

The reader unit AC power is absent.
Power plug
1) Is the power plug connected to the power outlet?
NO: Connect the power plug.
Power source
2) Is the rated AC power present at the power outlet?
NO: The fault is not in the machine. Advise the user.
General condition
3) Is the rated voltage present between connectors J1101-1 and J11013 on the noise filter PCB of the reader unit?
YES: Go to step 9.
Leakage breaker (ELCB1)
4) Is the switch of the leakage breaker of the reader unit on the OFF
side?
YES: Check the AC power supply unit and the line; if a fault is found,
replace the part. If no fault is found, shift the switch of the leakage breaker to the ON side.
5) Check to find out whether there is electrical continuity across the
terminals of the leakage breaker (ELCB1). Is the resistance 0 ?
YES: Turn on and off the switch of the leakage breaker several times,
and make a check on electrical continuity. If the resistance is not
0 , replace the leakage breaker.
Connector
6) Is connector J1022-3 of the main controller PCB connected?
NO: Connect the connector.
Power cord, Noise filter PCB
7) Try replacing the power cord and the noise filter PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the faulty part.
4-56
Reader unit main power switch/wiring

8) Connect the probes of the meter across both terminals of the reader
unit main power switch. Is the resistance 0 when the switch is
turned on and when the switch is turned off?
YES: Replace the reader unit main power switch.
NO: Check the AC power line for a wiring fault and poor connector
connection.
2.
The reader unit DC power supply is absent.
AC power supply
1) Is there AC power between connectors J1-1 and J1-9 on the reader
unit DC power supply PCB?
NO: See 1. The reader unit AC power supply is absent.
Overcurrent, Overvoltage (protection activated), Reader unit DC power supply PCB
2) Turn off the reader unit main power switch, and disconnect the
power plug. After about 3 min, connect the power plug, and turn on
the reader unit main power switch. Is the operation normal?
YES: The reader unit DC power supply PCB is normal, but the protective circuit has turned on. Remove the cause that turned on the
protective circuit, and turn on the power.
NO: Replace the reader unit DC power supply PCB.
3.
The printer unit AC power supply is absent.
Power plug
NO: Connect the power plug.
Source power supply
2) Is the rated AC power present at the power outlet?
NO: The fault is not in the machine. Advise the user.
4-57

3) Is the switch of the leakage breaker of the printer unit on the OFF
side?
YES: Check the AC power system unit and the line; if a fault is found,
replace the part. If no fault is found, shift the switch of the leakage breaker to the ON side.
4) Check to find out whether there is electrical continuity across both
YES: Turn on and then on the switch of the leakage breaker several
times, and make a check on electrical continuity once gain. If the
resistance is not 0 , replace the leakage breaker.
Connector
5) Are connectors J1022-5 and J1022-6 on the main controller PCB
connected?
NO: Connect the connectors.
Power cut relay
6) Try replacing the power cut relay. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the power cut relay.
Printer unit main power switch, Wiring
7) Connect the probes of the meter across both terminals of the printer
turned on and when the switch is turned off?
YES: Try replacing the printer unit main power switch.
NO: Check the AC power supply line for a wiring fault or poor connector contact.
4.
The printer unit DC power is absent.
AC power supply
1) Is there AC power present between connectors CN101-1 and
CN101-4 on the printer unit DC power supply PCB?
NO: See 1. The printer unit AC power supply is absent.
4-58
Overcurrent, Overvoltage (protective circuit activated), Printer unit DC power supply PCB
2) Turn off the printer unit main power switch, and disconnect the
power plug. After about 3 min, connect the power plug to the power
outlet, and turn on the printer unit main power switch. Is the operation normal?
YES: The printer unit DC power supply PCB is normal, but the protective circuit has turned on. Remove the cause that turned on the
NO: Replace the printer unit DC power supply PCB.
5.
The controller unit AC power supply is absent.
Power supply plug

NO: Connect the plug.
Power source
2) Is the rated AC power supply present at the power outlet?
NO: The problem is not in the machine. Advise the user.
Leakage breaker (ELCB2; off)
3) Is the switch of the leakage breaker of the printer unit on the OFF
side?
YES: Check the AC power supply system unit and the line; if a fault is
found, replace the part. If no fault is found, shift the switch of the
leakage breaker to the ON side.
Leakage breaker (ELCB; faulty)
4) Check to find out whether there is electrical continuity across both
YES: Turn on and off the leakage breaker several times, and make a
check on electrical continuity. If the resistance is not 0 , replace
the leakage breaker.
Power cord, Noise filter PCB
5) Try replacing the power cord and the noise filter PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: Replace the faulty part.
4-59
Printer unit main power switch, Wiring

6) Connect the probes of the meter across the terminals of the printer
turned on and when it is turned off?
YES: Replace the printer unit main power switch.
NO: Check the AC power supply line for faulty wiring and poor connector connection.
6.
The controller unit DC power supply is absent.
AC power supply
1) Is there AC power between connectors J1-1 and J1-5 on the controller unit DC power supply PCB?
NO: See 7. The controller unit AC power supply is absent.
Overcurrent, Overvoltage (protective circuit activated), Controller unit DC power supply PCB
2) Turn off the reader unit main power switch, and disconnect the
power plug. After about 3 min, connect the power plug to the power
outlet, and turn on the printer unit main power switch. Is the operation normal?
YES: The controller unit DC power supply PCB is normal, but the protective circuit has turned on. Remove the cause that turned on the
NO: Try replacing the controller unit DC power supply PCB.
+24 VU is absent.
+24 VAR is absent.
7.
The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.
Cable (broken, displaced)

1) Is the scanner drive cable routed correctly?
NO: Route the cable correctly.
4-60
Rail
2) Is the rail free of dirt? Push the mirror base by hand. Does it move
smoothly?
NO: Check the rail for foreign matter or any object that may come into
contact with the scanner. As necessary, clean, lubricate, or correct.
Reference: If the rail is soiled, clean it with alcohol, and then
apply a small amount of silicone oil.
3) Is the original scanner home positioner (PS1) normal?
See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.
NO: Check the wiring and the light-blocking plate; if normal, replace
the sensor.
Connector, Wiring
4) Are connector J301 of the original scanner motor driver PCB and
connectors J3, J5, and J6 of the reader unit main power supply PCB
connected securely?
Reader unit DC power supply
5) Measure the voltage of the following terminals of the connectors on
the original scanner motor driver PCB. Is it as indicated?
J310-9 and -8: +5.2 V (approx.)
J310-7 and -6: +15 V (approx.)
J301-5 and -6: -12 V (approx.)
J301-4 and -2: +38 V (approx.)
J301-3 and -1: +38 V (approx.)
NO: See the reader unit DC power supply is absent.
Original scanner motor driver PCB, original Scanner Motor (PM1)
6) Try replacing the original scanner motor driver PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO: Replace the scanner motor.
4-61
8.
Pickup fails. (multifeeder manual pickup)
Controller unit
1) Using a printer checker driver, make a test print using the
multifeeder manual pickup tray. Is pickup normal?
YES: Replace the controller unit.
Gear
2) Remove the multifeeder pickup assembly, and check the gears. Is
there any damaged gear?
YES: Replace the damaged gear.
Multifeeder pickup clutch
3) Remove the multifeeder pickup assembly, and disconnect connector J1303 of the multifeeder pickup clutch from the multifeeder
tray PCB; then, measure the resistance between connectors J1303-1
and J1303-2 on the harness side. Is it about 155 ?
NO: Replace the multifeeder pickup clutch.
Multifeeder tray PCB, DC controller PCB
4) Try replacing the multifeeder tray. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
9.
Pickup fails (upper/lower cassette)
Controller unit
1) Using the printer checker driver, make a test print using the cassette in question. Is pickup normal?
YES: Replace the controller unit.
NO: Refer to IV. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults.
4-62
IV . Troubleshooting Feeding Faults

A.
Paper Jams
Jams occurring in the machine are grouped according to location:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1.
Multifeeder pickup assembly

Cassette pickup assembly
Transfer/feeding assembly
Fixing/delivery assembly
Multifeeder Pickup Assembly
1) Paper
Is the paper curled appreciably?
YES: Correct the curling, and advise the user not to use curled paper.
2) Multifeeder pickup roller
Is the multifeeder pickup roller worn, deformed, or soiled?
YES: If the pickup roller is soiled, clean it. If worn or deformed, replace
it.
3) Sensor spring
Is the sensor spring mounted correctly?
NO: Mount the spring correctly. If faulty, replace it.
4) Gear
Is any of the gears of the multifeeder pickup assembly damaged?
YES: Replace the damaged gear.
5) Multifeeder pickup clutch
Remove the multifeeder pickup assembly, and disconnect connector
J1303 of the multifeeder pickup clutch from the multifeeder pickup
tray PCB; then, measure the resistance between connectors J1303-1
and J1303-2 on the harness side. Is it about 150 ?
NO: Replace the Multifeeder pick up clutch.
6) Multifeeder pickup PCB, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the multifeeder PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
4-63
2.
Cassette pickup assembly
1) Paper
Is the paper bent or otherwise faulty?
YES: Replace the paper.
2) Pickup roller, Separation roller, Feed roller
Is the pickup roller, separation roller, or feed roller worn or deformed?
YES: Replace any worn or deformed roller. Be sure to replace both
separation roller and feed roller at the same time.
3) Pickup drive assembly
Is any parts of the pickup drive assembly damaged?
YES: Replace any damaged part.
4) Pickup motor
Can the pickup motor be rotated using the printer driver checker?
NO: Replace the pickup motor.
5) Cassette pickup solenoid
Remove the pickup assembly, and disconnect connector J1203 of the
pickup solenoid from the pickup PCB; then, measure the resistance
between connectors J1203-1 and J1203-2 on the harness side. Is it
about 190 ?
NO: Replace the cassette pickup solenoid.
6) Pickup PCB, DC controller PCB
Try replacing the pickup PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
3.
Transfer/Feeding assembly
1) Registration roller
Is the registration roller soiled, worn, or deformed?
YES: Clean the roller. If worn or deformed, replace it.
2) Transfer roller
Does the transfer roller rotate smoothly?
NO: Replace the transfer roller. If the gear is worn, replace it.
4-64
3) Registration sensor lever

Does the registration sensor lever move smoothly?
YES: Set the lever so that it moves smoothly. If damaged, replace it.
4) Registration roller drive gear
Is the registration roller drive gear damaged?
YES: Replace the gear.
5) Registration clutch, DC controller PCB
Disconnect connector J17 of the registration clutch, and measure the
resistance between connectors J17-1 and J17-2 on the harness side. Is
it about 210 ?
NO: Replace the registration clutch.
4.
Fixing/Delivery Assembly
1) Paper
Is the paper picked up from the multifeeder longer than the selected
size of paper?
YES: Advise the user to use paper of the selected size.
2) Fixing roller
Does the fixing roller rotate smoothly?
NO: Replace any damaged part.
3) Fixing assembly inlet guide
Is the fixing assembly inlet guide soiled, or is its surface uneven because of adhesion of toner?
YES: Clean the fixing assembly inlet guide.
4) Fixing separation guide
Is the fixing separation guide soiled, or is its surface uneven because of
adhesion of toner?
YES: Clean the fixing separation guide.
5) Fixing separation claws
Is any of the fixing separation claws damaged?
YES: Replace the fixing separation claws.
6) Fixing upper roller/lower roller
Is the fixing upper roller/lower roller deformed or damaged?
YES: Replace the deformed or damaged roller.
4-65
7) Fixing nip
Is the fixing nip as indicated?
NO: Replace the fixing assembly.
8) Fixing delivery sensor lever
Does the fixing delivery sensor lever move smoothly?
NO: Mount it so that it moves smoothly. If damaged, replace it.
9) Fixing delivery roller
Is the fixing delivery roller worn?
YES: Replace the fixing delivery roller.
10)Fixing delivery roller
Does the fixing delivery roller rotate smoothly?
NO: Ceck the gear for wear and chipping. If a fault is found, replace it.
11)Face-down delivery/Fixing delivery sensor
Does the face-down delivery roller move smoothly?
NO: Check the gear for wear and chipping. If a fault is found, replace
it.
YES: Replace the fixing delivery sensor.
4-66
B.
1.
Faulty Feeding
Double Feeding
Is the problem on the multifeeder tray?
YES: Go to step 4.
2) Separation roller spring
Is the spring used to pull the separation roller normal?
NO: Replace the spring used to pull the separation roller.
3) Separation roller
Is the separation roller deformed or worn?
YES: Replace the separation roller. Be sure also to replace the feed
roller whenever replacing the separation roller.
4) Separation pad, Separation pad spring
Is the surface of the separation pad worn?
YES: Replace the separation pad. Be sure also to replace the
multifeeder tray whenever replacing the separation pad.
NO: Replace the separation pad spring.
2.
Wrinkles, Bending of leading edge
1) Paper
Is the paper curled?
YES: Advise the user to correct curling before feeding paper.
Execute test printing, and open the upper cover before the paper
moves into the fixing assembly. Is the paper wrinkled at this point?
YES: Go to step 6.
3) Fixing assembly inlet guide
Is the fixing assembly inlet guide soild?
YES: Clean the fixing assembly inlet guide.
4) Fixing lower roller
Is the fixing lower roller soiled?
YES: Clean the fixing lower roller.
4-67
5) Fixing roller
Is the fixing roller worn or deformed?
YES: Replace the fixing roller.
6) Feed roller, Registration roller, Feeding guide
Is the feed roller, registration roller, or feeding guide coated with paper lint or dust?
YES: Clean the soiled areas.
NO: If scratches are found on the feeding guide, replace it.
3.
Skew
1) Feed roller, Registration roller, Feeding guide

Is the feed roller, registration roller, or feeding guide coated with paper lint or dust?
YES: Clean the soiled areas.
2) Registration roller assembly spring
Is the spring of the registration roller displaced?
YES: Correct the spring, or replace it.
4-68
V . Arrangement and Functions of Electric Parts

A.
Sensors
PS6
PS5
PS1
PS4
PS3
PS1402
PS2
PS1401
PS1403
PS1302
PS1301
PS1
PS1208
PS1202
PS1206
PS1205
PS3
PS2
PS1207
PS1201
PS1204
PS1203
Figure 4-501
4-69
Reader unit
Symbol
Name
Notation
Photointerrupter
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS1201
PS1202
PS1203
PS1204
PS1205
PS1206
PS1207
PS1208
PS1301
PS1302
PS1401
PS1402
PS1403
Printer unit
Photointerrupter
Description
Original scanner home position sensor
ADF open/closed sensor
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Registration paper sensor
Pickup sensor
Pickup unit sensor
Lower cassette sensor
Upper cassette sensor
Lower cassette paper level sensor 1
Lower cassette paper level sensor 2
Upper cassette paper level sensor 1
Upper cassette paper level sensor 2
Lower cassette paper sensor
Upper cassette paper sensor
Multifeeder tray paper sensor
Holding plate position sensor
Face-down delivery tray full sensor
Face-down delivery tray paper sensor
Fixing delivery paper sensor
Table 4-501
4-70
B.
Thermistor, Lamps, and Heaters
ELCB1
LA1
THM
H1
MSW1
SW1401
MSW1
TH TSW
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
SW101
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
Figure 4-502
4-71
Name
Notation
Description
Thermistor
THM
Original scanning lamp thermistor
Lamp
LA1
Scanning lamp
Heater leakage
breaker
H1
ELCB1
MSW1
Scanning lamp heater

Leakage breaker
Reader unit rear power switch
MSW1
SW101
SW1401
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
TH
TSW
Printer unit power switch

Printer unit power switch (w/ face plate)
Door switch
Cassette 2 size detecting switch 1
Thermistor
Thermal switch
Printer unit
Reader unit
Symbol
Thermistor
Thermal switch
Table 4-502
4-72
C.
Clutches and Solenoids
SL3
CL1
ELCB2
SL2
CL3
RLY1
CL2
SL1
Figure 4-503
4-73
Symbol
Name
Notation
Leakage breaker
Clutch
ELCB2
CL1
CL2
CL3
Leakage breaker
Registration clutch
Feeding clutch
Multifeeder pickup clutch
Solenoid
SL1
SL2
SL3
RLY1
Cassette pickup solenoid

Holding plate solenoid
Face-up delivery solenoid
Power cut relay
CL
SL
Relay
Description
Table 4-503
4-74
D.
Fans, Motors, and Heater
FM1
FM2
PM1
FAN4
FAN2
FAN6
FAN5
H2
H1
FAN3
MT1
FAN1
SMT1
Figure 4-504
4-75
Symbol
Name
Fan
Heater
Motor
Notation
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4
FAN5
FAN6
FM1
FM2
H1
H2
MT1
PM1
SMT1
Description
Fixing assembly/scanner fan
Power supply fan
Electrical unit fan
Fixing assembly fan
Multifeeder fan
Controller power supply cooling fan
Heat discharge fan 1
Heat discharge fan 2
Fixing main heater
Fixing sub heater
Main motor
Original scanner motor
Pickup motor
Table 4-504
4-76
E.
PCBs
[2]
[1]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[16]
[3]
[17]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[22]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[9]
[10]
[22]
[21]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[15]
[14]
Figure 4-505
4-77
Printer unit
Reader unit
Ref.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
Name
Description
Reader unit main power supply PCB

Interface PCB
Original Scanner motor driver PCB
Inverter PCB
Intensity detection PCB
CCD/CCD driver PCB
Noise filter PCB
Accessory power supply PCB
Control panel CPU PCB
Control panel PCB
System controller PCB
Memory PCB
PDL PCB
Network PCB
Relay PCB
Image processor PCB
DC controller PCB
Noise filter PCB
Upper cassette size detection PCB
Controller DC power supply PCB
Multifeeder tray PCB
Pickup PCB
Lower cassette size detection PCB
SRAM PCB
Fan relay PCB
Switch/sensor PCB
BD PCB
Laser scanner motor driver PCB
Laser driver PCB
Relay PCB
High-voltage power supply PCB
Supplies power to the reader unit.

Communicates with the controller unit.
Controls reader unit sequence
Controls the original scanner motor drive.
Drives the scanning lamp.

Detects the intensity of light of the scanning lamp.
Drives the CCD.

Removes noise from the power supply line.
Supplies power to the DADF

Controls control panel sequence.
Controls key inputs.
Controls the system.
Stores machine information.
Converts PDL data into image data.
Controls network connection.
Relays PCBs.
Controls image processing.
Controls the printer unit.
Removes noise from the power supply line.
Detects the size of paper in the upper cassette.
Supplies power to the printer unit.

Controls pickup loads when the multifeeder is selected.
Controls pickup loads when the cassette is selected.
Detects the size of paper in the lower cassette.
Stores machine information.

Connects the controller unit cooling fan.
Controls switches/sensors.
Detects the laser beam.
Controls the laser scanner motor drive.
Controls the laser output.
Turns on/off the printer unit power.
Controls the high-voltage power supply.
Table 4-505
4-78
F.
Duplex Unit
M8
SL
SL
PS2
PS2
M
PS2
CL
PS2
[1]
Figure 4-506
Symbol
CL
SL
Name
Clutch
CL5
Duplex feeding clutch
Photointerrupter
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
SL6
SL7
M7
M8
Duplex feed roller 1 home position sensor

Duplex unit paper sensor
Horizontal guide home position sensor
Reversal paper sensor
Duplex flapper solenoid
Reversing roller releasing solenoid
Horizontal registration motor
Duplex motor
Solenoid
Motor
Ref.
[1]
Description
Notation
Description
Name
Duplex driver PCB
Controls loads inside the duplex unit and executes detection operations.
Table 4-506
4-79
G.
Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check

Pins by PCB
Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine, those needed in the field are discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch the VRs or check pins not found in the lists. They are for use at the factory only,
and require special tools and a level of accuracy based on correct measurement.
Caution:
1. Some LEDs emit dim light because of leakage current when they are off; this is a normal
condition, and must be kept in mind.
2. VRs that may be use in the field ...............................
VRs that must not be used in the field ......................
1.
a.
Reader Unit
Reader Controller PCB
1
B50
61
62
J1614
4 1
2
J1613
A50
119
120
59
60
13
J1602
1
J1612
6
B1
1
A1
SW1601
8
2 1
J1615
J1604
1
J1611
7
J1601
VR1601B12 B1
J1609
J1610
A1 A12
1
7
J1607 B15
B1 B11
B1
J1608
J1606
1 2 A1
A15 A1
A11
FLASH ROM
82 4MB
1
6
1
B8
B1
J1605
A1
A8
Figure 4-507
4-80
Name
Notation
Description
VR1601 Original scanning lamp
adjusting VR
SW1601 Site DIP SW
Used when replacing the original scanning lamp,

light intensity detection PCB, or standard white plate.
See the next page
Table 4-507
4-81
Details of SW1601
SW1601
SW7
SW6
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
1
Reserved
AB/Inch original size sensor arrangement
Counter series
AB/Inch series
Figure 4-508
AB/Inch series
Series
SW1 SW2
AB
Inch
AB/Inch
Table 4-508
Counter Series
Series
SW3 SW4
Japan
North America
Taiwan,
General,
Korea
UK, Australia,
France,
Germany,
Europe, Italy
Table 4-509
AB/Inch Original Size Arrangement

Series
SW5 SW6
AB
Inch
None
Table 4-510
Reserved 6 (default)
SW7
0
Table 4-511
4-82
b.
Original Scanner Motor Driver PCB

B8
B1
J303
A8
A1
J301
J302
Figure 4-509
2.
a.
Printer Unit
DC Controller PCB
J208
J225
LED201
J206
J207
J202
J204
J215
J218
J229
J223
J220
J210
J214
J221 J216 J209
J219
J213
J222
J212
J205
J201
SW201
J203
J217
Figure 4-510
4-83
b.
Switch/Sensor PCB
J1402
2
1
1
3
14
SW1401
4
J1401
Figure 4-511
SW No.
Description
SW1401 Door switch
Table 4-512
c.
Cassette Paper Size Detecting Switch PCB
J1601
SW1604 SW1603 SW1602 SW1601
Figure 4-512
SW No.
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
Description
Switch for cassette
size detection
(Printer service
manual p. 4-6P)
Table 4-513
4-84
d.
High-Voltage Power Supply PCB
VR702
B12
B1
VR701
A12 J701
TB706
A1
TB705
TB703
TB702
TB701
TB704
1
T704
Figure 4-513
VR No.
VR701
VR702
Function
For factory
Table 4-514
4-85
3.
a.
Controller Unit
System Controller PCB
J1046 J1008
J1045
J1002
J1001
J1010
J1015
J1030
J1007
J1017
J1011
J1020
J1023 J1022
J1042
SW1
J1021 J1041
Figure 4-514
b.
Memory PCB
J30
Figure 4-515
4-86
c.
SRAM PCB
J601
Figure 4-516
d.
PDL PCB
Connector for PCL firmware

J1
IC100
Connector for expansion RAM
J3
Figure 4-517
4-87
e.
Network PCB
J502
Figure 4-518
f.
Relay PCB
J304
J306
J303
J307
J302
J301
Figure 4-519
4-88
g.
Image Processor PCB
J402
J401
J403
Figure 4-520
h.
Parallel Connector PCB
J1653
J1651
J1652
Figure 4-521
4-89
4.
a.
Fax Unit
G3 Fax PCB
J4
J6
J3
J7
J5
Figure 4-522
b.
NCU PCB
J3
J1
Figure 4-523
4-90
c.
Modular Jack PCB
J102
J101
Figure 4-524
4-91
VI . Upgrading the Controller System

The controller system may be upgraded by downloading from a PC.
A.
Before Starting the Work
Obtain the following:
4-92
PC to which the service support tool (download tool; version 1.2J or later) has been installed
Bi-Centronics cable (w/ the notation "IEEE 1284 Std-compliant")
System CD
B.
Managing Data
1) Start up the service support tool.

2) Select next on the data management side.
Figure 4-601
3) On the Management Work screen of the ROM data, select add data.
Figure 4-602
4-93
4) On the following screen, select register from selected folder.
Figure 4-603
5) Select the drive in which the System CD has been inserted.
6) Select the file of the version in question, and click register.
Figure 4-604
4-94
C.
1.
Downloading
Connection
Check to make sure that the machines data lamp is off.
1) Turn off the machines two main power switches, and disconnect the power plug. If the network cable and the fax board are installed, disconnect the cable.
2) Connect the PC to the parallel connector on the controller side with a parallel cable.
The PC must remain off.

The 25-pin terminal of the parallel cable must be connected to the PC while its 36-pin terminal must be connected to the machine.
3) Turn on the PC, and start up the service support tool.

4) Connect the machines power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch
(reader side first and then the printer side).
2. Starting Downloading
1) Select next on the download/upload side.
Figure 4-605
4-95
2) Select SYSTEM or RUI, and then select connect.
Figure 4-606
3) Start the machines service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>Functions>
SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD; then, click OK so that the machine will be in download standby
mode (indicating STANDBY).
4) When the machine is ready, click OK of the Service Support Tool screen.
Figure 4-607
4-96
5) When connection ends, the following screen will appear. Select OK.
Figure 4-608
6) Select download system software on the Service Support Tool screen.
Figure 4-609
4-97
7) Select the desired language and the site on the Service Support Tool screen from list of software; then, click start to start downloading.
Figure 4-610
8) See that the progress of work is indicated during downloading.
Figure 4-611
9) When downloading has ended, turn off the PC as follows: OK>go to basic selection menu>go
to previous screen>end.
4-98
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
After Downloading
Turn off the machines main switch, and disconnect the power plug.
Turn off the PC.
Remove the parallel cable from the PC and the machine.
If the network cable and the fax board are installed, fit the cable to its slot, and turn on the
machines main switch.
5) When the machine has started up, start service mode and check the system version of the HDD:
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>MN_CNT.
4-99
VII . Service Mode

A.
Outline
The service mode screens are in a 3-layer construction: Initial screen, Level 1/Level 2 screens,
and Level 3 screens.
User screen
( )(2,8)( )
Reset key
Initial screen
Reset key
Select an item.
Level 1/ Level 2
From Level
screen
1/ Level 2
screen
Select a Level 1
item at the top of
the screen.
Use the Level 3 key to make a selection.

Previous/
NEXT
PREV
Next page
Level 3 screen
PREV
Level 3 screen
NEXT
Previons/
Next page
PREV
Level 3 screen
NEXT
Previous/
Next page
PREV
Level 3 screen
NEXT
Previous/
Next page
Figure 4-A701 Screen Construction
4-100
The machines service mode consists of seven modes and fax service modes:
COPIER
Control display mode
FEEDER
DISPLAY
BOARD
I/O
I/O display mode
ADJUST
Adjustment mode
FUNCTION
OPTION
TEST
COUNTER
FAX
Operation/inspection mode
Settings mode
Test print mode
Counter mode
#1 through #10
Figure 4-A702 Classification of Service Mode

1.
Starting Service Mode and Making selections

1) Press the asterisk key on the control panel.
2) Press 2 and 8 on the keypad at the same time.
3) Press the asterisk key on the control panel.
The above operations will bring up the Initial screen.
Service mode of the machine

COPIER
FEEDER
Service mode of the ADF

If installed
FAX
Service mode of the fax

If installed
BOARD
Service mode of the accessory board

If installed
Figure 4-A703 Initial Screen
4-101
2.
Ending Service Mode

Press the Reset key once to return to the service mode Initial screen (Figure 4-A703).
Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and return to the User screen (standard).
Caution:
If you used Adjust, Function, or Option mode, be sure to turn off and then on the power after
executing it.
3.
Backing Up the RAM

Each reader is adjusted before shipment, and the settings are recorded on the service label
(back of the front cover).
Replacing the reader controller PCB or clearing the RAM affects these settings. Be sure to
enter the new settings in service mode.
The printer unit does not have a service label.
If you made adjustments or changed the settings of service mode in the field, be sure to record
the new settings on the service label.
COPIER/ADJUST
ADF-XY ADF-X
ADF-Y
CCD
FACTRY 1 2 3 4 5
COPIER/ADJUST
CCD
B-GB
AL-RG
AL-GB
FACTRY 1 2 3 4 5
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
A-RG
B-RG
A-GB
Figure 4-A704 Service Label
4-102
4.
a.
Basic operation
Initial Screen
COPIER
Initial items
FEEDER
Touch an item to
select.
FAX
BOARD
Figure 4-A705
b.
Level 1/Level 2 Screen
Display
I/O
Adjust Function Option Test
Counter
Level 1 items
Touch an item to
select.
VERSION
USER
ALARM-1
CCD
ACC-STS
Level 2 items
Touch an item to
select.
JAM
SENSOR
ERR
MISC
Figure 4-A706
4-103
c.
Level 3 Screen
Page number
Display
I/O

< 1/2>
<VERSION>
Level 2 items
Level 3 items
Counter
< READY >
IP
00.00
PANEL
00.00
SCANNER
00.00
FEEDER
00.00
SORTER
00.00
FAX
00.00
WAITING:
PS/PCL
00.00
DOOR:
LIPS
00.00
PREV
State of the machine

is ready for servicing/
copying operation.
has detected a paper jam.
is executing service
operator.
is executing initial rotation
(or the like).
has detected that the door
is open.
is executing copying option.
has detected a service error.
READY:
JAM:
SERVICE:
COPYING:
ERROR:
NEXT
Previous page
Next page
Figure 4-A707
Display
I/O
< 1/1 >
<LAMP>
< READY >
FL-OFST
xxxxx
(yyyyy) {aaaaa~bbbbb}
FL-DUTY
xxxxx
FL-PDUTY
xxxxx
Press an item to highlight

(reverse video).
Counter
Input range
Before a change
Input value
FL-OFST
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Use to store the input value.
Press to toggle between + and -.

Stop
key: press it to stop the ongoing operation.
Clear
key: press it to clear a value.
Start
key: use it to make a copy in service ode.
Figure 4-A708
4-104
B.
DISPLAY (control display mode)

The following is the COPIER>DISPLAY screen; for Level 3 items, see the next page.
Display
I/O
VERSION
Counter
CCD
USER
ACC-STS
SENSOR
JAM
MISC
ERR
ALARM-1
Figure 4-B701 COPIER>DISPLAY Screen
4-105
COPIER>DISPLAY Items
Level 1
DISPLAY
4-106
Level 2
Level 3
Description
VERSION
IP
PANEL
SCANNER
FEEDER
SORTER
FAX
PC/PCL
LIPS
DECK
MN-CONT
P-CONT
BOOT-ROM
ROM version of the image processor PCB

ROM version of the control panel PCB
ROM version of the original scanner motor PCB
ROM version of the feeder controller PCB
ROM version of the finisher controller PCB
ROM version of the fax board
ROM version of the PC/PCL controller PCB
ROM version of the LIPS controller PCB
ROM version of the deck controller PCB
ROM version of the main controller PCB
ROM version of the printer DC controller PCB
version of the BOOT ROM
USER
LANGUAGE language used, paper size series
ACC-STS
FEEDER
SORTER
DECK
connection of the feeder

connection of the finisher
connection of the paper deck
JAM
jam history
ERR
error history
CCD
TARGET-B
TARGET-G
TARGET-R
BOF-B
BOF-G
BOF-R
OFST-OB
OFST-OG
OFST-OR
OFST-EB
OFST-EG
OFST-ER
GAIN-OB
GAIN-OG
GAIN-OR
GAIN-EB
GAIN-EG
GAIN-ER
CCD-TYPE
shading target value of BLUE

shading target value of GREEN
shading target value of RED
output value of the CCD for BLUE when the scanning lamp is off
output value of the CCD for GREEN when the scanning lamp is off
output value of the CCD for RED when the scanning lamp is off
offset level value for CCD odd-number bit BLUE (SH-SW=0)
offset level value for CCD odd-number bit GREEN (SH-SW=0)
offset level value for CCD odd-number bit RED (SH-SW=0)
offset level value for CCD even-number bit BLUE (SH-SW=0)
offset level value for CCD even-number bit GREEN (SH-SW=0)
offset level value for CCD even-number bit RED (SH-SW=0)
gain level value for CCD odd-number bit BLUE (SH-SW=0)
gain level value for CCD odd-number bit GREEN (SH-SW=0)
gain level value for CCD odd-number bit RED (SH-SW=0)
gain level value for CCD even-number bit BLUE (SH-SW=0)
gain level value for CCD even-number bit GREEN (SH-SW=0)
gain level value for CCD even-number bit RED (SH-SW=0)
not used
SENSOR
SC-HP
DOC-SZ
original scanner home position sensor

original size detected by the original size sensor
MISC
FL-LIFE
life of the scanning lamp
ALARM-1
DF
most recent alarm for the feeder
VERSION
Indicates the ROM version of the copier and accessory PCBs.
Level 1
Remarks
Description
IP
ROM version of the image processor PCB
PANEL
ROM version of the control panel PCB
SCANNER
ROM version of the original scanner motor PCB
FEEDER
ROM version of the feeder controller PCB
SORTER
ROM version of the finisher controller PCB
FAX
ROM version of the fax controller PCB
PS/PCL
ROM version of the PS/PCL controller PCB
LIPS
ROM version of the LIPS controller PCB
DECK
ROM version of the deck controller PCB
MN-CONT
ROM version of the main controller PCB
P-CONT
ROM version of the printer DC controller PCB
Indication <xx. yy>

Version number
R&D control number
BOOT-ROM ROM version of the BOOT ROM
USER
Indicates items related to the User screen and the user.
Level 1
Description
Remarks
LANGUAGE
language used, type of paper size

control
Indication <LANGUAGE JP jp. oo. aa>

Country code
aa
00
01
02
03
Language used
Destination
00:CANON
01:OEM
02:COMMON
AB series
Inch series
A series
All sizes
Paper series code
ACC-STS
Level 1
Description
FEEDER
Connection of the feeder
SORTER
Connection of the finisher
DECK
Connection of the paper deck pedestal
Remarks
1: connected, 0: not connected
4-107
JAM
Indicates jam data.
Display
I/O

< 1/7 >
< JAM >
Counter
< READY >
01 AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII

PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Figure 4-B702 JAM Screen
Level 3
Description
Remarks
AAA
Order of occurrence (higher the number, the older the jam)
1 to 50
BBBB
Date of occurrence
Month, day (2 digits each)
CCCC
Time of occurrence
24-hr notation
DDDD
Return time
24-hr notation
Location of occurrence
0: machine, 1: feeder, 2: finisher
FFff
Jam code
FF:
ff:
Source of paper
HHHHHH
Pickup counter for source of paper
IIIII
Paper size
4-108
type of jam
sensor used
Code
Type of jam
01xx
Delay
02xx
Stationary
0Axx
Residual at power-on
0Bxx
Door open during copying
Code
xx01
Registration paper sensor (PS1)
xx02
Pick up unit sensor (PS2)
xx32
Fixing unit delivery sensor

(PS1403)
xx33
Face-down tray paper sensor

(PS1402)
xx61
Reversal paper sensor (PS26)
xx63
Duplexing unit paper sensor (PS24)
xx91
Finisher jam
Table 4-B701
G. Source of Paper
Code
Description
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Not used
Not used
Side paper deck
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Manual feed tray
Not used
Duplex unit
Jam sensor
Table 4-B703
Table 4-B702
4-109
COPIER>DISPLAY
ERR
Indicates error codes.
Display
I/O
< 1/3 >
< ERR >
Counter
< READY >
AA
BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Figure 4-B703
Description
Remarks
AAA
Order of occurrence (higher the number, the older the error)
1 to 20
BBBB
Date of occurrence
Month, day (2 digits each)
CCCC
Time of occurrence
24-hr notation
DDDD
Return time
24-hr notation
EEEE
Code
See IX Self Diagnosis in Chapter

13.
FFff
Detail code
If none, 0000
Location of occurrence
0: machine, 1: feeder, 2: finisher
4-110
CCD
Level 3
TARGET-B
Description
Remarks
Shading target value of BLUE
TARGET-G Shading target value of GREEN

TARGET-R
Shading target value of RED
BOF-B
CCD output value of BLUE when the scanning lamp is off

<BOF-B xx/yy>
BOF-G
CCD output value of GREEN when the scanning lamp is off

<BOF-G xx/yy>
BOF-R
CCD output value of RED when the scanning lamp is off

<BOF-R xx/yy>
OFST-OB
Offset level adjustment value of BLUE for CCD odd bits
When COPIER>Option>BODY>
OFST-OG
Offset level adjustment value of GREEN from CCD odd bits
SHSW is 0.
OFST-OR
Offset level adjustment value of RED for CCD odd bits
OFST-EB
Offset level adjustment value of BLUE for CCD even bits
OFST-EG
Offset level adjustment value of GREEN for CCD even bits
OFST-ER
Offset level adjustment value of RED for CCD even bits
GAIN-OB
Gain level adjustment of BLUE for CCD odd bits.
GAIN-OG
Gain level adjustment value of GREEN for CCD odd bits
GAIN-OR
Gain level adjustment value of RED for CCD odd bits
GAIN-EB
Gain level adjustment value of BLUE for CCD even bits
GAIN-EG
Gain level adjustment value of GREEN for CCD even bits
GAIN-ER
Gain level adjustment value of RED for CCD even bits
CCD-TYPE
not used
xx: odd number

yy: even number
Sensor
Level 3
Description
Remarks
SC-HP
Output of the original scanner home position sensor
0: home position
1: non-home position
DOC-SZ
Size of the original detected by the original size sensor
xxxx: A4, A3, B4, B5, etc.
MISC
Level 3
FL-LIFE
Description
Warning (scanning lamp approaching the end of its life; this
is a warning only, and the end will be indicated by E219)
Remarks
0: normal
1: warning
(For replacement, see p. 12-10.)
4-111
ALARM
Level 3
DF
Description
Remarks
Most recent feeder alarm; if none, 00. For DADF alarms,

see Figure 4-B704.
Detecting Jams in the DADF

S14
M4
S4
S6
S1
S7
S3
MS1 MS2
S12
S8
S1
S3
S4
Original tray paper sensor

Upper cover sensor
S6
S7
S8
Delivery sensor 1
Pickup sensor
Reversal sensor
S12
S14
MS1
MS2
Delivery sensor 2
Re-circulating sensor
RF switch
Upper cover switch
Figure 4-B704
Pickup
Type of original jam
Sensor
Description
Code
Original pull-out
S1,S7
The sensor (S7) does not detect the leading edge of an

original 1500 msec after the pickup motor (M1) has
turned on and, in addition, the sensor (S1) does not
detect an original.
0001
Pickup delay
S7

original 1500 msec after the pickup motor (M1) has
turned on.
0002
Registration delay
S3,S7

original 350 msec after the sensor (S7) has detected
the leading edge of an original.
0003
Table 4-B704
4-112
Original faulty
placement
Sensor
Description
RF operation
Code
RE-circulating
bar idle swing
S14
The re-circulating bar makes an idle swing without

coming into contact with an original immediately
after the re-circulating motor (M4) has turned on.
Stops operation
immediately after
detection.
01
Pickup faulty
S7
The senor (S7) does not detect the leading edge of

an original 1500 msec at time of pickup.
The separation
belt, feed roller,
and pickup roller
stop immediately.
The DADF stops
operation after
discharging copies (of preceding
originals).
03
Paper stopper
override
S7
When an original is placed, it rides over the paper

stopper.
Stops operation
immediately upon
detection.
05
Different number
of originals after
jam removal
S3
The number of originals placed on the original

tray after the removal of a jam changes as
follows; see Note 1:
Stops operation
immediately upon
detection
11
Stops operation
after counting up
to 100.
12
number of originals
made
Wrong number of
originals
S3
number of originals
placed on the original tray
The re-circulating lever fails to fall down to the

original tray, not enabling detection of the last
original.
Reference:
Normally, the original tray can accommodate
50 sheets of A5, STMT, A4, B5, or LTR or 25
sheets of A3, B4, 279x432 mm (11"x17"), or
LGL.
Original pull-out
S14
The re-circulating lever falls to the original tray

in the middle of processing an original.
Stops operation
immediately upon
detection.
13
Original size error
S3
The original picked up is a non-default size.
Stops operation
immediately upon
detection.
14
Original size error

or mixed sizes in
reduced page
composition
mode (Note 1)
S3
[1] The original picked up is of a type not suited to

reduced page composition mode.
[2] The size of the original picked up is different
from that of the first original.
Stops operation
upon detection.
15
Note 1: To reset, remove the originals from the original tray and open the DADF.
Figure 4-B705
4-113
C.
I/O Mode
The following is the COPIER>I/O screen and a list of Level 3 items.
Display
I/O
Counter
RCON
FEEDER
SORTER
Figure 4-C701 COPIER>I/O Level 2 Screen

1.
R-CON (input/output state of reader controller PCB)

The following is the COPIER>I/O screen and Level 3 items.
Item
Remarks
Input/Output port of the reader controller PCB
P001
Description
P025
Guide to the Screen

P001 xxxxxxxx
bit 0
bit 7
address
4-114
Address
bit
P015
bit0
scanning lamp ON detection signal
HEATRUNON
J115-4
bit1
Not used
bit2
Not used
bit4
Original size sensor 1 detection signal
DSZ1
J117A-5
bit5
DSZ2
J117A-8
bit6
DSZ3
J117B-2
bit7
DSZ4
J117B-5
bit0
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor

signal
CBCC
J117A-2
L: (open)
bit1
Power supply fan lock detection signal
FAN 1 DEC
J129-1
H: locked
bit2
Scanner motor fan lock detection signal
FAN 2 DEC
J3011-3
H: locked
bit3
Not used
bit4
Not used
bit5
Not used
bit6
Not used
bit7
scanning lamp error signal
FLERR
J129-6
H: error
bit0
Size sensor drive signal
L: ON
bit1
Not used
bit2
Original scanner hold drive
HOLDOFF
J113B-7
L: on hold
bit3
Not used
bit4
Not used
bit5
Not used
bit6
Not used
bit7
Feeder power supply drive signal
APCON
J129-12
L: ON
bit0
Not used
bit1
Power supply fan drive signal
PSFANON
J129-2
L: high speed
H: Low speed
bit2
Scanner motor fan drive signal
SCNFANON
J3011-1
L: ON
bit3
Not used
bit4
Lamp heater drive signal
LPHTON
J115-4
L: OFF
bit5
Not used
bit6
Not used
bit7
Not used
bit0
Not used
bit1
Not used
bit2
Not used
bit3
Not used
bit4
Not used
bit5
Not used
P017
P019
P021
P022
Display
Signal
Connector
Remarks
4-115
Address
bit
P022
bit6
Not used
bit7
Not used
4-116
Display
Signal
Connector
Remarks
2.
FEEDER (state of feeder controller PCB)

Item
Description
Input/output port of the feeder controller PCB
P001
Remarks
P010
Guide to the Screen

P001 xxxxxxxx
bit 0
bit 7
address
Address
P001
Item
Description
Remarks
BDIR
Belt motor (M3) rotation direction

signal
For right delivery, 1
SMPSL
Stamp solenoid (SL4) drive
When 1, ON.
FLPSL1
Paper change plate solenoid (SL3)

drive
When 1, ON.
STPSL
Stopper plate solenoid (SL1) drive
When 1, ON.
SPRS
Pickup sensor (S7)
When paper is present, 1
EJTS1
Delivery sensor 1 (S6)
TLIRNS
Reversal sensor (S8)
P003
RSS
Re-circulation sensor (S14)
P004
DCTS
Pickup roller sensor (S5)
When in home position, 1
ECLK
Delivery motor clock sensor (S3)
While in rotation, repeats 0 and 1
RCLK
Registration roller clock sensor (S11)
BCLK1
Belt motor clock sensor (S10)
FCLK
Feed motor clocks sensor (S9)
SMON
Pickup motor (M1) drive signal
When drive, 1
SMPWM
Pickup motor (M1) rotation speed

signal
0 and 1 change according to speed
FMPWM
Feed motor (M2) rotation speed

signal
BMON
Belt motor (M34) drive signal
When 1, ON
BMPWA
Belt motor (M3) rotation speed signal
WGTSL
Paper retaining plate solenoid (SL2)
When 1, ON.
CL
Clutch (CL) drive
When 1, ON.
BK
Brake (BK) drive
When 1, ON.
ORGLED
Original indication (LED101,

LED102)
When 0, ON.
P002
P006
P007
4-117
Address
P007
P008
P009
P010
4-118
Item
Description
Remarks
RSDRV
Re-circulation motor (M5) drive signal
When 1, ON.
SDIR
Pickup motor (M1) rotation direction

signal
When upper separation is ON,

1
EMPWM
Delivery motor (M5) rotation speed

signal
0 and 1 change according to

speed
SW1 on the feeder controller PCB
When pressed, 1
When pressed, 1
When pressed, 1
EJTS2
Delivery sensor 2 (S12)
UPCCL,
CVRSW
Upper cover switch (MS2), Upper cover

sensor (S4)
When upper feeder is opened, 0
RFC
Feeder switch (MS1)
When 0, feeder open
LED2 on the feeder controller PCB
When 0, ON.
LED1 on the feeder controller PCB
When 0, ON.
DSW1-1 on the feeder controller PCB
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
When 1, ON.
3.
SORTER (state of finisher controller PCB)

Item
Remarks
Input/output port of the finisher controller PCB
P001
Description
P037
Guide to the Screen

P001 xxxxxxxx
bit 0
bit 7
address
Display
Remarks
bit
P001
bit0
Stapler connection detection
STPCNT
J8-7
L (present)
bit1
Staple sensor
HOOKEMP
J8-6
L (present)
bit2
Inlet path sensor
PENT
JI3-3
L (paper present)
bit3
Shutter closed detecting switch
SHTCLS
J7-3
L (closed)
bit4
Swing guide open detecting switch
SWGOPN
J5-12
L (closed)
bit5
Upper limit detecting switch
TRAYULIM
J5-8
H (limit)
bit6
Tray area detecting switch
TRAYSAFE
J5-6
H (danger)
bit7
Front door open/closed detecting

switch
EDROPN
J5-3
H (open)
bit0
Alignment moor phase-A output
JI1-5, 3
bit1
Alignment motor phase-B output
JI4, 2
bit2
Alignment motor current switch
JI1-2 ~ 5
bit4
Feed motor phase-A output
J10-6
bit5
Feed motor phase-B output
J10-5
bit6
Feed motor A* output
J10-4
bit7
Feed motor B* output
J10-3
bit0
Available port
bit1
Available port
bit2
Available port
bit3
EEPROM DO
bit0
EEPROM DI
bit1
Shift motor clock sensor 1
bit2
Feed motor step clock
bit3
Shift motor clock sensor 2
SHFTCLK2
J12-B6
toggle
bit4
Buffer path present/absent
BUFDETCT
J4-7
L (prevent)
bit0
Stapler shift motor current switch
J8-1 ~ 4
L (when ON)
bit1
Feed motor current switch
J10-3 ~ 6
L (when ON)
P003
P002
P004
P005
P006
Signal
Connector
Address
SHFTCLK1
J12-B3
L (when ON)
toggle
toggle
4-119
Address
bit
P006
bit2
Measurement start signal
bit3
Measurement distance sensor

input
bit4
Reversing path sensor
REVPSENS
J12-B9
bit5
Measurement distance clock
HICLK
J6-3
bit0
Shutter open sensor
SHTOPN
J9-9
L (open)
bit1
Tray home position sensor
TRAYHP
J12-A6
H (HP)
bit2
LED
TRAIND
LED1
L (ON)
bit3
Delivery motor clock sensor
PDMCLK
J9-14
Toggle
bit4
EEPROM SK
bit5
Delivery path sensor
PDEL
J9-11
H (paper prevent)
bit6
Alignment motor retention current
J11-2 ~ 5
L (ON)
bit7
Stapler shift motor retention

current
J8-1 ~ 4
L (ON)
bit0
Delivery motor PWM
J11-6, 7
bit1
Delivery motor CCW
J11-6, 7
bit2
Shift motor PWM
J7-4 ~ 5
bit3
Delivery motor CW
J11-6, 7
bit4
Shift motor CCW
J7-4 ~ 5
bit5
Shift motor CW
J7-4 ~ 5
bit4
Stapler shift motor phase A
J8-1 ~ 4
bit5
Stapler shift motor phase B
J8-1 ~ 4
bit0
Stapler motor CW
J8-11, 12
bit1
Stapler motor CCW
J8-11, 12
bit2
Stapler try sensor
STPTY
J9-3
L (paper present)
bit3
Joint sensor
JOIMT
J12-A3
H (connected)
bit4
Stapler home position sensor
STPHP
J8-9
H (HP)
bit5
Swing guide open sensor
SWGGOPN
J13-6
L (open)
bit6
Stapler shift home position sensor
STPDRHP
J12-A9
L (HP)
bit7
Alignment home position sensor
JOGHP
J9-6
L (HP)
bit0
EEPROM CS
bit1
Shift motor temperature sensor
THMSW
J3-11
H (temperature
error)
bit2
Buffer path sensor
BUFPENT
J4-6
H (paper present)
bit3
Staple edging switch
HOOKENT
J16-2
L (staple edging)
bit4
New/old PCB identification
bit5
No. 1 tray sensor
FSTTRAY
J3-3
H (paper present)
bit6
No. 2 tray sensor
SNDTRAY
J3-6
H (paper present)
bit7
No. 3 tray sensor
TRDTRAY
J3-9
H (paper present)
P007
P008
P009
P012
4-120
Display
Signal
Connector
Remarks
H (start)
J6-1
L (paper present)
H (new PCB)
Address
bit
Display
P013
bit0 Reversing roller drive solenoid
Signal
Connector
Remarks
REVSL
J14-2
H (ON)
bit4 Flapper solenoid
FLPSL
J13-8
H (ON)
bit5 Paddle solenoid
PDLSL
J11-9
H (ON)
bit1 Empty port

bit2 Empty port
bit3 Empty port
bit6 Solenoid timer output

bit7 Reference wall escape solenoid
P010
L (at start-up)
ESCPSL
J11-11
H (ON)
J10-3 ~ 6
L (during reversal)
bit0 Empty port

bit1 Empty port
bit2 Empty port
bit3 Empty port
bit4 Empty port
bit5 Empty port
bit6 Empty port
bit7 Empty port
P011
bit0 Empty port

bit1 Empty port
bit2 Feed motor current switch 2
bit3 Empty port
bit4 Empty port
bit5 Empty port
bit6 Empty port
P026
Push switch 2/3
SW1
P027
DIP switch 3/4
SW1
P028
DIP switch 1/2
SW1
P029
24-V output detection

Shift motor temperatur
L (cut)
4-121
PUSHSW2
PUSHSW3
0 ~ 48
ON
ON
49 ~ 68
OFF
ON
69 ~ BE
ON
OFF
BF ~ FF
OFF
OFF
Table 4-C701 (P026)
DIPSW4
DIPSW3
0 ~ 48
ON
ON
49 ~ 68
ON
OFF
69 ~ BE
OFF
OFF
BF ~ FF
OFF
OFF
Table 4-C702 (P027)
DIPSW2
DIPSW1
0 ~ 48
ON
ON
49 ~ 68
ON
OFF
69 ~ BE
OFF
ON
BF ~ FF
OFF
OFF
Table 4-C703 (P028)
Power
0 ~ 166
OFF
167 ~ 255
ON
Table 4-C704 (P029)
4-122
D.
ADJUST (adjustment mode)

The following is the ADJUST mode screen and a list of Level 3 items:
Display
I/O
Counter
BLANK
AE
ADJ-XY
CCD
COLOR
Figure 4-D701 COPIER>ADJUST Level 2 Screen
4-123
COPIER>ADJUST Items
Level 3
ADJUST
4-124
Level 2
Level 1
Range
Description
AE
AE-TBL
BE-TBL
1~9
1~9
priority on speed AE mode text density adjustment

text reproduction adjustment
ADJ-XY
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
0~32
0~255
image leading edge position adjustment

CCD image read start position (main scanning direction)
adjustment
CCD
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
A-RG
2000~11997
2000~11997
2000~11997
-9~9
B-RG
-9~9
A-GB
-9~9
B-GB
-9~9
AL-RG
-9~9
AL-GB
-9~9
standard white plate X signal data adjustment

standard white plate Y signal data adjustment
standard white plate Z signal data adjustment
color displacement correction in sub scanning direction
depending on RG ratio
color displacement correction in sub scanning direction not
dependant on RG rotio
dependent on RG ratio
color displacement correction in sub scanning direction not
dependent on GB ratio
dependent on RG ratio in the lens unit
dependent on GB ratio in the lens unit
BLANK
BLANK-T
BLANK-L
BLANK-R
BLANK-B
BLANK-TP
1~500
1~500
1~500
1~500
90~110
image leading edge non-image width adjustment value input

left margin adjustment
right margin adjustment
trailing edge non-image width adjustment
leading edge margin adjustment
COLOR
ADJ-K
OFST-K
1~17
1~17
K color balance adjustment (for user)

K light area density and color balance adjustment
1.
<AE>
ADJUST
Level 3
AE-TBL
Description
Remarks
Use it to adjust the text density when priority-on speed AE

mode is executed. It adjusts the density correction curve of
priority-on -speed AE.
A higher setting generates lighter text.
A lower setting generates darker text.
Settings: 1 to 9
Default: 5
Copy density
White
Higher
setting
Lower setting
Black
Black
BE-TBL
2.
White
Original densit
Use it to adjust the text density when priority-on-quality mode

AE is executed in black-and-white text mode.
A higher setting generates lighter text.
A lower setting generates darker text.
Settings: 1 to 9
Default: 5
<ADJ-XY>
Item
Description
Remarks
ADJ-X
Use it to change the image read start position in X direction.
Unit: puls (Caution)

Settings: 0 to +32
ADJ-Y
Use it to adjust the image red start position in Y direction.
Unit: pixel (Caution)

Settings: 0 to +255
Caution:
These settings will return to the default settings when the reader controller PCB is replaced,
the RAM on the reader controller PCB is initialized, or the DIMM is replaced, requiring
inputs upon replacement/initialization. Be sure to record the new settings on the reader unit
service label.
4-125
3.
<CCD>
Item
Description
Remarks
W-PLT-X
Standard white plate X signal data
W-PLT-Y
Standard while plate Y signal data
W-PLT-Z
Standard while plate Z signal data
Settings: +2000 to +11997

(Refere caution)
Caution:
You must enter the value indicated under the bar code of the new standard white plate whenever you have replaced the standard white plate. After entering the value in service mode, be
sure also to record it on the reader unit service label.
Item
A-RG
B-RG
A-GB
B-GB
AL-RG
AL-GB
4-126
Description
Corrects
color
displacement
occurring in
sub scanning
direction
(scanner) by
adjusting the
corrective
values of the
three-line
CCD sensor
(RG and
GB).
Remarks
Use it to correct color displacement in sub

scanning direction dependent on the RG ratio.
Settings: -9 to + 9
Use it to correct color displacement in sub

scanning direction not depending on the RG
ratio.
Corrects color displacement in sub scanning
direction dependent on the GB ratio.
direction not dependent on the BG ratio.
direction dependent on the RG ratio in the lens
unit.
direction despondent on the GB ratio in the lens
unit.
4.
<BLANK>
Adjusts the image non-image width.
Level 3
Description
Remarks
BLANK-T
Non-image width adjustment input for the image leading edge
BLANK-L
Non-image width adjustment input for the image left
BLANK-R
Non-image width adjustment input for the image right
BLANK-B
Non-image width adjustment value for the image trailing edge
BLANK-TP
Margin width adjustment value for the image leading edge

If the leading edge margin differs among paper sizes because of
motor inaccuracy, correct the image extension in 0.1%
increments.
5.
<COLOR>
Adjusts color balance.
Level 3
COPIER>ADJUST
Description
ADJ-K
Use it to adjust K color balance for the user.

A higher setting generates higher density (darker images).
OFST-K
Use it to adjust the density of K light areas.

A lower setting decreases fogging.
If you have
replaced the IP
PCB or initialized
the RAM on the
IP PCB, enter the
values indicated
on the service
label.
The non-image
width will not be
smaller than 2mm
at the top and rear
edges, and will
not be smaller
than 3mm at the
left and right
edges, because
the printer
inherently has
non-image width.
Remarks
Settings: -8 to +8
Default: 0
4-127
E.
FUNCTION (operation check mode)

The following is the COPIER>FUNCTION screen and a list of Level 3 items.
Display
I/O
Counter
CCD
PANEL
SYSTEM
PART-CHK
CLEAR
MISC-R
MISC-P
Figure 4-E701 COPIER>FUNCTION Level 2 Screen
4-128
COPIER>FUNCTION Items
Level 1
FUNCTION
Level 2
Level 3
Description
CCD
CCD-ADJ
automatic adjustment for CCD gain
PANEL
LCD-CHK
LED-CHK
LED-OFF
KEY-CHK
TOUCHCHK
checking for missing dots on the touch panel

checking the activation of LEDs on the control panel
checking the de-activation of LEDs note control panel
checking the inputs from keys on the control panel
adjusting the coordinates on the touch panel
PART-CHK
FAN-ON
checking fan operation
CLEAR
ERR
R-CON
MMI-FAX
SERVICE
FAX
JAM HIST
ERR-HIST
E354-CLR
E355-CLR
PDW-CLR
ADRS-BK
OPTION
MMI
initializing an error code

initializing the RAM on the reader controller PCB
initializing the back-up data of the fax control panel
initializing the back-up data of service mode
initializing the RAM on the fax board
initializing the jam history
initializing the error history
----initializing passwords
initializing addresses in the address book
initializing the back-up data of service mode OPTION
initializing common settings back-up items and copier control panel back-up
items
MISC-R
SCANLAMP
SC-MOVE
LAMP-ADJ
USE-LAMP
checking the activation of the scanning lamp

checking the operation of the scanner
adjusting the intensity of light when replacing the scanning lamp
adjusting the intensity of light of the scanning lamp when replacing a PCB
MISC-P
IP-CHK
P-PRINT
HIST-PRT
TRS-DATA
USER-PRT
executing self-diagnosis on the image processor PCB

printing the parameters in service mode
printing the jam/error history
transferring data in memory reception to a Box
generating a list of user modes in service mode
SYSTEM
DOMWLOADenabling downloading
4-129
<CCD>
Level 3
Description
Remarks
CCD-ADJ
Use it to execute CCD gain auto adjustment.

Using the Item
1) Select the service mode COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCDADJ.
2) Press the CCD-ADJ key to highlight it.
3) Press the OK key to execute the adjustment. The machine
perform the adjustment automatically so that the FL-lamp
lights on and off several times.
This adjustment is automatically performed when the machine
turns on.
4-130
<PANEL>
COPIER>FUNCTION
Use it to check the control panel.

Description
Level 3
Remarks
LCD-CHK
Use it to check the touch panel for missing dots.

Using the Item
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
The entire face of the touch panel will repeatedly
change from whit to black, red, green, and to blue.
2) Press the Stop key to end the operation.
LED-CHK
Use it to check the LEDs of the control panel.

Using the Item
The LEDs will turn on in sequence. Select <LEDOFF> to end the operation.
LED OFF
Use it to end a check on the LEDs of the control panel.

1) Select the item to highlight to end the operation.
KEY-CHK
Use it to check the key inputs.

Using the Item
1) Select the item to highlight.
2) Press the key to check. If normal, its corresponding
character will appear on the touch panel.
3) Select <KEY-CHK> to end the operation.
See Table 4-E701.
TOUCHKEY
Use it to adjust the coordinates on the touch panel.

Using the Item
2) Press the + symbols appearing on the touch panel in
sequence (9 locations).
3) Press the last + symbol to end the adjustment.
nThis operation matches the

point of a press on the touch
panel and its coordinates on
the LCD.
nBe sure to execute this mode
if you have replaced the LCD.
Screen display
Screen display
ID
ID
(screen OFF)
CLEAR
STOP
Screen display
#
Counter check
0~9
RESET
START
STAND BY
BILL
Table 4-E701
4-131
<PART-CHK>
COPIER>FUNCTION
Use it to check the operation of a part.

Level 3
FAN-ON
4-132
Description
Remarks
Use it to check the operation of the fan.

Using the Item
1) Press the key to start the fan. The operation will end in a
specific period of time. To stop in the middle, press the Stop
key.
<CLEAR>
COPIER>FUNCTION
Use it to initialize the RAM/jam history/error code history.

Description
Level 3
Remarks
ERR
Use it to initialize an error code.

Using the Item
2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
R-CON
Initializing the RAM on the reader controller PCB.

Using the Item
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
MMI-FAX
Use it to initialize the RAM on the image processor PCB.

Using the Item
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
SERVICE
Use it to initialize the back-up data of service mode.

Using the Item
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
FAX
Use it to initialize the RAM on the fax board.

Using the Item
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
JAM-HIST
Use it to initialize the jam history.

Using the Item
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
ERR-HIST
Use it to initialize the error history.

Using the Item
Be sure to turn off

and then on the
power switch;
otherwise, the data
will not be
initialized.
4-133
COPIER>FUNCTION
Description
Level 3
Remarks
E354-CLR
-------
-------
E355-CLR
-------
--------
PWD-CLR
Use it to initialize a password.

Using the Item
The data will not be

initialized unless the
main power switch
has been turned off
and then on again.
ADRS-BK
Use it to initialize all addresses in the address book.

Using the Item

main power switch
has been turned off
and then on again.
OPTION
Use it to initialize the back-up data of service mode (OPTION).

Using the Item

main power switch
has been turned off
and then on again.
MMI
Use it to initialize the common settings back-up items and the

copier control panel back-up items.
Using the Item

main power switch
has been turned off
and then on again.
4-134
<MISC-R>
COPIER>FUNCTION
Description
Item
Remarks
SCANLAMP
Use it to start a check on the scanning lamp.
A press on the item

will highlight it; a
press on the OK key
then will keep the
scanning lamp to
remain fully on for 1
sec.
SC-MOVE
Use it to start a check on the scanner
A press on the item

press on the OK key
then will cause 1
HPA. Another press
on the OK key will
cause 2 HPB; this
sequence will be
repeated for 3 and 4 to
end the operation.
Display
1:
2:
3:
4:
HP
HP
HP
HP
Operating
LAMP-ADJ
Use it to adjust the intensity of lamp when a new scanning lamp

has been mounted.
USE-LAMP
Use it to adjust the intensity of light when scannng lamp has

been removed and then mounted or the reader controller PCB/
intensity detection PCB has been replaced.
A press on the item

press on the OK key
then will turn on the
scanning lamp. Turn
the scanning lamp
replacement VR
slowly until LED 111
goes on to indicate
that the optimum
intensity has been
reached: at the beep,
press the OK key to
end the operation.
Caution:
Wait for about 5 min until the intensity of the scanning lamp has stabilized after turning on
the machine before executing LAMP-ADJ or USE-LAMP.
4-135
<MISC-P>
Use it to check the various PCBs.
Level 3
COPIER>FUNCTION
Description
Remarks
IP-CHK
Use it to check the image processor PCB.

Using the Item
A PCB check will automatically be made.
If the results are good, the screen will show OK; otherwise, it
will show NG.
P-PRINT
Use it to print out the input values of service mode.

Using the Item
Pickup Cassette
Upper cassette
HIST-PRT
Use it to print out a jam/error history.

Using the Item
1) Select the Item to highlight, and press the OK key.
Pickup Cassette
Upper cassette
TRS-DATA
Use it to transfer data received in memory mode to a Box.

Using the Item
If a printer-related
error has occurred, the
data received in
memory mode may be
transferred to a Box
and then transmitted to
a different terminal for
output.
USER-PRT
Use it to print out the input values of user mode.

Using the Item
Pickup Cassette
Upper cassette
4-136
<SYSTEM>
Use it for downloading.
COPIER>FUNCTION
Level 3
Description
DOWN
LOAD
Use it to set connections or operations and check operations:

Using the Item
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. The
machine will be in standby state, and indicate the notation
STANDBY.
2) See that the notation is CONNECTED during downloading.
3) See that the notation changes to HOLD at time of
communication. You may turn off the PC when HOLD has
appeared.
Remarks
4-137
F.
OPTION (settings mode)

The following is the COPIER>OPTION screen and a list of Level 3 items.
Display
I/O
Counter
BODY
USER
Figure 4-F701 COPIER>OPTION Level 2 Screen

Caution:
Each item of OPTION enables a new setting when the main power switch is turned off and
then on once again.
4-138
COPIER>OPTION Items
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
OPTION
BODY
MODEL-SZ
switching the original size detection mechanism to suit the site of

installation
THINP-SP
turning on/off thin paper separation voltage control mode
CONFIG
switching country, language, site, and paper size series settings
RAW-DATA turning on/off raw data output mode
TNR-CNT
displaying/resetting the toner out counter (100 V)
TN-SLICE
setting the threshold level of the toner out counter
IFAX-LIM
limiting the number of output lines in i-fax mode
USER
COPY-LIM
SLEEP
TX-PT-ON
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
DATE-DSP
IMG-RTN
FIX-CLN
STPL-PSN
SLEEP-MD
B4-L-CNT
CNT-DISP
Description
changing the upper limit to the number of copies

turning on/off the sleep mechanism
specifying whether to display/not to display test/photo/map items on the
control panel
displaying soft counter 1
switching year/month/day display sequence
selecting rotating/non-rotation of images
selecting fixing roller auto cleaning
selecting stapling position for LGL, FLS, and Officio
selecting power supply state for sleep mode
selecting large-count or small-count for B4
turning on/off serial number display on the Counter Check screen
<BODY>
COPIER>OPTION
Use it to make machine settings.

Description
Level 3
Remarks
MODEL-SZ
Use it to switch the site of installation for the feeder.

A switch-over will change the default ratio display and the
original size detection mechanism of the feeder.
0: AB series
1: Inch series
2: A series
3: B/Inch series
THINP-SP
Use it to increase the degree of separation.

Select 1 to increase the separation discharging bias so that
paper (thin paper) with low degree of separation will separate
easily when thin paper mode is selected for the multifeeder.
Initial: 0
0*: OFF (-2.3 kV)
1: ON (-3.0 kV)
4-139
<BODY>
COPIER>OPTION
Level 3
Description
CONFIG
Use it to select the site of installation.

Use it to change country, language, site of installation, or paper
size settings.
Select the item to highlight, and use the +/- key to make a selection.
XXYYZZAA will appear:
XX: country
YY: language
ZZ: site of installation
AA: size series
Notation
Remarks
Notation
Country
Language
JP
Japan
jp
Japanese
US
North America
en
English
GB
UK
fr
French
FR
France
it
Italian
IT
Italy
de
German
DE
German
es
Spanish
EX
Others
Language Notations
Country Notarions
Display
Destination
Notation
Size series
00
Canon
00
AB
01
Non-canon
01
Inch
02
All
02
Destination notations
03
AB/Inch
Size Series Notation
RAW-DATA
Use it to check received data.

The received data is printed as it is (raw data), allowing a check
to find out whether it is correct.
Initial: 0
0: default
1: raw data print
TNR-COT
Use it to display the toner counter.

The Add toner message may be displayed on the pickup counter.
Entering '0' will reset the counter. (100-V model only)
Large-size: 2 counts
Small size: 1 count
TN-SLICE
Use it to set the counter reading at which the toner count will
issue a warning.
Initial: 15000
IFAX-LIM
Use it to limit the number of output lines when reception is in ifax mode.
The data that has not been generated will be deleted.
Settings: 0 to 999
At 0, the number is
limitless.
Initial: 500
4-140
<USER>
Use it to make user settings.
COPIER>OPTION
Description
Level 3
Remarks
COPY-LIM
Use it to change the upper limit to the number of copies to make.
Setting: 1 to 999
SLEEP
Turning on/off the sleep mechanism.
0:OFF
1:ON
TX-PT-ON
Use it to specify whether the test/photo items should be

displayed (in service mode) when text/photo/map is selected on
the Standard screen.
Initial: 1
1: display
0: do not display
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
Use it to set counters from COUNTER 2 to COUNTER 6 on the

Counter check screen by entering a number.
COUNTER 1 is set to 101. (The notation on the Service Mode
screen will be switched, but the notation on the Counter Check
screen will be fixed to 101.)
See Table from

4-F701 to 4-F704.
DATE-DSP
Use it to change the sequence of indicating dates (year, month,

day).
0: Japanese type: YYYY/MM/DD
1: European type:DD/MM/YYYY
2: US type:
MM/DD/YYYY
The initial setting

depends on the
destination of
shipment.
IMG-RTN
Images may be rotated to suit the orientation of paper selected

for stapling. Use it to enable/disable the rotation of images.
Initial: 1
0: rotate
1: do not rotate
FIX-CLN
If a command is sent from the selection of wide sheets (for

pickup) after continuously feeding narrow sheets, a paper
interval is widened.
Initial: 1
0: not widened
1: widened
2: quick shift to
widened condition
STPL-PSN
Use it to select a stapling position for LGL, FLS, and Officio.

Paper of these sizes are fed in R orientation. If they are fed
otherwise while the stapling position is at the rear, the staple
will be at the upper right of the stack. Select the appropriate
position to avoid the problem.
Initial: 0
0: rear
1: front
SLEEP-MD
Use it to select loads for power supply in sleep mode.

0: default (initial level)
1: against condensation (weak)
2: against condensation (strong)
If 2 is selected, be sure to set the sleep mode start time using
the same screen.
If 2 is selected, the
operation will be as in
2 for 2 hr after the
start: thereafter, the
operation will be as in
1.
B4-L-CNT
Use it to specify whether B4 sheets should be counted as large

size or small size.
Initial: 0
0: small
1: large
CNT-DISP
Use it to enable/disable the display of the serial number on the

Counter Check screen.
Initial: 0
0: do not display
1: display
4-141
<Soft Counter Specifications>
COPIER>OPTION
The soft counter readings are grouped as follows according to input number:
100s: total
500s: scan
200s: copy
600s: box
300s: print
700s reception print
400s: copy + print
800s: report print
Guide to the Notations Used in the Table
Y:
counter effective in the machine.
4C:
full-color
2C:
2-color
Mono: mono color (Y, M, C/R, G, B/sepia)
Bk:
black mono
L:
large-size (larger than B4)
S:
small-size (B4 or smaller)
number 1/2 under Description: counter reading of large-size sheets
Yes/No
No.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
000
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
Y
Y
Y
115
116
117
Y
Y
Description
no display
total 1
total 2
total (L)
total (S)
total (4C1)
total (4C2)
total (Mono)
total (Bk 1)
total (Bk 2)
total (Mono/L)
total (Mono/S)
total (Bk/L)
total (Bk/S)
total (4C + Mono + Bk/
double-sided)
total 1 (double-sided)
total 2 (double-sided)
L (double-sided)
S (double-sided)
Yes/No
No.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
Description
copy (total 1)
copy (total 2)
copy (L)
copy (S)
copy A (total 1)
copy A (total 2)
copy A (L)
copy A (S)
local copy (total 1)
local copy (total 2)
local copy (L)
local copy (S)
remote copy (total 1)
remote copy (total 2)
remote copy (L)
remote copy (S)
copy (4C1)
copy (4C2)
Table 4-F701
4-142
Yes/No
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
No.
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
Description
Yes/No
copy (Mono 1)
copy (mono 2)
copy (Bk 1)
copy (Bk 2)
copy (4C/L)
copy (4C/S)
copy (Mono/L)
copy (Mono/S)
copy (Bk/L)
copy (Bk/S)
copy (4C + Mono/L)
copy (4C + Mono/S)
copy (4C + Mono/2)
copy (4C + Mono/1)
copy (4C/L/double-sided)
copy (4C/S/double-sided)
copy (Mono/L/doublesided)
copy (Mono/S/doublesided)
copy (Bk/L/double-sided)
copy (Bk/S/double-sided)
copy (2C-1)
copy (2C-2)
copy (2C/L)
copy (2C/S)
copy (2C/L/double-sided)
copy (2C/S/double-sided)
print (total 1)
print (total 2)
print (L)
print (S)
print A (total 1)
print A (total 2)
print A (L)
print A (S)
print (4C1)
print (4C2)
print (mono 1)
Y
Y
Y
Y
No.
Description
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
print (Mono 2)
print (Bk 1)
print (Bk 2)
print (4C/L)
print (4C/S)
print (Mono/L)
print (Mono/S)
print (Bk/L)
print (Bk/S)
print (4C + Mono/L)
print (4C + Mono/S)
print (4C + Mono/2)
print (4C + Mono/1)
print (4C/L/double-sided)
print (4C/S/double-sided)
print (Mono/L/doublesided)
print (Mono/S/doublesided)
print (Bk/S/double-sided)
print (Bk/S/double-sided)
PDL print (total 1)
PDL print (total 2)
PDL print (L)
PDL print (S)
copy + print (4C/L)
copy + print (4C/S)
copy + print (Bk/L)
copy + print (Bk/S)
copy + print (Bk 1)
copy + print (Bk 1)
copy + print (4C + Mono/L)
copy + print (4C + Mono/S)
copy + print (4C + Mono/2)
copy + print (4C + Mono/1)
copy + print (L)
copy + print (S)
copy + print (2)
copy + print (1)
328
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
329
330
331
332
333
334
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
Table 4-F702
4-143
Yes/No
No.
501
Y
Y
502
503
504
505
Y
Y
Y
506
507
507
508
509
510
Description
Yes/No
scan (total 1)
copy scan (total/4)
scan (total 2)
scan (L)
copy scan (L/4)
scan (S)
copy scan (S/4)
Bk scan (total 1)
copy scan (Bk)
Bk scan (total 2)
Bk scan (total 2)
Bk scan (L)
copy scan (Bk/L)
Bk scan (S)
copy scan (Bk/S)
color scan (total 1)
copy scan (4C)
color scan (total 2)
511
512
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
513
514
515
601
602
603
604
701
702
703
704
801
802
803
804
No.
Description
color scan (L)
copy scan (4C/L)
copy scan (S)
copy scan (4C/S)
copy scan (L)
copy scan (S)
copy scan (total)
box print (total 1)
box print (total 2)
box print (L)
box print (S)
reception print (total 1)
reception print (total 2)
reception print (L)
reception print (S)
report print (total 1)
report print (total 2)
report print (L)
report print (S)
Table 4-F703
4-144
G.
TEST (test mode)

The following is the COPIER>TEST screen and a list of Level 3 items.
Display
I/O
Counter
PG
NETWORK
Figure 4-G701 COPIER>TEST Level 2 Screen
COPIER>TEST Items
Level 1
TEST
Level 2
PG
NETWORK
Level 3
TYPE
PING
Description
selecting and executing a type of test print
executing the PING command
4-145
<PG>
Use it to execute test printing.
Level 3
TYPE
COPIER>TEST
Description
Remarks
Use it to execute test printing.

Using the Item
1) Enter the number of the test print to generate.
2) Press the key to accept the number.
3) Press the Start key.
The machine will execute test printing.
To make regular copies, enter 0 and

press the Start key.
Paper is picked up from the cassette
selected on the user screen.
Paper is picked up from the lower
cassette when number is set from 1 to
8.
<NETWORK>
Use it to make a PING check.
Level 3
PING
4-146
COPIER>TEST
Description
Remarks
USE it to execute a PING command.

Using the Item
1) Enter the PING IP address in the setting range.
2) Press the OK key.
3) See the results (OK/NG).
Initial:
0.0.0.0
Settings:
from 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
1.
Grid (PG-TYPE1)
Checking Right Angles
The laser beam is displaced.
Figure 4-G702
2.
17 Gradations (w/o density correction; PG-TYPE2)
Checking Gradation
The laser system is faulty.
Checking for Uneven Density

The primary charging assembly is faulty.
The developing system is faulty.
Figure 4-G703
3.
17 Gradations (w/o density correction; PG-TYPE3)
Checking Gradation
Checking for Uneven Density

Figure 4-G704
4-147
4.
Blank (PG-TYPE4)
Checking for Fogging

The photosensitive drum is faulty.
Figure 4-G705
5.
Halftone (PG-TYPE5 )
Halftone Using the Density Correction Block (for image processing)
In addition to the performance of the image formation system, it depends also on density correction mechanisms (e.g., AE).
[1] Black Lines

The drum has scratches.
The primary charging wire is soiled.
[2] Vertical White Spots
Transfer is faulty.
[3] Left/Right Uneven Density
Figure 4-G706
6.
Solid Black (PG-TYPE6)
[1] White Spot

Transfer is faulty.
[2] While Lines
Shading is faulty (e.g., soiled standard while plate).
Figure 4-G707
4-148
7.
Vertical Lines (PG-TYPE7)
Feed direction
Straight Lines (sub scanning direction)

The BD mechanism is faulty.
Figure 4-G708
8.
Horizontal Lines (PG-TYPE3)
Feed direction
Straight Lines (main scanning direction)

The laser beam is displaced.
Figure 4-G709
4-149
H.
COUNTER (counter mode)

Display
I/O
Counter
TOTAL
TOTAL
PICK-UP
PICK-UP
FEEDE
FEEDER
JAM
Figure 4-H701
Use it to check the number of machine operations.
Initializing the Counter
1) Press the item to highlight.
2) Press the Clear key on the control panel.
The counter will be initialized, and the indication will be 0000.
Classifying Paper Sizes
Large size: A3, 297432mm or non-default size
(B4 size depends on the serive mode setting.)
Small size: remained of above
You can set B4 size paper counted as a large size paper in Service Mode (COPIER>OPTION>
USER>B4_L_CNT).
4-150
COUNTER Items
Level 1
COUNTER
Level 2
Level 3
Description
TOTAL
SERVECE1
SERVECE2
COPY
PDL-PRT
FAX-PRT
RMT-PRT
BOX-PRT
RPT-PRT
2-SIDE
SCAN
total counter 1 for servicing

total counter 2 for servicing
total counter
PDL copy counter
fax print total counter
remote copy reception print total counter
Box print total counter
report print total counter
double-sided copy total counter
scan counter
PICKUP
C1
C2
MF
DK
2-SIDE
cassette 1 pickup counter

cassette 2 pickup counter
multifeeder pickup counter
paper deck pickup counter
duplex unit pickup counter
FEEDER
FEED
feeder pickup counter
JAM
TOTAL
FEEDER
SORTER
MF
C1
C2
DK
total jam counter

RDF jam counter
sorter jam counter
multifeeder jam counter
cassette 1 jam counter
cassette 2 jam counter
paper deck jam counter
4-151
I.
FEEDER (feeder mode)

The following is the FEEDER screen and a list of Level 3 items.
Display
I/O

< 1/1 >
<*FEEDER*>
< READY >
DOCST
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
DOCST-RP
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
P-INTL-U
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
PREV
+/-
NEXT
Counter
OK
Figure 13-I701 FEEDER>ADJUST Level 2 Screen
FEEDER Items
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FEEDER
DISPLAY
FEEDERSIZE indicating the size of the original detected by the feeder
ADJUST
DOCST
DOCST-RP
P-INTL-U
adjusting the original stop position

not used
adjusting the original-to-original interval
FUNCTION
SENS-INT
UBLT-CLN
DBLT-CLN
adjusting the sensitivity of each sensor

cleaning the upper separation belt
cleaning the lower separation belt
OPTION
SIZE-SW
SCAN-SEL
switching AB and Inch detection

turning on or off non-default original size detection
4-152
Description
1.
DISPLAY
Description
Level 3
FEEDSIZE
Remarks
Use it to indicate the size of the original detected by the feeder.

EX: A4, LTR
<ADJUST>
Description
Level 3
DOCST
Use it to adjust the original stop position for upper pickup.

1) Select the item; then, place a single original on the DADF
original tray, and press the OK key.
2) When the original has been picked up, open the feeder, and
check the position of the original on the copyboard glass.
If the trailing edge of the original is to the left of the V
marking, decrease the setting.
If the trailing edge of the original is to the right of the V
marking, increase the setting.
The original will be discharged.
DOSCT-RP
Not used
P-INTL-U
Use it to adjust the sheet-to-sheet interval for upper pickup.

1) Select the item, and place two originals on the original tray.
2) Press the OK key so that the originals will be fed and stopped
on the copyboard glass.
3) Adjust the interval between the originals.
If the distance is too small, increase the setting.
If the distance is too large, decrease the setting.
The original is discharged.
Remarks
Unit: 0.5 mm
This adjustment
affects the original top
position at which
originals are turned
over.
Unit: 0.5 mm
4-153
<FUNCTION>
Level 3
Description
Remarks
SENS-INT
Use it to execute auto function (initialization) of the feeder

sensor.
Execute this mode when you have replaced the feeder controller
PCB, original tray sensor, or registration sensor.
1) Remove the cover of the feeder controller, and check the
positions of LED1 and 2.
2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
The machine will execute the operation, and will stop
automatically.
UBELTCLN
Use it to execute separation belt cleaning for feeder upper

pickup.
Using the Item
1) Select the item to highlight.
2) Moisten the center of paper with solvent, and place the paper
on the original tray of the feeder.
3) Press the OK key so that that paper will be picked up halfway
and the upper pickup separation belt will rotate idly.
4) Press the OK key to stop the operation.
5) Open the feeder upper cover, and remove the paper.
DBELTCLN
Use it to execute separation belt cleaning for feeder lower

pickup.
Using the Mode
Perform the steps for <UBELT-CLN).
<OPTION>
Level 3
Description
Remarks
SIZE-SW
Use it to enable or disable detection of a mix of AB series and

Inch series originals.
0: do not detect
1: detect
Default: 0
SCAN-SEL
Use it to turn on/off the original size detection mechanism for

non-default size for the feeder.
0: off (normal copying mode)
1: on (priority on paper mode)
Default: 0
4-154
J.
BOARD (board mode)

The following is the BOARD screen and a list of items.
Display
I/O

< 1/1 >
<*BOARD*>
< READY >
LIPS-ERR
xxxxx
MENU-1
xxxxx
MENU-2
xxxxx
MENU-3
xxxxx
MENU-4
xxxxx
PREV
NEXT
Counter
+/-
OK
Figure 4-J701 BOARD>OPTION Level 3 Screen

BOARD Items
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Description
BOARD
OPTION
LIPS-ERR
MENU-1
MENU-2
MENU-3
MENU-4
Enabling/disabling the LIPS board in response to a LIPS board error

Enabling/disabling level 1 display (hidden in printer settings menu)
Disabling/disabling level 2 display (hidden in printer settings menu)
4-155
<OPTION>
Level 3
Description
Remarks
LIPS-ERR
Use it to enable/disable the LIPS board when a LIPS board error

occurs.
0: default
0: use
1: do not use
MUNU-1
MUNU-2
MUNU-3
MUNU-4
Use it to enable indication of installation level 1, 2, 3, and 4

(hidden in printer settings menu).
(MENU-2/4 is not used)
0: default
0: do not indicate
1: indicate
List of Hidden settings Level 1 Items

Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Detail item
Settings
Pickup
Default paper type

Paper size replacement
Any
Any
PCL/PS
PS
Data Protocol
PS
Data Protocol
LIPS/
emulation
1-raster control
Job management
Job check
LIPS setting
ANK graphic set

Priority on kanji
Courier BM
Garamond BM
2-page rotation
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
Hidden Setting Level 3 Items

Level 1
Level 2
Settings
LIPS/
emulation
Level 3
Detail item Detail-detail item
LIPS/P setting Other
LBPcmnd-format
Last item on each row is a subject for enable / disable.
4-156
K.
1.
a.
Fax Board
Service Data
Outline
Service data consists of the following nine items (#1 through #5 and #7 through #10):
#1 SSW: Service Soft Switch Settings
Use it to register/set items related to the basic service functions of the fax (e.g., error management, echo measures, communication problem measures).
#2 MENU: Menu Switch Settings
Use it to register/set items related to the functions needed at time of installation (e.g., NL
equalizer, transmission level).
#3 NUMERIC Param: Numeric Parameter Settings
Use it to enter numeric parameters.
#4 NCU: (not used for servicing)
All settings of the item will be reset to the settings of #5 TYPE.
#5 TYPE: Destination Settings
When settings are made under STANDARD (V.34) indicated on the display, the data
under #4 NCU will be reset to comply with the Japanese communications standards all at
once.
#7 PRINTER: Printer Functions Settings
Use it to register/set items related to the basic service functions of the printer (e.g., conditions for reducing received images).
#8 CLEAR: Data Initialization Mode Settings
Use it to reset data units to initial settings.
#9 TEST: Use it to execute each test.
#10 REPORT: Use it to execute the report print.
4-157
b. Using Service Mode

1) Press the user mode key on the control panel.
2) Press 2 and 8 on the keypad at the same time.
3) Press the user mode key on the control panel.
The following screen will appear to indicate the connected accessories (FEEDER,
SORTER, FAX, BOARD).
Select FAX to enter the Boards service mode.
Copier service mode

COPIER
FEEDER
ADF service mode

If installed
FAX
Fax service mode

If installed
BOARD
Accessory board service mode

If installed
Figure 4-K701
4-158
c.
Keys
For the purpose of explanation, the #1 SSSW screen is cited; the meanings of the keys and
operations are common to all screens.
Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type Genesis Print Clear Test Report
<READY>
<1/4>
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
PREV
Previous/Next key
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OK
NEXT
Press to accept the selected input value.
Figure 4-K702
In the case of a bit switch, press the desired bit (value) to change 0 to 1 or 1 to 0
To change a value or to execute an item, press the OK key.
To enter a numeric value, use the keypad.
To return to the previous level, press the Reset key.
4-159
d.
Service Mo7de Menu List

#1 SSSW
#2 MENU
SW01
managing errors/copies
SW02
change prohibited
SW03
setting measures against echoes
SW04
setting measures against a communication problem
SW05
setting standard function <DIS signal>
SW06 to SW11 change prohibited
SW12
setting the page timer
SW13
setting the transfer/relay function
SW14
setting the inch/millimeter resolution
SW15 to SW24change prohibited
SW25
setting the report indication function
SW26
setting the transmission function
SW27
change prohibited
SW28
setting the V.8/V.34 protocol
SW29 to SW30 change prohibited
001 to 004
005
006
007
008
009
010
#3 NUMERIC
4-160
change prohibited
NL equalizer
change prohibited
transmission level (ATT)
V.34 modulation speed upper limit
V.34 data speed upper limit
pseudo CI signal frequency
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014 to 030
not used
RTN transmission condition (1)
NCC pause length (before ID code)
NCC pause length (after ID code)
pre-pause length when placing a call
not used
not used
line connection identification time
T.30 T1 timer (for reception)
not used
T30. EOL timer
not used
#7 PRINTER
SSSW
SW01
not used
SW03
SW04 selecting recording paper indicated by the DCS signal
SW05 selecting reduction/cassette
SW06 reduction settings
SW07
not used
SW20
NUMERIC Param.
01
02
03
04
05
06
maximum absence range

not used
not used
leading edge margin
trailing edge margin
not used
19
20
21
22
right margin
left margin
not used
30
#8 CLEAR USSW SW
SERVICE SW
NCU
SERVICE DATA
REPORT
ALL
4-161
2.
Registering the Bit Switch (#1 SSSW)

Each switch consists of eight bits for registration/settings. The display indicates the following,
each bit being either 0 or 1:
Bit 0
Bit 7
SW01
Caution:
The service data for which a change is prohibited must not be changed from its initial value.
<READY>
<1/4>
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
SW07
SW08
PREV
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NEXT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OK
Figure 4-K703 #1 SSSW Screen
4-162
#SSSW-SW01: Managing Errors/Copies

Description
sw
no.
bit
no.
01
error code for service person
generate
do not generate
error dump list
generate
do not generate
Bit setting
1
Factory
default
[bit 0]
Use it to specify whether service error codes should be generated. If generate is selected,
service error codes will be indicated on the display and the report.
[bit 1]
Use it to specify whether an error dump list should be generated. If generate is selected, an
error dump list will be attached to the error transmission report and the reception report
prepared in the event of an error.
4-163
#1 SSW-SW03:
Setting Measures Against Echoes
sw
no.
bit
no.
Bit setting
03
change prohibited
echo protection tone at high-speed

transmission
change prohibited
change prohibited
transmission mode: international

transmission (1)
enable
disable
transmission mode: international

transmission (2) or international
transmission (3)
enable
disable
transmission mode
international
transmission
(3)
international
transmission
(2)
tonal signal before transmission of CED

signal
transmit
do not support
Description
1
Factory
default
0
transmit
do not
transmit
[bit 1]
Use it to specify whether to transmit an echo protection tone in the from of high-speed
transmission V.29 (at 9600 or 7200 bps) modem signal.
If an error owing to the condition of the line tends to occur often, select transmit so that a
non-modulation carrier will be sent as a sync signal for about 200 msec, preceding the
image data.
Memo
Error Codes Associated with the State of the Line (transmission)
##100, ##104, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765
[bit 7]
Use it to specify whether to send a tonal signal of 1080 Hz before transmitting CED signals.
If an error caused by an echo tends to occur when receiving data from overseas, select
transmit.
Memo
Error Codes Associated with an Echo (reception)
##005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790
[bits 4, 5, 6]
Use it to select a transmission mode: international transmission (1), international transmission (2), international transmission (3).
if an error caused by an echo tends to occur often when receiving data from overseas, select
the appropriate transmission mode by means of dial registration or service soft switch.
4-164
Memo
Error Codes Associated with an Echo (transmission)
#005, ##100, ##101, ##102,##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##760,
##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##794,
Using Dial Registration (user level)
When registering an address book, select international transmission (1). If errors still occur,
try international transmission (2) and international transmission (3) in the order indicated.
The transmission mode registered as part of one-touch dialing or speed dialing will have priority over settings by the service soft switch.
When a transmission mode is selected using the switch, international mode may also be selected for a transmission using the keypad. See the following table for specific settings:
Bit
Transmission mode
International transmission (1)

*
*
*
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
0
0
0
International transmission (1):

ignores the first DIS signal sent by the other party.

transmits a 18050-Hz tonal signal when transmitting the DIS
signal.
transmits a 1650-Hz tonal signal when transmitting the DIS
signal.
4-165
#1 SSSW-SW04: Setting Measures Against Communication Problems

sw
no.
bit
no.
04
number of last flag sequences of

procedure signal
reception mode after transmission of CFR

signal
high-speed
high-speed/
low-speed
time during which low-speed signal is

ignored after transmission of CFR signal
1500#ms
700#ms
check on frequency of CI signal when

PBX is set
execute
do not execute
Description
Bit setting
1
Factory
default
0
[bit 2]
Use it to specify the number of last flag sequences as part of the procedure signals (transmission speed of 300 bps).
If the other device fails to receive the procedure signal, select 2.
Memo
Error Codes Associated with Transmission
##100, ##280, ##281, ##750, ##753, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760, ##763, ##764,
##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773, ##775, ##778, ##780, ##783, ##785, ##788
[bit 3]
Use it to select the reception mode to be enabled after transmitting the CFR signal.
If an error owing to the condition of the line tends to occur often at time of reception, select
high-speed for reception mode and, at the same time, select no for ECM reception.
Memo
Error Codes Associated with the Condition of the Line (reception)
#107, #114, #201
Before changing the bit, change bit 4; if errors still occur, change the bit.
When high-speed is selected, only high-speed (image) signals will be received after the
transmission of the CFR signal.
[bit 4]
Use it to select a length of time during which low-speed signals will be ignored after the
transmission of the CFR signal.
If the condition of the line is poor and, therefore, the reception of image signals is affected,
select 1500 ms.
4-166
#1 SSSW-SW5:
Setting the Standard Function (DIS signal)
sw
no.
bit
no.
Bit setting
05
change prohibited
mm-inch conversion (letter mode)
do not execute
execute
mm-inch conversion (letter/photo mode)
do not execute
execute
bit transmission after bit 33 (DIS signal)
prohibit
do not prohibit
cut paper declaration (*DIS signal)
execute
do not execute
Declare LTR/LGL in DIS signal
No
Yes
change prohibited
change prohibited
Description
1
Factory
default
0
[bit 1]
Use it to execute the mm-inch conversion (letter mode).
[bit 2]
Use it to execute the mm-inch conversion (letter/photo mode)When the mm-inch conversion (letter mode) is executed.
[bit 3]
Use it to specify whether to transmit bits after bit 33 (DIS signal).
Caution:
Selecting prohibit disables super fine reception of data from a non-Canon device or the
memory box function.
[bit 4]
Use it to specify that the paper indicated by the DIS signal is cut sheets.
When division of extra-length originals is to take place at the transmitting device, be sure to
select A4/B4.
[bit 5]
Select whether to declare LTR or LGL in DIS signal when the LTR or LGL paper is used.
The recording paper is selected according to the setting of #7 printer SW04 bit 0.
Memo
Some transmitting devices are not capable of dividing extra-length originals.
4-167
#1 SSSW-SW12: Setting the Page Timer

sw
no.
bit
no.
12
Bit setting
1
Factory
default
Description
1-page time-out length for transmission
1
2
1-page time-out length for transmission
(HT transmission)
1-page time-out length for reception
5
6
change prohibited
page timer setting by transmission/

reception
0
set
do not set
Use it to set the page timer. The machine is designed to stop communication if transmission/
reception lasts 32 min or longer. To set the timer to a different time length, do so by referring to the
tables that next page.
If do not set is selected using bit 7, the 1-page time-out length for all modes of communication will be as set by bit 0 and bit 1.
4-168
Time-Out Length for Transmission/Reception
Bit
Time-out length
8 min
16 min
32 min
64 min
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Time-Out Length for Transmission (no image mode selected)
Bit
Time-out length
8 min
16 min
32 min
64 min
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Time-Out Length for Transmission (image mode AA)
Bit
Time-out length
8 min
16 min
32 min
64 min
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Time-out length
8 min
16 min
32 min
64 min
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Time-Out Length for Reception
Bit
4-169
#1 SSSW-SW14 (for setting inch/mm resolution)

sw
no.
bit
no.
14
Selecting mm/inch conversion direction
Main and sub

scanning
directions
Sub scanning
direction
Inch to mm conversion for OCR

transmission
Yes
No
Declaring inch-series resolution
Yes
No
Function
Bit setting
1
Factory
default
[bit 2]
If bit 2 is set to 1 while bit 1 of SW05 is set to 1 inch-to-mm conversion is executed for
both main and sub scanning directions.
[bit 3]
If bit 3 is set to1, CCR transmission will be indicated as part of detail settings for onetouch /speed dialing. In addition, inch-to-mm conversion will be executed when OCR transmission is selected.
Whether to execute inch-to-mm conversion in read mode depends on how bit 1 of SW05 is
set.
Even when bit 1 of SW05 is set to 1, execution will take place only when use OCR
transmission is selected as part of one-touch/speed dialing for transmission; execution will
not take place for other types of transmissions.
If bit 1 of SW05 is set to 0, inch-to-mm conversion will not be executed even if use OCR
transmission is selected for one-touch/speed dialing.
[bit 6]
This bit is used to declare an inch-series resolution bit 44.
4-170
#1 SSSW-SW25: Setting the Report Indication Function

sw
no.
bit
no.
Description
25
transmission telephone number indicated

on report
destination
number
call number
abbreviation of other device indicated on

report
retain
do not retain
Bit setting
1
Factory
default
[bit 0]
Use it to select the transmission telephone number to be indicated on the report at the end of
a transmission.
call number:
indicates the telephone number called on the report.
other device number: indicates the telephone number (CSI signal data) sent from the other
device on the report.
Memo
Even when call number is selected, the telephone number (CSI signal data) sent from the
other device will be indicated on the report if the call was made not using one-touch dialing or
speed dialing.
[bit 1]
Use it to select the abbreviation of the other device to be indicated on the report at the end of
a transmission.
registered abbreviation:
indicates the abbreviation of the other device registered
in the one-touch dialing or speed-dialing memory on the
report.
abbreviation of other device:
indicates the abbreviation (NSF signal data) sent from
the other device on the report.
Memo
Even when registered abbreviation is selected, the abbreviation sent from the other device
(NSF signal data) will be indicated on the report if the abbreviation of the other device is not
registered in the one-touch dialing or speed dialing memory.
4-171
#1 SSSW-SW26: Setting the Transmission Function

sw
no.
bit
no.
26
change prohibited
change prohibited
change prohibited
change prohibited
change prohibited
set error re-dial
re-dial
do not re-dial
other device for which broadcasting is

suspended
single device
all devices
error report in response to suspension of

transmission
do not
generate
generate
Description
Bit setting
1
Factory
default
[bit 5]
Use it to execute the error re-dial.
[bit 6]
Use it to specify whether to suspend communication to all devices when broadcasting is
suspended.
[bit 7]
Use it to specify whether to generate an error report when transmission is cancelled by a
press on the Stop key.
4-172
#1 SSSW-SW28: Setting the V.8/V.34 Procedure

Description
sw
no.
bit
no.
Bit setting
28
V.8 procedure on calling device
do not execute
execute
V.8 procedure on called device
do not execute
execute
V.8 late start on calling device
do not execute
execute
V.8 late start on called device
do not execute
execute
fall-back from V.34 called device
prohibit
do not prohibit
prohibit start of fall-back from v.34

transmitting deice
prohibit start
of fall-back
from V.34
transmitting
device
permit start of
fall-back from
V.34
transmitting
device
not used
not used
Factory
default
[bit 0]
Use it to specify whether to execute the V.8 procedure when placing a call.
do not execute: the arrival of the V.8 procedure signal will be ignored, and execution will
start with the V.21 procedure.
[bit 1]
Use it to specify whether to execute the V.8 procedure when receiving a call.
do not execute:
the execution will start with the V.21 procedure without executing
the V.8 procedure.
[bit 2]
Use it to specify whether to execute the V.8 procedure when the receiving device declares
the presence of the V.8 procedure by means of the DIS signal (when placing a call, the
ANSam signal from the called device is not detected).
execute:
in response to the DIS signal of the called device, the CI signal will be
transmitted and the V.8 procedure will be executed.
do not execute: in response to the DIS signal from the called device, no CI signal will be
transmitted, and the V.21 procedure will be executed.
In the case of manual transmission, the V.8 late start procedure will not be executed regardless of these settings.
[bit 3]
Use it to specify whether to declare the presence of the V.8 procedure for the DIS signal
transmitted when the ANSam signal is not detected by the calling device.
execute:
the presence of the V.8 procedure will be declared by the DIS signal so that
the calling device executes the V.8 procedure after transmission for the CI
signal.
do not execute: the presence of the V.8 procedure will not be declared by the DIS signal,
and the V.21 procedure will be executed.
In the cae of manual transmission, the V.8 late start procedure will not be executed regardless of these settings.
4-173
[bit 4]
Use it to specify whether to prohibit a fall-back for the V.34 receiving device.
prohibit: a fall-back from the receiving device will not be executed.
[bit 5]
Use it to prohibit primary channel speed modification so as to prevent the transmitting device from starting a primary channel fall-back when PPR has been received a specific number of times imposed on the start of a fall-back while transmitting V.34.
4-174
3.
Setting the Menu Switch (#2 MENU)
<READY>
<1/1>
005
xxxxx
006
xxxxx
007
xxxxx
008
xxxxx
009
xxxxx
010
xxxxx
PREV
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
OK
NEXT
Figure 4-K704
No.
Description
Range
005
NL equalizer
006
change prohibited
007
transmission level (ATT) 7 to 15
008
V.34 modulation speed

upper limit
V.34 data speed upper
limit
pseudo IC signal
frequency
009
010
1/ 0
3429
3200
3000
2800
2743
2400
13 to 0
0
50Hz/
005
NL equalizer:
25Hz/
17Hz
turning on/off the NL EQNL equalizer

Turn on the NL equalizer if errors associated with the condition of the line tends to
occur often.
Memo
Error Codes Associated with the Condition of the Line (transmission)
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##765, ##774,
##779, ##784, ##789
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
4-175
006 Telephone line monitor

DIAL
Use it to set the telephone line monitor function.

Use it to enable the monitor sound of the telephone line from the
speaker from the start of a transmission to DIS.
Use it to enable the monitor sound of the telephone line from the
speaker from the start to the end of a communication.
Use it to disable the monitor sound of the telephone line from the
speaker.
SERVICEMAN
OFF
007
ATM transmission level
Use it to set the transmission level (ATT).

Use it to increase the transmission level if errors associated with the
condition of the line tend to occur often during communication.
Memo
Error Codes Associated with the Condition of the Line (transmission)
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##752,
##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765, ##767, ##769, ##770, ##772,
##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787, ##789
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
008
V.34 modulation speed upper limit
Use it to select an upper limit from the modulation speed (baud

rate) for the V.34 primary channel.
009
V.34 data speed upper limit
Use it to select an upper limit for the data transmission speed for
the V.34 primary channel between 2.4K and 33.6K bps in 2400bps increments.
010
Pseudo IC signal frequency
Use it to set the frequency of the pseudo CI signal.

Owing to the type of externally connected telephone, calls are
not accompanied by a sound while the fax/tel switching
mechanism is on; try changing the frequency of the pseudo CI
signal if such is the case.
4-176
4.
Making Various Settings (#3 NUMERIC Param.)
<1/3>
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
PREV
<READY>
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
OK
NEXT
Figure 4-K705
No. Description
Settings
Default
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
13
1~99%
2 to 99 times
1 to 99 lines
1 to 60 sec
1 to 60 sec
0~9999( 10ms)
0~9999(10ms)
0~9999(10ms)
500~3000(10ms)
10
15
12
4 (0:UK)
4
*1
5500
3500
1320

NCC pause length (before ID code)
NCC pause length (after ID code)
pre-pause length when placing a call
time by line connection detection
T.30 T1 timer (for reception)
T30. EOL timer
*1
JPN :0
US :0
CAN :0
UK :350
AU :350
NZ :350
4-177
[No. 02, 03, 04]

Use it to set conditions for the transmission of the RTN signal. If errors associated with the
transmission of the RTN signal tend to occur during reception, increase the parameter to
make the RTN signal transmission conditions less strict.
Memo
The error codes associated with the transmission of the RTN signal during reception are as
follows: ##104, ##107, ##114, ##201.
RTN signal transmission condition (1) refers to the ratio of the number of error lines to the
total number of lines per page of received images.
RTN signal transmission condition (2) refers to the reference value** of a burst error *.
RTN signal transmission condition (3) refers to the number of errors not reaching the reference value for burst errors.
*Transmission errors continuing over multiple lines.
**If 15 is set, a transmission error covering continuous 15 lines will be identified as
a burst error.
If any of these conditions is detected while image signals are received, the RTN signal will be
issued after receiving the procedure signal of the transmitting device.
[No. 05]
Use it to set the length of the pause which will automatically be entered between access code
and ID code when dialing is executed using an NCC (New Common Carrier) line.
[No. 06]
Use it to set the length of the pause which will automatically be entered between code and
the telephone number of the other device when dialing is executed using a NCC (New
Common Carrier) line.
[No. 10]
Use it to set the time length for a check on the line connection. Increase the parameter if
errors tend to occur often owing to the condition of the line during communication.
Memo
The error codes associated with the condition of the line are as follows: ##005, ##018.
The time length for a check on the line connection refers to the period from when the dial
signal is sent to when the line is cut (transmitting device) or the period from when the DIS
signal is sent to when the line is cut (receiving device).
[No. 11]
The T1 timer is designed so that its setting may be changed to accommodate the fact that T1
timer specifications differ from country to country (PTT).
[No. 13]
If the data length of a single line is long (e.g., computer fax), increase the single-line transmission length that may be received to prevent reception errors.
4-178
5.
Setting the Site of Installation (#5 TYPE)

Selecting STANDARD indicated on the display will initialize all #4 NCU data to settings
that comply with the Japanese communications standards.
6.
a.
Setting the Printer Parameters (#7 PRINTER)

Service Soft Switch Settings
4-179
#7 Printer-SW05 (reduction, cassette selection)

sw
no.
bit
no.
Description
Bit setting
05
priority on LTR
enable
disable set
priority on LGL
enable
disable
Factory
default
[bit 0]
Use it to specify whether to give priority to LTR recording paper if an image is received
which may be printed on either A4, LTR, or LGL in Direct or by division.
[bit 1]
Use it to specify whether to give priority to LGL recording paper when an image is received
which may be printed on either A4, LTR, or LGL in Direct or by division.
The order of priority on recording paper size is as follows in relation to the settings of bit 0
and bit 1.
Bit1
Bit0
Priority of recording paper
A4 > LTR > LGL
LTR > A4 > LGL
LGL > LTR > A4
LTR > LGL > A4
However, the order will be as follows if recording is with priority on sub scanning:
LTR > A4 > LGL, even when bit 1 and bit 0 are set to 0.
4-180
b.
NUMERIC Param. (numeric parameters)
<NUM>
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
PREV
<READY>
<1/4>
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
xxxxx
(yyyyy)
{aaaaa~bbbbb}
NEXT
OK
Figure 4-K706
No.
01
04
05
20
21
Description
non-image area of print image for extra-length image
(reception)
leading edge margin
trailing edge margin
right margin
left margin
Settings
Default
Unit
3 ~ 9999
15
0.1 mm
0 ~ 9999
0 ~ 9999
0 ~ 9999
0 ~ 9999
8
5
35
35
0.1 mm
0.1 mm
0.1 mm
0.1 mm
[No. 1]
Use it to set the area in which images are ignored when printing extra-length images (received).
If the area of a received extra-length image along the trailing edge must not be ignored,
decrease the parameter to reduce the non-image area.
[No. 4]
Use it to set the margin along the leading edge (effective recording length).
[No. 5]
Use it to set the margin along the trailing edge (effective recording length).
[No. 20]
Use it to set the right margin (effective recording length). This applies when A4/LTR images are received and when A3/279x432mm/B4 is reduced to A4/LTR. When A3/
279x432mm/B4 is printed by division, the top margin and the bottom margin of No. 4 and
No. 5 will be used.
4-181
[No. 21]
Use it to set the left margin (effective recording length). This applies when A4/LTR images
are received and when reducing A3/279x432mm/B4 is reduced to A4/LTR. When A3/
279x432mm/B4 is printed by division, the top margin and bottom margin settings of No. 4
and No. 5 will be used.
4-182
7.
Initializing the Settings (#8 CLEAR)

Use it to initialize various data on an item-by-item basis by selecting any of the following
items.
Each settings item and parameter will be initialized to its factory default upon execution.
Item
Data initialized
USSW SW
Contents registered in user data and SSSW#1 through #3.

The contents of user data memory management will not be initialized;
the image data stored in memory will not be initialized.
SERVICE SW
Contents of user data and SSSW#1 through #3, #6, and #7.
NCU
Contents of SSSW#4.
SRV DATA
Contents of the system dump list.
REPORT
Contents of the communication management report.
ALL
All settings/registration data.
COUNTER
Number of originals read/number of prints made.
4-183
8.
Test Mode (#9 TEST)
<1/1>
<READY>
PRINT
RELAY-1
RELAY-2
FREQ
G3TX
DTMFTX
V34G3TX
Figure 4-K707
#9 TEST
PRINT
RELAY-1
RELAY-2
FREQ
G3TX
DTMFTX
V34G3TX
print test
(do not use)
(do not use)
frequency test
G3 signal transmission test
(do not use)
V34G3 signal transmission test
Using the Mode

Press the desired item to highlight, and press the OK key to bring up its screen.
4-184
9.
PRINT Test
The print settings of a test pattern are as follows:
Recording size: A4
Resolution:
fine
Print pattern: CRG-TEST, diagonal line
Rotation:
no rotation if A4; rotation if A4R
<PRINT>
<1/1>
<READY>
CRG-TEST
PREV
NEXT
OK
Figure 4-K708
Using the Mode
1) Of the items indicated on the screen, press the desired print pattern, and then press the OK key.
The machine will execute test printing.
4-185
a.
FREQ (frequency test)

Press FREQ on the TEST menu screen to start frequency test mode and to bring up the
following screen:
Press one of the items indicated so that the DC circuit will be closed, and the selected frequency will be transmitted using the tone transmission function of the modem. The transmission
signal may be monitored using the speaker.
To stop the operation, press the OK key.
<FREQ>
<1/1>
<READY>
RBT
462Hz
1100Hz
1300Hz
1500Hz
1650Hz
1850Hz
2100Hz
PREV
OK
NEXT
Figure 4-K709
4-186
b.
G3 Tx (G3 signal transmission test)

Press G3 Tx on the MODEM NCU Menu screen to start G3 signal transmission test mode
and to bring up the following screen.
Press one of the items indicated so that the DC circuit will be closed and the selected frequency
will be transmitted using the G3 signal transmission function for the modem. The transmission
signal may be monitored using the speaker.
<G3 Tx>
<1/2>
<READY>
300bps
G3Tx
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
TC7200bps
TC9600bps
12000bps
PREV
NEXT
OK
Figure 4-K710
4-187
c.
V.34 G3 Tx (V.34G3 signal transmission test)

Press V.34 G3 Tx on the TEST Menu screen to start V34 G3 Tx signal transmission test
mode and to bring up the following screen.
Select a transmission speed and then the modulation speed (baud rate) so that the V.34 G3
transmission signal will be sent to the telephone line connection terminal and the speaker.
<V34G3Tx>
SPEED
3429baud
3200baud
3000baud
2800baud
2743baud
2400baud
PREV
<1/1>
<READY>
36600BPS
OK
NEXT
Figure 4-K711
4-188
VIII . Service Report

A.
System Data List

The system data list shows the settings of the service soft switches and the service parameters.
System Data List (1/12)
4-189
4-190
4-191
4-192
4-193
4-194
4-195
4-196
4-197
4-198
4-199
4-200
B.
System Dump List
The system dump list shows the states of past communications and a history of error communications.
Figure 4-801
*1: RX: total number of pages received.
TX: total number of pages transmitted.
*2: DOC: number of pages transmitted in direct mode.
MEM: number of pages transmitted in memory mode.
*3: number of pages transmitted/received by original size.
*4: number of pages transmitted/received by mode.
*5: number of pages transmitted/received by modem speed (standard, fine, super fine, ultra fine)
*6: number of pages transmitted/received by decoding method.
*7: number of pages transmitted/receive by mode (MF2 indicates F-Net arriving at 1300 Hz)
*8: number of errors by error code.
4-201
Sample Display
##280
1
number of
##280 errors
4-202
7
number of
##281 errors
3
number of
##282 errors
The error information on the most recent three communication errors is indicated.
Figure 4-802
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
*7:
*8:
service error code.

START TIME: date and time (24-hr notation)
OTHER PARTY: telephone number transmitted by the sending party.
MAKER CODE: manufacturers code.
MACHINE CODE: model code.
bit 1 through 48 of received DIS, DCS, or DTC.
bit 1 through 48 of transmitted DIS, DCS, or DTC.
RX: procedure signal received.
TX: procedure signal transmitted.
4-203
C.
Error Transmission Report
The error transmission report is the error transmission report with attachments of the service
error code list and the error dump list.
Figure 4-803 Error Transmission Report (for servicing)
4-204
D.
Error Reception Report (for servicing)
The error reception report is the reception report with attachments of the service error code list
and the error dump list.
Figure 4-804 Error Reception Report (for servicing)
4-205
IX . Self-Diagnosis
The microprocessor on the machine's system controller PCB and DC controller PCB is
equipped with a self-diagnosis mechanism to check its state (particularly, sensors); the machine
runs a check as needed and, upon detection of a fault, indicates an error code on its control panel,
showing the nature of the fault.
The following is a list of error codes used and the timing of detection:
A.
Machine Proper
Code
Possible Cause
Description
The fixing assembly fails to warm up

normally
The fixing assembly fails to reach the

target temperature 180 sec after the start
of warm-up.
The fixing assembly suffers from

abnormally high temperature
The fixing temperature exceeds about

230C during standby or during copying
operation.
The fixing assembly suffers from

abnormally low temperature.
The fixing temperature drops below

120C after it has reached the target
temperature.
The type of fixing assembly is wrong.
The rated voltage of the machine and the

rated voltage of the fixing assembly do
not match.
E010
The main motor fails to start up

normally
The revolution of the main motor fails to

reach a specific revolution.
E011
The main motor fails to rotate normally.
The revolution of the main motor

deviates from a specific revolution.
The holding lifter (multifeeder) is

faulty.
When the multifeeder is selected, the

holding plate position sensor (PS1302)
does not detect the holding plate despite
the holding plate solenoid (SL2)
activation signal from the DC controller
PCB.
E054
The duplex feed roller drive mechanism

of the duplex unit* is faulty.
*Accessory.
When copy paper is sent to the duplex

unit, the duplex feed roller 1 home
position sensor (PS23) does not detect
the duplex feed roller 1 at home position.
E055
The horizontal registration guide drive

mechanism of the duplex unit* is faulty.
*Accessory.
The duplex driver PCB detects that the

horizontal registration guide exceeded its
maximum travel distance after the
detection of the horizontal registration
guide home position has started.
The BD of the scanner unit is faulty.
The scanner motor fails to reach a

specific revolution within 10 sec after it
has started to rotate.
The BD PCB detects an error for 2.5 sec
or more after the scanner motor has
started to rotate at a specific speed.
The laser is faulty.
The intensity of the laser fails to reach a

specific level.
E000
(Note 1)
E001
(Note 1)
E003
(Note 1)
E009
E040
E100
E102
4-206
Code
Cause
Description
The laser scanner motor is faulty.
The scanner motor fails to reach a

specific revolution within 10 sec after it
has started to rotate.
The BD PCB detects an error for 2.5 sec
or more after the scanner motor has
started to rotate at a specific revolution.
The scanner home position cannot be

detected.
The original scanner home position
sensor (PS101) is faulty.
The original scanner motor (PM1)/
original scanner motor driver PCB is
faulty.
The scanner fails to return to the home

position after it has started to operate.
The original scanner motor driver PCB

or the original scanner motor is faulty.
The original scanner home position is

detected during a "back scan" in which
the original scanner need not return to its
home position.
The original scanner goes out of synch
during a "back scan" in which it returns
to its home position.
The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp)

thermistor has an open circuit.
At a 0C or lower condition, the

temperature fails to reach 10C after
supplying the scanning lamp heater with
power for 2 min.
The thermistor has a short circuit.
The thermistor of the scanning lamp

heater registers 170C or higher when
the fluorescent lamp signal (FLON) is
off (including power-on).
The scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp)

fails to turn on in 15 sec.
The light intensify sensor does not detect

light from the scanning lamp in 15 sec.
The scanning lamp heater is out of

order.
When the scanning lamp heater is

controlled to a specific temperature, its
temperature does not exceed a specific
setting when it has been supplied with
power for 3 min or more.
E219
The scanning lamp (fluorescent) has

reached the end of its life.
The scanning lamp thermistor detects

150C or higher when the scanning lamp
is on.
E220
The scanning lamp (fluorescent) is

faulty.
The light of the scanning lamp fails to

reach a specific level of intensity within
10 sec after it has been turned on.
E400
The communication with the ADF has

an error.
No signal is returned by the ADF 1 sec

or more after communication with the
ADF has started.
E110
E202
No code
indication.
Control
panel keys
locked.
(Note 2)
E203
E211
E215
E216
E217
4-207
Code
Cause
Description
The pickup motor (M1) fails to rotate.

The pickup roller sensor (S5) is faulty.
A flag is attached to the spindle of the

pickup motor (M1), and the rotation of
the motor is monitored with reference to
the flag (blocking the pickup roller
sensor S5). The pickup roller sensor fails
to turn on and off twice or more in
within 1 sec.
E402
The belt motor (M3) fails to rotate.

The belt motor clock senor (S10) is
faulty.
The number of feeder motor clock

puleses within 200 msec is below a
specific value.
E403
The feed motor (M2) fails to rotate.

The feed motor clock sensor (S9) is
faulty.
The number of belt motor clock pulses is

below a specific value for 200 msec.
E404
The delivery motor (M5) fails to rotate.

The delivery motor clock sensor (S13)
is faulty.
The number of delivery motor clock

puleses within 200 msec is below a
specific value.
Communication with the ADF is faulty.
The communication with the ADF

remains interrupted for 5 sec or more.
The HDD is faulty.
The HDD cannot be recognized

normally at power-on.
An error occurs while writing to or
reading from the HDD.
E401
E421
E606
The PDL PCB has a

communication error.
E676
Detail code
0x4c03
The communication with the PDL PCB

fails in initialization sequence.
0x4c03
The registration of the PDL-unique

menu fails.
0x4c01
While PDL is in operation, a check sum

error of the received packet is detected.
0x4c02
While PDL is in operation, a format

error in the received packet is detected.
0x4c03
There is no response in the course of a

check on the PDL board operation.
The PDL PCB is faulty.
An error occurs on the PDL board.
The initialization of the IPC fails.
At power-on or during sleep return,

initialization communication with the
finisher fails.
E711
An IPC register error occurs.

.
An error occurs frequently in the

communication between the finisher and
the machine.
E712
An error occurs in IPC communication.
In communication with the ADF, four or

more errors occur in 1.5 sec or more.
E677
(NOTE 3)
E710
4-208
Code
Cause
Description
An IPC finisher error occurs.
The communication between the finisher

and the machine remiains interrupted for
3 sec.
The PDL PCB PCI error occurs.
The PDL PCB cannot be recognized at

power-on.
E732
A controller reader communication

error occurs.
An error occurs in the communication

between the controller unit and the
reader unit.
E733
A controller printer unit communication

error occurs.
The PPRDY signal cannot be detected

from the printer unit 15 sec after the end
of start-up sequence.
E734
An image processor PCB check error

occurs.
The image processor PCB cannot be

recognized normally.
E735
An EIF PCI error occurs.
The image processor PCB cannot be

recognized normally.
E736
A fax PCB communication error occurs.
The communication with the FAX PCB

fails.
E737
A main memory error occurs.
Writing to the main memory fails at

power-on.
E738
A network interface initialization error

occurs.
Initialization of the network PCB fails at

power-on.
E739
A network interface communication

error occurs.
The communication with the network

PCB fails at power-on.
E741
A network PCI error occurs.
The network PCB cannot be recognized

at power-on
A printer power supply cooling fan

error occurs.
An error occurs in the rotation of the

printer power supply cooling fan
(FAN2).
E805
A fixing assembly fan error occurs.

fixing assembly fan (FAN4)
E807
A fixing assembly/scanner fan error

occurs.

fixing assembly/scanner fan (FAN1).
E826
A multifeeder cooling fan error occurs.

multifeeder tray fan (FAN5).
E827
A controller power supply fan error

occurs.
An error occurs in the rotation of

controller power supply fan (FAN6).
E713
E731
E804
4-209
Caution:
1. If the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned on, the machine may be reset by turning the
power switch off and then on, with the exception of causes indicated by E000, E001,
E002, or E003.
The exceptions are made to prevent the user from resetting the machine as when the cause
is an open circuit in the thermistor, which otherwise would overheat the fixing roller,
causing the toner in the hopper to overflow.
If the error is identified by E000 through E003, the machine will automatically turn itself
off in about 20 sec if the power switch is turned on.
If E000, E001, E002, or E003, the data in the RAM of the system controller PCB must be
cleared:
Resetting the Machine
1) Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
2) Press the Reset key twice to return to the Copy Mode screen.
2. In the case of E202, a check may be made in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR.
3. In the case of E677,
If it is indicated when the main power is on,

Suspect a fault in the hardware.
Turning off and then on the power switch too fast at times causes E677, because of
a discrepancy in the initialization of the machine and the printer board. Be sure to
wait 5 sec or more before turning on the switch once you have turned it off.
If it is indicated while the machine is being used normally,

If the fault occurred during printing operation and, in addition, if the machine starts
up normally when the print job has once been cancelled and the power switch is
turned off and then on, suspect an excess load on the CPU.
E677 can sometimes be indicated if an excess load is continuously imposed on the
CPU of the printer board as by when processing a large amount of data while receiving a large amount of data from the network.
If this is the case, advise the user to cancel all print jobs, turn off and then on the
main power switch, and send out the print jobs one by one.
4-210
B.
Fax
Code
E736
C.
Possible Cause
System controller PCB, FAX PCB
An error occurs in the communication

between the system controller PCB and
the FAX PCB.
Paper Deck
Code
E043
E903
D.
Description
Possible Cause
Description
Feed motor (faulty)
The motor of the paper deck does not

operate normally.
Lifter (faulty)
The communication with the paper deck

is interrupted.
Finisher
Code
Detail code
Error
----
Data
communication
The communication between the machine and the

finisher is interrupted. This error is detected by the
machine.
03
Communication
error
The communication with the saddle stitcher is

interrupted.
01
Height sensor
(PS1)
The communication between the height sensor and

the finisher controller PCB fails. Or, an error exists in
the communication data.
E500
E503
02
The communication between the sensor and the

finisher controller PCB fails for a specific period of
time or more.
03
The connector is found to be disconnected at poweron.
04
An error occurs when the sensor is adjusted using the

DIP switch.
E504
E505
01
Back-up RAM
An error exits in the check sum at power-on.
01
Delivery
motor (M2)
The delivery motor clock sensor does not send the

target number of clock pulses at the start of
operation.
E512
02
01
E513
Description
02
Delivery
motor clock
sensor (PI10)
Alignment
motor (M3)
Alignment
plate home
position sensor
(PI6)
The clock pulses sent while paper is being moved fall

short of an equivalent of 200 mm in length.
The alignment plate does to leave the alignment
home position sensor when the alignment motor is
driven for 2 sec.
The alignment plate does not return to the alignment
home position when the alignment motor is driven
for 2 sec.
4-211
Code
E531
E532
Detail code
Error
01
Stapler motor
(M6)
The stapler does not leave the stapler home position

when the stapler motor is driven for 0.5 sec.
02
Stapler motor
home position
detecting
switch (MS7)
The stapler does not leave the stapler home position

when the stapler motor is driven for 0.5 sec.
01
Stapler drive
motor (M4)
The stapler drive home position sensor does not turn

off when the stapler drive motor is driven for 4 sec.
02
Stapler drive
home position
sensor (PI7)
The stapler drive home position is not detected when

the stapler drive motor is driven for 4 sec.
01
Delivery
motor (M2)
Swing guide
closed
detecting
switch (MS6)
The swing guide closed detecting switch does not

turn on when the delivery motor is rotated in reverse
for 1 sec.
02
Delivery
motor (M2)
Swing guide
open sensor
(PI18)
The swing guide open detecting sensor does not turn

on when the delivery motor is rotated in reverse for 1
sec.
03
Safety area
switch (MS3)
Swing guide
closed detection
switch (MS6)
The swing guide closed detecting switch is found to

be off when the tray 1/2 is in the safety area switch
OFF position.
01
Tray lift motor

(M5)
Tray lift motor
clock sensor 1/
2 (PI19/PI9)
Tray home
position sensor
(PI8)
The lift operation does not end within 15 sec when

the tray lift motor is driven.
The tray home position is not detected when the tray
lift motor is driven for 15 sec.
02
Tray upper limit

detecting switch
(MS4)
The tray upper limit detecting switch is found to be

on while the tray is moving up.
03
Tray lift motor

(M5)
Tray lift motor
clock sensor 1/
2 (PI19/PI9)
The clock sensor 1/2 does not send clock pulses for
200 msec when the tray lift motor is driven.
E535
E540
4-212
Description
Code
Detail code
Error
Description
01
Feed motor
(M1)
Shutter closed
detecting
switch (MS4)
The shutter closed detecting switch does not turn on

when the feed motor is rotated in reverse for 1 sec or
more.
02
Feed motor
switch (M1)
Shutter closed
detecting
switch (MS4)
The shutter open sensor does not turn on when the

feed motor is rotated in reverse for 1 sec or more.
03
Safety area
detecting
switch (MS3)
Shutter closed
detecting
switch (MS4)
The shutter closed detecting switch is found to be off

when the tray 1/2 is in the safety area switch OFF
position.
E584
4-213
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART

1.
Main power switch

ON
70C
Reader unit
Scanning lamp
(FL1)
Scanner motor
(M5)
End of reader controller

PCB gain adjustment
WMUP
Reader Unit
Start key
ON
RSTBY
RINTR
SCFW
SCRV
Normal
Reverse
RSTBY
Pre-activiation
Normal Reverse
Scanner home position sensor
(PS1)
(H5)
70C control
A-1
2.
Printer Unit
Power switch ON
Operation
(Unit: Seconds)
WAIT
STBY
160C
3 Fan (FM5)
PRINT
170C 169C
control
1 Fixing roller heater (H1, H2)

2 Fan (FM1, FM2, FM3, FM4)
INTR
190C
control
190C control
Low-speed rotation
High-speed rotation
About 15.0
Low-speed rotation
STBY
169C control
169C control
About 30.0
Low-speed
rotation
About 30.0
High-speed rotation
4 Fan (FM6)
5 PRINT signal (/PRNT)
LSTR
Low-speed rotation
6 VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC)

7 Scanner motor (M1)
3.25
8 Scanner motor ready (/SCNRDY)

9 Main motor (MT1)
About 1.5
10 Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL1)
About 1.2
11 Pick-up motor (SMT1)
About 1.5
0.52
About0.9
0.2
About0.7
1.1
High-speed rotation
12 Feed clutch (CL2)
Rotation
13 Registration clutch (CL1)
0.04
0.04
0.01
0.01
14 Pick-up unit paper sensor (PS2)

About 1.5
15 Registration paper sensor (PS1)

16 Fixing unit delivery sensor (PS1403)
17
0.77
Face-down tray delivery sensor (PS1402)
1.79
18 Primary voltage (AC)

0.52
19 Primary voltage (DC)
0.05
20 Developing bias (AC)
About
22 Transfer voltage
24 Upper fixing roller bias
A-2
1.74
0.82
21 Developing bias (DC)
23 Static charge eliminator bias
0.05
Negative bias
Negative bias
0.1
0.31
0.31
Between-page bias
Print bias
Between-page bias
0.05
0.37
0.47
High-voltage bias
APPENDIX
B. LIST OF SIGNALS
1.
Input/output signals to/from DC controller PCB
Connector
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
Logic
J201
A1
A2
A3
GND
GND
/FPCS
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
Reservrd
/VSREQ
/VSYNC
/STS
/CMD
/CPSEL
/SPCHG
3.3V
3.3V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
/FPO
Reserved
/RDY
/CPRDY
/SBSY
/CBSY
/PRFD
/PFED
3.3V
3.3V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
VDO
/VDO
/FPI
FPCK
/PPRDY
/PRNT
/PCLK
/CCLK
/CCRT
/PDLV
3.3V
3.3V
O
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
P
P
L
L
ANALOG
L
OPERATION PANEL SERIAL OUTPUT signal
O
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
READY signal
CONTROLLER POWER READY signal
STATUS BUSY signal
COMMAND BUSY signal
PRE-FEED signal
PAPER FEED signal
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
H
L
L
P
L
L
P
P
L
L
VIDEO signal
VIDEO signal
OPERATION PANEL SERIAL INPUT signal
OPERATION PANEL SERIAL CLOCK signal
PRINTER POWER READY signal
PRINT signal
PRINTER CLOCK signal
CONTROLLER CLOCK signal
CONDITION CHANGE REPORT
PAPER DELIVERY signal
Signal name
OPERATION PANEL CONTROLLER CHIP

SELECT signal
VSYNC REQUEST signal
VERTICAL SYNC signal
STATUS signal
COMMAND signal
COMTROLLER POWER SELCT signal
SPEED CHANGE signal
A-3
APPENDIX
Connector
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
J201
C13
C14
C15
C16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
+5V
+5V
GND
/BD
GND
DRVES
GNP
5V
GND
N.C.
VDO
GND
/VDO
/LON
/LENBL
/FPO
/FPI
/FPCS
O
O
4
5
6
7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J202
J203
J204
J205
J206
A-4
Logic
ANALOG
Signal name
BEAM DETECTION signal

LASER MALFUNCTION DETECTION signal
VIDEO signal
O
O
O
O
I
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
FPCK
+5V
+5V
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
24V
3.3V
3.3V
GND
24VGND
24VGND
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
UDOORS
FDFULS
I
O
O
VIDEO signal
LASER ON signal
VIDEO ERABLE signal
OPERATION PANEL SERIAL OUTPUT signal
OPERATION PANEL SERIAL INPUT signal
OPERATION PANEL CONTROLLER CHIP
SELECT signal
OPERATION PANEL SERIAL CLOCK signal
O
O
O
I
I
H
H
8
9
/FPOUTS
FDOUTS
I
I
H
H
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
/FUSLD
P5VB1
GND
GND
/BDI
+5V
GND
O
O
UPPER DOOR OPEN SENSE signal

FACE-DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL SENSE
signal
FIXING UNIT DELIVERY SENSE signal
FACE-DOWN TRAY DELIVERY SENSE
signal
FACE-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal
BEAM DETECTION INPUT signal
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX
Connector
J207
J208
J209
J210
J212
J213
J214
J215
Pin
Abbreviation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
+5V
/SCNRDY
/SCND
GND
/SCNCLK
24VGND
+24VA
FAN1D
/FAN1S
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
24VGND
/REGCLD
+24VA
/REGS
GND
P5VB1
FAN3D
/FAN3S
3
1
2
3
4
24VGND
3.3V
+5V
GND
FSRTH
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GND
SVIN
SVOUT
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
/DUPIDS
/DUPSTS
DUPCMD
/DUPCLK
24VGND
24VGND
24VGND
+24VA
P5VB1
/MPTCLD
/MPTSLD
MPTLS
/MPTPS
8
9
1
2
ENVCMD
ENVSTS
GND
LSIZE4
I/O
Logic
I
O
L
L
SCANNER MOTOR READY signal

SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE signal
SCANNER MOTOR CONTOL CLOCK signal
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
O
I
Signal name
ANALOG FAN MOTOR 1 DRIVE signal

L
FAN MOTOR 1 ROTATING DETECTION
signal
L
REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE signal
REGISTRATION PAPER SENSE signal

L
signal
O
O
I
ANALOG FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSE

signal
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
SERVICE STATUS signal

SERVICE COMMAND signal
L
L
H
P
DUPLEXING UNIT SENSE signal

DUPLEXING UNIT STATUS signal
DUPLEXING UNIT COMMAND signal
STATAS CLOCK signal
O
O
O
O
I
I
L
L
H
L
MANUAL FEED CLUTCH DRIVE signal

LIFTING PLATE SOLENOID DRIVE signal
LIFTING PLATE SENSE signal
MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY PAPER SENSE
signal
ENVELOPE FEEDER COMMAND signal
ENVELOPE FEEDER STATUS signal
LOWER CASSETTE PAPER SIZE SENSE

signal
O
I
I
A-5
APPENDIX
Connector
J215
J216
J217
J218
J219
A-6
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
Logic
Signal name
LSIZE3
LSIZE2
LSIZE1

signal
signal
signal
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
GND
USIZE4
USIZE3
USIZE2
USIZE1
FAN2D
/FAN2S
I
I
I
I
O
I
L
L
L
L
ANALOG
L
3
1
24VGND
FSRTH
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RLD
TSWIN
GND
TSWOUT
/FSRD1
/FSRD2
FSRDE
FSRCT
SUPSLT
/RLDSNS
PSTYP
REMT24
N.C.
/MMRDY
/MMOTD
24VGND
24VGND
+24VB
+24VB
FEDAND
FEDAD
FEDBND
FEDBD
/UDECKS
UDECKC
/FEEDCLD
/FEEDS
/PUPSLD

signal
H
RELAY DRIVE signal
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
O
L
L
H
ANALOG
H
L
L
FIXING MAIN HEATER DRIVE signal

FIXING SUB HEATER DRIVE signal
FIXING HEATER DRIVE ENABLE signal
FIXING HEATER CURRENT SENSE signal
INVERTER CIRCUIT CONTROL signal
RELAY DETECTION SENSE signal
POWER SUPPLY TYPE SENSE signal
24V DRIVE signal
I
O
L
L
MAIN MOTOR READY signal

MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
I
O
L
H
L
L
L
10
LDECKC
11
12
/LDECKS
LPVS2
I
I
UPPER CASSETTE PAPER SIZE SENSE signal

FAN MOTOR 2 DRIVE signal
signal
PICK-UP MOTOR CONTROL signal

UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-OUT SENSE signal
UPPER CASSETTE SENSE signal
FEED CLUTCH DRIVE signal
PICK-UP UNIT PAPER SENSE signal
CASSETTE PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE
signal
LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-OUT SENSE
signal
LOWER CASSETTE SENSE signal
LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE
signal 2
APPENDIX
Connector
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
J219
13
LPVS1
14
UPVS2
15
UPVS1
16
17
18
19
20
A1
A2
A3
/RDOORS
+24VA
P5VB1
GND
GND
TRFVCNT
TRFVSNS
/TRFCCD
I
O
O
A4
TRFCLK
A5
A6
N.C.
HVTCLK
A7
A8
/DEVACD
DEVACCLK
O
O
A9
A10
A11
A12
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
/DEVDCD
TONSNS
24VGND
24VB
/TRFNVD
/HRLBD
/DCHGBD
/DCHGUP
N.C.
N.C.
PRIACCLK
O
I
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
1
2
3
1
2
/PRIACD
/PRIDCD
DENADJ
24VGND
24VB
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
TSWOUT
FSRTH
3
4
1
2
1
GNDTH
TSWIN
TONSNS
GND
FAN4D
J220
J221
J222
J223
J225
O
I
O
Logic
LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE

signal 1
UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE
signal 2
UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE
signal 1
PIK-UP UNIT DOOR OPEN SENSE signal
ANALOG TRANSFER BIAS CONTROLL signal

ANALOG TRANSFER BIAS MONITOR signal
L
TRANSFER BIAS CONSTANT CURRENT
DRIVE signal
P
TRANSFER BIAS FREQUENCY OUTPUT
signal
P
HIGH-VOLTAGE BIAS FREQUENCY OUT

PUT signal
L
DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE signal
P
DEVELOPING AC BIAS FREQUENCY OUT
PUT signal
L
DEVELOPING DC BIAS DRIVE signal
ANALOG TONER LEVEL signal
O
O
O
O
O
L
L
L
L
O
I
O
Signal name
TRANSFER NEGATIVE BIAS DRIVE signal

FIXING ROLLER BIAS DRIVE signal
DISCHARGE BIAS DRIVE signal
DISCHARGE BIAS SWITCH signal
PRIMARY AC BIAS FREQVENCY OUTPUT

signal
L
PRIMARY AC BIAS DRIVE signal
L
PRIMARY DC BIAS DRIVE signal
ANALOG IMAGE DENSITY AD JUSTMENT signal
O
I
I
I
I

signal
ANALOG TONER LEVEL signal
FAN MOTOR 4 DRIVE signal
A-7
APPENDIX
Connector
J225
J229
A-8
Pin
Abbreviation
I/O
Logic
Signal name
/FAN4S

signal
3
4
1
2
24VGND
GND
FAN5D
/FANS5
O
I
3
4
24VGND
24VGND

L
signal
C.
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1.
Controller unit
Controller unit(1/2)
J1022
6p
ACDOWN
GND
POWERON
GND
+24V
RELAYON
Printer unit DC
power supply PCB
To FAX PCB
(ACC)
J802M
DRAWER CONNECTOR
Noise filter PCB
RLY1
DC power supply PCB

BI1103
1
2
3
ACDOWN
POWERON
GND
1
2
+24V
GND
24p
J801L
24p
J801D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DRAWER CONNECTOR
J802F
3p
J110
1
2
3
4
5
6
+3.3VJ(FIGARO)
1
+12V(FAX,INV)
2
+3.3V(UI,PDL)
3
+3.3(SEIF)
4
GND
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
+5VJ(FIGARO)
+5V(UI,PDL)
+5V(SEIF)
+5V(SEIF)
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J1020
10p
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Relay
2p
1
2
3
MT2
3p
P2
J1021
8p
BI1106
FT3
J104
J102
CB1
J103
NEWTRAL(W)
6p
AWG16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AWG16
BI1105
BI1102
BI1101
J101
BI1104
8p
FT1
HOT(BK)
FT6
FT5
3p
NEWTRAL(W)
J1101F
J1101M
HOT(BK)
BI1107
9p
FT4
FT2
4p
Leakage
1
2
3
4
+12V(FAX,INV)
1
2
3
4
5
6
+3.3VJ(FIGARO)
+3.3V(UI,PDL)
+3.3(SEIF)
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+5VJ(FIGARO)
+5V(UI,PDL)
+5V(SEIF)
+5V(SEIF)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Main power
switch
MSW1
A-9
Controller unit(2/2)
FAX PCB
(ACC)
SELIN
FAULT*
INIT*
AUTOFD*
SELECT
GND
PE
BUSY
ACK*
STB
GND
Controll panel unit
J304
Relay PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Control
panel
power switch
EEPROM
PCB
10p
J1042 J1041
50p
Battery
J30
J601
30p
80p
180p
J1031
J1043
J1017
4p
J1008
3p
J1015
160p
DRAM DIMM slot
J501
J1001 168p
64MB
J1002 168p
64MB
1
2
3
GND
+24V
LOCK
3
2
1
Image processor PCB
J201
FAN6
J1011
J601
100p
J1007
9p
48p
15p
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DC controller PCB
9p
100p
Finisher
(AC)
Network interface PCB

J502
40p
J1010
J1023
PDL PCB
Memory PCB
J306
11p
50p
LCD
J303
120p
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J302
Parollel interface
PCB
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
GND
GND
120p
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GND
IPCTXD
GND
IPCRXD
GND
FINON
GND
N.C.
N.C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTX*
GND
DRX*
DTERM
N.C.
DCLK*
GND
GND
9 GND
10 N.C.
11 GND
12 DSTRB*
13 DECKON
14 GND
15 N.C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RESET
GND
LIDED7
LIDED8
LIDED6
LIDED9
LIDED5
LIDED10
LIDED4
LIDED11
LIDED3
LIDED12
LIDED2
LIDED13
LIDED1
LIDED14
LIDED0
LIDED15
GND
N.C.
DMARQ
GND
DIOW*
GND
DIOR*
GND
IORDY
GND
DMACK*
GND
IDEINT
reserve
IDEA1
PDIAG(N.C.)
IDEA0
EDEA2
IDECS0*
IDECS1*
LEDON*
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
15p
Paper deck
(ACC)
A-10
HDD
2.
J2009M
J2009T
J2009F
1
2
3
1
2
3
GND
SIZE<1>
SIZE5V
GND
SIZE<0>
SIZE5V
+5V
COVDEC
GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
J2007
GND
SIZE<2>
SIZE5V
J2010M
J2012M
PS102
3
2
1
J102
J2010T
J2010F
J2011T
J2011F
PS103
1
2
3
3 2 1
Interface PCB
PS104
GND
SIZE<3>
SIZE5V
J2012T
J2012F
PS105
Copybord
cover
open/close
sensor
6
5
4
J2013
1
2
3
FM2
100
J101
PS106
Original
size
sensor 1
+5V
FHP
GND
Scanner motor cooling fan
PS101
Original
size
sensor 2
Original
size
sensor 3
9
8
7
To controller unit
Interface cable
Original
size
sensor 4
Scanner
home
position
sensor
J2011M
Reader unit(1/2)
Reader Unit
1 2 3
+24V
GNDA
+24V
68
J2052 3 2 1
J3011
68
A6
B6
J117
J132
J1603
Socket for DIMM

J113
B8
J115
J129
J112
13
1
2
3
4
5
(-)
(+)
8
J1002
GND
DF_RXD
DF_TXD
N.C.
GND
(+)
(-)
GND
ACCON
1
2
3
4
5
J1003
J2018F
RST
MOVE*
24V/38V
GND
I_CONT0*
I_CONT1*
I_CONT2*
I_CONT3*
MTCLK*
GND
CW/CCW*
STEP_ANGLE0*
STEP_ANGLE1*
GND
STEP_ANGLE2*
STEP_ANGLE3*
1
2
3
4
5
J2018M
1
2
3
4
REMOON
GND
FM4ON
FM4DEC
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
1
FLPWN
2
GND
3
FLONOUT
4
YPWM
5
YON
6
FLERR*
7
FLCLK*
8 N.C.
FL_TH
GND
+38V
GND
FL_S
+24V
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
6
5
4
3
2
1
A8
J8
4
Inverter PCB
5
J7
5
4
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
1
2
ERR
GNDU
+24/14V
J2037
Flexible cable
J2015
1 2 3
121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2031F
J1804
Accessories power
supply PCB
J2031T
J2031M
3 2 1
Scannig
lamp
J2042T
1 2 3
MT06
1 2 3 4
7
J2038M
1 2 3
1 2 3
MT05
PM1
+24V
GND
+24V
GND
J2038F
Scanning lamp
heater
Scannig lamp
thermistor
(THM)
1
2
3
4
5
BLU
RED
ORG
GRN
BLK
MT03
J2039M
3 2 1
MT04
J2039F
Scanner motor
driver PCB
J302
J2042F J2042M
2
1
2
1
1 2 3
J303
FM4
Power supply
cooling fan
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B8
+24V
FL_S
GND
H1
A8
6 5 4 3 2 1
FL_TH
GND
+38V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J1802
MT02
J2024F J2024M
1
1
2
2
J2022B
J2022C
J2022A
J2001
Intensity
detection
PCB
DADF
Scanner motor
A-11
Reader unit(2/2)

J6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J4
6 5 4 3 2 1
J3
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+5.2V
+5.2V
+5.2V
+5V[24H]
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GNDR
GNDR
GNDR
GNDU
+24V
GNDA
GNDA
+5VA
+5VA
6 5 4 3 2 1
-12V
GNDR
DC(+)
5 4 3 2 1
J2036M
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+15V
GNDR
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GNDU
GNDU
GNDU
GNDU
N.C.
+38V
+38V
+38V
+38V
5 4 3 2 1
DC(-)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+15V
J1
J801
J2036F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Accessories
power supply
PCB
Noise filter PCB
FT116
Reader unit rear

power switch
FT117
J2019F J2019M
FT115
FT113
FT114
J1101
2 1
J1001
13 J2016M
J2017M
Scanner motor driver

PCB
J2016T
13
J2016F
J301
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J501
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A-12
15
12
J119
J118
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J131
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J122
GNDU
GNDU
+38V
+38V
-12V
GNDR
+15V
GNDR
+5.2V
BE
GND
BO
GND
GE
GND
GO
GND
RE
GND
RO
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
N.C.
GND
NF1
NF2
GND
NRS
NCP
GND
NSP
NSH
GND
GND
+5<A>
+5<A>
+12V
+12V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GNDU
+38V
GNDA
+24V
GNDR
+15V
GNDA
+5VA
GNDR
+5.2V
+5V[24H]
J2017F
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J2017T
+5.2V
GNDR
+15V
GNDR
-12V
+38V
+38V
GNDU
GNDU
15
Inverter PCB
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BE
GND
BO
GND
GE
GND
GO
GND
RE
GND
RO
GND
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 N.C.
J102
15
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P1
J101
GND
NF1
NF2
GND
NRS
NCP
GND
NSP
NSH
GND
GND
+5<A>
+5<A>
+12V
+12V
FT02
FT01
Leakage
Breaker
(ELCB1)
to NCU
CCD/CCD driver PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2 1
FT06
FT03
J2025M J2025F
FT09
FT10
FT07
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J130
3.
1 2 3 4
FAN1
J15
1 2 3
3 2 1
J12
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J210
1 2 3
J208
2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
J14
1 2
2 1
FSRTH
RLD
TSWIN
GND
TSWOUT
/FSRD1
/FSRD2
FSRDE
J209
FSRCT
SUPSLT /REGCLD
+24VA
/RLDSNS
/REGS
PSTYP
GND
/REMT24
P5VB1
N.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5
J206
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FAN3
Fixing unit/
Scanner unit
fan
1 2
GND
GND
/BDI
+5V
GND
FEDAND
FEDAD
J203
FEDBND
FEDBD
/UDECKS
UDECKC
/FEEDCLD
/FEEDS
/PUPSLD
LDECKC
/LDECKS
LPVS2
J202
LPVS1
/LENBL
UPVS2
/LON
UPVS1
/VDO
/RDOORS
GND
+24VA
VDO
P5VB1
N.C.
GND
GND
GND
+5V
GND
DRVES
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ferrite
core
J207
+5V
J222
TSWOUT /SCNRDY
/SCND
FSRTH
GND
GNDTH
/SCNCLK
TSWIN
24VGND
+24VA
1 2 3 4 5 6
J219
J218
/MMRDY
/MMOTD
24VGND
24VGND
+24VB
+24VB
J220
TRFVCNT A1
/TRFNVD B1
TRFVSNS A2
/HRLBD B2
/TRFCCD A3
/DCHGBD B3
TRFCLK A4
/DCHGUP B4
N.C. A5
N.C. B5
HVTCLK A6
N.C. B6
/DEVACD A7
PRJACCLK B7
DEVACCLK A8
/PRJACD B8
/DEVDCD A9
/PRJACD B9
TONSNS A10
DENADJ B10
24VGND A11
24VGND B11
+24VB A12
+24VB B12
24VGND
+24VA
P5VB1
/MPTCLD
/MPTSLD
MPTLS
/MPTPS
ENVCMD
ENVSTS
J214
FAN5D
/FAN5S
24VGND
24VGND
J229
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J16
J18
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
J701
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 3 2 1
J17
CL
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Electrical
unit fan
J13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A16
B16
C16
A15
B15
C15
A14
B14
C14
A13
B13
C13
A12
B12
C12
A11
B11
C11
A10
B10
C10
A9
B9
C9
A8
B8
C8
A7
B7
C7
A6
B6
C6
A5
B5
C5
A4
B4
C4
A3
B3
C3
A2
B2
C2
A1
B1
C1
J201
A1
B1
C1
A2
B2
C2
A3
B3
C3
A4
B4
C4
A5
B5
C5
A6
B6
C6
A7
B7
C7
A8
B8
C8
A9
B9
C9
A10
B10
C10
A11
B11
C11
A12
B12
C12
A13
B13
C13
A14
B14
C14
A15
B15
C15
A16
B16
C16
GND
GND
VDO
GND
GND
/VDO
/FPCS
/FPO
/FPI
reserved
reserved
FPCK
/VSREQ
/RDY
/PPRDY
/VSYNC
/CPRDY
/PRNT
/STS
/SBSY
/PCLK
/CMD
/CBSY
/CCLK
CPSEL
/PRFD
/CCRT
/SPCHG
/PFED
/PDLV
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
/BD
1 2 3 4
Registration
clutch
CL1
4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC controller PCB
BD PCB
1 2 3
FAN1D
/FAN1S
24VGND
HVT
J1
Laser driver
PCB
J1001
TB705
Video controller
Scanner
motor
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
J204
+5V
3.3V
+5V
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
24VGND
+24V
24VGND
From fixing unit
1
Registration
PS1 paper sensor
FAN3D
/FAN3S
24VGND
J11
J6
J217
Printer unit
A1B1A2B2A3B3A4B4A5B5
J221
1 TONSNS
2 GND
J223
J228
1 /REGCLD
2 24VGND
FAN2
J26
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
J19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fixing unit fan

1
2
3
FAN4
Duplexing unit
(option)
Ferrite core
Upper cassette
paper-level
sensor 2
PS1207
Lower cassette
paper-out
sensor
PS1208
J51
J1205
/FEEDS 3
GND 2
P5VB1 1
J1206
/RDOORS 3
GND 2
P5VB1 1
J13
3 1
2 2
1 3
PS2
1
2
3
J14
3 1
2 2
1 3
Pick-up unit
paper sensor
PS3
1
2
3
Pick-up unit
door sensor
2 1
J55
2 1
J56
Upper cassette
paper-level
sensor 1
PS1206
J54
Feed clutch
CL
J10
6 5 4 3 2 1
Fixing sub heater J53

H2
CL2
6 5 4 3 2 1
J52
2
1
B
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cassette pick-up
solenoid
H1
J1204
+24VA 2
/FEEDCLD 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
Fixing main heater
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB51
Lower cassette
paper-level
sensor 2
PS1205
+24VA 2
/PUPSLD 1
J204
FSRN1
FSRL1
FSRL2
FSRN2
J102
PS1204
TB50
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
SL1
J1203
Power supply
Pick-up motor
J12
J1201
Lower cassette
paper-level
sensor 1
1 2 3 4
SMT1
M
CL
CL3
Manual feed
clutch
Envelope feeder
(option)
Power supply fan

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Upper cassette
sensor
TB54
FAN5
Multi-purpose
tray fan
TB705
J1202
FEDAD 1
FEDAND 2
FEDBD 3
FEDBND 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4
To HVT
PS1202
PS1203
2
1
Pick-up PCB
Lower cassette
sensor
TSW
Lifting plate
position sensor
Cassette-size
sensing switch PCB
J25
1 2 3
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
5
4
3
2
1
J1303
+24VA 2
/MPTCLD 1
PS1302
2
1
SL2
Lifting plate
solenoid
Multi-purpose
tray paper sensor
1 2 3
Main motor
Power switch
PS1201
TH
Cassette-size
sensing switch PCB
J225
FAN4D 1
/FAN4S 2
24VGND 3
GND 4
SL3
Face-up
solenoid
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
MT1
TB52
J1601B
5
4
3
2
1
3 2 1
SW101
TB53
5
4
3
2
1
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
J1302
+24VA 2
/MPTSLD 1
PS1301
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J50
J1601A
5
4
3
2
1
J216
GND 3
/FAN2S 2
FAN2D 1
Multi-purpose
tray PCB
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Thermistor
1 3.3V
2 +5V
3 GND
4 FSRTH
5 GND
6 SVIN
7 SVOUT
8 +24VA
Switch/sensor
PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J24
1
2
3
4
J212
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fixing unit
delivery
sensor
Face-down
tray delivery
sensor
1 2
J213
24VGND
24VGND
/DUPCLK
DUPCMD
/DUPSTS
/DUPIDS
+24VA
+24VA
Face-down
tray paper full
sensor
A1B1A2B2A3B3A4B4A5B5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+24VA
ENVCMD
ENVSTS
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PS1403
1
2
3
4
GND
LSIZE4
LSIZE3
LSIZE2
LSIZE1
GND
USIZE4
USIZE3
USIZE2
USIZE1
PS1402
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1304
J215
PS1401
J1301
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Ferrite
core
J34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
FGND
J35
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
UDOORS
FDFULS
/FPOUTS
FDOUTS
/FUSLD
P5VB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Door switch
/FUSLD
+24VA
J205
SW1401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Thermoswitch
J1401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J1402
1
2
3
SL
+24VB 1
+24VB 2
+24VB 3
Fixing unit
Upper cassette
paper-out sensor
A-13
Blank Page
A-14
APPENDIX
D.
Special Tools
You will need the following special tools in addition to the standard tools set:
No.
Tool name
Shape
Rank
Uses
Contact remover
RY9-9099
For removing contacts (upper/lower

heater of the fixing
assembly).
Door switch
FY9-3036
For checking the

operation inside the
printer (as for repairs;
four pieces are kept as
a set behind the right
front cover).
NA3 Test Sheet
FY9-3640
For checking/adjusting images.
Mirror positioning
tool (front, rear)
FY9-3040
For adjusting the

position of No. 1/No.
2 mirror (used in
combination, i.e.,
front and rear).
Ranking:
A: Each service person is expected to carry one.
B: Each group of five service persons is expected to carry one.
C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.
A-15
APPENDIX
E.
No.
Solvents and Oils

Name
Uses
Composition
Remarks
CI or IPA (isopropyl
alcohol) may be used.
Alcohol
Cleaning: e.g., glass,

plastic (Note), rubber;
eternal covers
Fluorine-family hydro
carbon, Alcohol,
Surface activating
agent, Water
Solvent
Cleaning: e.g., metal

units; oil or toner
stains
Fluorine-family
hydrocarbon, Alcohol,
Chlorine-family
hydrocarbon
Lubrication oil
Lubricating: original
exposure rail
Silicone oil
Tool No.: FY9-6011

(50 cc)
Lubrication oil
Lubricating: between
gear and shaft
Petroleum-family
mineral oil
Tool No.: CK-8003
Lubrication agent
Lubrication: gears
Special oil, Special

solid lubricating agent,
Lithium soap
Tool No.: HY9-0007
Lubrication agent
Lubricating: drive
mechanisms
Silicone oil
Tool No.: CK-0551

(20 g)
Note:
Be sure to sue a moist (well-wrung) cloth to clean the external covers.
A-16
READER
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATIONS
I.
Basic Operations .......................... 1-1R

A. Functional construction ................ 1-1R
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry...... 1-2R
C. Inputs to and Outputs from Major

PCBs ............................................. 1-3R
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I.
Outline .......................................... 2-1R

A. Outline .......................................... 2-1R
II. Basic Operations of the Original
Exposure System .......................... 2-2R
A. Basic Operations of the Original
Exposure System .......................... 2-2R
1.
Sequence of Operation ............. 2-2R
III. Original Scanner Motor................ 2-4R
1.
Outline ..................................... 2-4R
2.
Operations ................................ 2-5R
IV. Changing the Reproduction
Ratio ................................................... 2-6R
V. Turning On the Scanning Lamp. 2-7R
A. Outline ......................................... 2-7R
B. Controlling the Scanning Lamp 2-8R
1. Standby Pre-Heating .............. 2-8R
2. Pre-Activation Pre-Heating ... 2-8R
3. Activation Pre-Heating .......... 2-8R
C. Turning On and Off the Scanning
Lamp ............................................. 2-8R
D. Controlling the Intensity of the
Scanning Lamp ............................. 2-8R
E. Controlling the Temperature of the
Scanning Lamp Heater ................. 2-8R
F. Detecting the Life of the Scanning
Lamp ............................................. 2-9R
G. Detecting Errors ........................... 2-9R
VI. Detecting the Size of Originals .. 2-10R
1.
Outline ................................... 2-10R
2. Detection by Original Size
Sensors .................................. 2-11R
3. Detecting the size of
Originals ............................... 2-12R
VII. Disassembly/Assembly ............ 2-13R

A. Reader unit External Covers .... 2-14R
1. Removing the Front
Lower Cover ......................... 2-15R
2. Removing the Right
upper Cover .......................... 2-15R
3. Removing the Rear
Upper Cover ......................... 2-17R
4. Removing the Left
Upper Cover ......................... 2-18R
B. Scanner Drive Assembly .......... 2-19R
1. Removing the Original
Scanner Motor ...................... 2-19R
2. Adjusting the Tension of the Belt
When Mounting the Original
Scanner Motor ....................... 2-19R
3.
Removing the Original Scanner
Motor Driver PCB ................. 2-19R
4. Routing the Scanner
Drive Cable ........................... 2-20R
5. Points to Note About the
Flexible Cable....................... 2-25R
C. Original Exposure System ....... 2-27R
1. Removing the Scanning Lamp/
Scanning Lamp Heater .......... 2-27R
2. Points to Note When Replacing
the Scanning Lamp............... 2-29R
3. Removing the Standard
White Plate Cover ................ 2-30R
D. PCBs .....................................................
1.
Removing the Light Adjustment
Detection PCB ...................... 2-31R
R1
CONTENTS
2.
E.
Removing the Inverter

PCB Unit ............................... 2-31R
Fans ............................................ 2-32R
1.
2.
Power Supply Cooling Fan ...... 2-32R

Scanner Motor Cooling Fan ..... 2-32R
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

I.
II.
A.
B.
III.
1.
2.
Outline .......................................... 3-1R

CCD/CCD Drive .......................... 3-2R
CCD .............................................. 3-2R
CCD Driver .................................. 3-2R
Image Processing.......................... 3-3R
Outline ..................................... 3-3R
ABC (auto background control)
Circuit ...................................... 3-4R
3.
Shading Correction .................. 3-5R
4. 3-Line CCD Position
Matching ................................. 3-6R
IV.
R2
Disassembly/Assembly .............. 3-7R
A. CCD Unit ..................................... 3-8R

1. Removing the Lens Base
Cover/CCD Unit ..................... 3-8R
B. PCBs
1. Removing the Reader
Controller PCB ..................... 3-10R
V. Upgrading .................................. 3-13R
A. Replacing the DIMM on the
Reader Controller PCB ............. 3-13R
1. Removing the ROM DIMM (on
the reader controller PCB) .. 3-13R
2. Mounting the ROM DIMM (on the
reader controller PCB) ........... 3-15R
CHAPTER 1
BASIC OPERATIONS
I . Basic Operations
A.
Functional Construction
The machine is broadly divided into three functional blocks: original exposure system, control
system, and image processing system.
Original exposure system

Control system
Original
Optical path
Original illumination
Scanner drive
CCD driver
Image processing system
Interface PCB
Reader unit
Controller
Printer
Figure 1-101
1-1 R
B.
Outline of Electrical Circuitry
The machines major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the CPU on the reader controller
PCB. The reader controller PCB is equipped with a battery used to back up data.
CCD/CCD
driver PCB

CPU
Sensors,
Switches
Inverter
FROM
4MB
Scanning lamp
Light adjustment detection PCB

DRAM
256kB16
Original scanner
motor driver PCB
SRAM
32kB82
Reader unit main power supply
Fan
Fan
Figure 1-102
1-2 R
C.
Inputs to and Outputs from Major PCBs
Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (1/3)

Leakage
breaker
(circuit breaker;
ELCB1)
Reader unit
main power
supply PCB
(DCP1)
Noise filter
PCB
MSW1
J129
-4
REMOON
-3
GND
-2
FAN4ON
-1
FAN4DEC
J8
-1
-2
-3
-4
J7 J2031
-1
+24/14V -3
-2
-4
GND
FM1
-3
ERR -5
When FM4 is
Power supply cooling fan
not rotating, '0'.
Reader
power switch
J129
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
Inverter PCB
J6 J1001
-1
+40V -3
-2
GND -8
J1002
J1003
-1 -2 -4 -5
Scanning lamp
thermistor (THM)
H1
LA1
Scanning lamp
J2015
-12 -1 -2 -11 -12
J2037
-11
-9
-8 Flexible cable
-7
-6
-5
-4
-2
-1
J115
-6
-4
-5
-5
-4
-6
-3
-7
-2
-8
-1
-9
J2037
FLPWN
GND
FLONOUT
YPWM
YON
FLERR
FLCLK
See p. 2-7R.
FL_TH
GND
+40V
GND
FL-S
+24V
See p. 2-7R.
J2001
-1 -2 -3
Light
adjustment
detection
PCB
Original scanner
motor
PM1
J302
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J303
J113
See p. 3-4.
J1605
Original scanner
motor driver PCB
Figure 1-103
1-3 R

Original scanner home

position sensor
Copyboard cover open/closed

sensor
Original size sensor 1
PS 1
J2013
-1
-2
-3
J117B
-9
-8
-7
PS 2
J2007
-1
-2
-3
J117A
-3
-2
-1
J2009
-3
-2
-1
J117A
-4
-5
-6
J2010
-3
-2
-1
J117B
-1
-2
-3
J2011
-3
-2
-1
J117B
-4
-5
-6
J2012
-3
-2
-1
J117B
-4
-5
-6
PS 3
PS 4
5V
SCHP
When the scanner is in home position '1'.

(light-blocking plate over PS101)
5V
CBCC
When the copyboard cover is closed, '1'.

(light-blocking plate over PS102)
5V
DSZ1
5V
DSZ2
See p. 2-11R.
PS 1
PS 106
5V
DSZ3
5V
DSZ4
Figure 1-104
1-4 R
Controller block
J102
J101
J132
Interface PCB
J101
J102
CCD/CCD
driver PCB
Feeder
J118
J119
Accessories
power supply
PCB (DCP2)
FM2
J1804
-1
-2
J129
-13
-12
1
2
3
J2051
3
2
1
GND
ACCON
J3011
1 +24V
2
3
FAN_LOCK
Figure 1-105
1-5 R
CHAPTER 2
ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
Outline
A.
Outline
The original exposure system covers mechanisms used from when an original is exposed until
when its reflected light is projected to the CCD. Figure 2-101 shows a cross section of the original
exposure system, while Figure 2-102 shows its external view.
Scanning lamp
No. 2 mirror
(forward)
CCD
No. 1 mirror
CCD
diver
Lens
No. 3 mirror
Figure 2-101
No. 2/3 mirror base
(forward)
No. 1 mirror
base
Original scanner motor (PM1)
Signal plate
Figure 2-102
2-1 R
II.
Basic Operations of the Original Exposure System
A.
Basic Operations of the Original Exposure System
1.
Sequence of Operations
Main Switch
ON
Start key ON
WMUP
STBY
INTR
70C control
Scanning lamp (H1)
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY

70C control
Scanning lamp pre-heating

Preparatory activation
Original Scaning Lamp (LA1)

Shading correction
Original Scaning motor (PM1)
Original Scanner home position

sensor (PS101)
Search of HP
Search of HP
Figure 2-201 A4/LTR, 2 Copies, 4 Colors, Direct, Cassette 1

Forward
Reverse
Operations
Switches to forward movement.

Original scanner home
position sensor
(PS101: SCHP)
Moves 1 mm forward, and then

stops. (The stop position is home
position.)
Table 2-201
2-2 R
The original scanner home position sensor turns on for the following:
When the power is turned on.
When copying is started.
When scanning of as many copies as set is finished.
While CCD is being adjusted (service mode).
The sensor does not turn on during continuous copying. If it turns on because of an error in the
reader unit, or the like, scanning operation will immediately be stopped.
Figure 2-202 shows the movement of the scanner during copying operation. (The start position
in Direct is a point about 5 mm ahead of home position.)
PS101
1mm
8 mm (approx.)
Home position
Leading edge
of original
Start position
Original
HP search at power-on
Original detection scan

Move to start position
Scan during copying
Last scan
Figure 2-202
2-3 R
III. Original Scanner Motor

1.
Outline
The following figure shows the circuit used to control the original scanner motor, and the
circuit has the following functions:
1. Controls the direction of rotation of the original scanner motor.
2. Controls the speed of rotation of the original scanner motor.
The original scanner motor changes its direction of rotation when moving the scanner forward
and in reverse; its speed used to move the scanner forward (during scanning), on the other hand,
varies depending on the selected reproduction ratio.
The speed of rotation when the scanner is moved forward and in reverse is classified into the
following four:
When single-page mode is selected (about 7.7 times as high as forward)
When the distance the No. 1 mirror base travels in reverse is 105.1 mm or more (about 16.4
times as high as forward)
When the distance the No. 1 mirror base travels in reverse is less than 70.1 mm (about 5.7
times as high as forward)
+38V
CPU
CLK
7
I/O
Motor controller PCB IC
Q301
A
B
A~E
A~E
Motor
drive
circuit
Current
switching
5
D
E
Constant
current
control
Current
circuit
detection

(PM1)
Original scanner motor driver PCB
Figure 2-301
2-4 R
2.
Operations
The reader controller PCB sends to the original scanner motor driver PCB the following signals according to the selected scan mode, distance, and reproduction ratio: MTCLK*, CW/CCW*,
STEP_ANGLEO* to STEP_ANGLE3*.
In response to these signals, the motor control IC (Q301) on the original scanner motor driver
PCB generates motor drive pulses (SPA to SPE, SNA to SNE) to drive the original scanner motor.
The original scanner motor is a 5-phase stepping motor, and its direction and speed are controlled
by changing the sequence of the motor drive pulses (SPA through SPE, SNA through SNE) and
frequency.
The constant current control circuit controls the current flowing to the motor to a level suited to
the speed of rotation.
While the motor is at rest in standby state, the MOVE* signal cuts the current to the motor,
thereby preventing overheating.
2-5 R
IV. Changing the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio in main scanning direction (drum axial direction) is executed by the
image processor PCB of the controller block.
The reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction is changed by speeding up the mirror mount
(for reduction) or slowing it down (for enlargement).
No. 2/3 mirror mount
(forward)
No. 1
mirror base
Original scanner
motor (PM1)
Signal plate
Original scanner
home position
sensor signal (SCHP)

driver PCB
Figure 2-401
2-6 R
V.
Turning On the Scanning Lamp
A.
Outline
The machines scanning lamp is a fluorescent lamp, and is controlled by the inverter PCB in
response to signals from the reader controller PCB.
Controlling the pre-heating mechanisms of the scanning lamp
Turning on/off the scanning lamp
Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp
Controlling the temperature of the scanning lamp
Detecting the life of the scanning lamp
Detecting errors
Reader unit main power

supply PCB
Inverter PCB
J6
-1 +40V
-2
T1001
Scanning lamp
L1001
Diode
bridge
Scanning
lamp heater
(H1)
L1002
Scanning
lamp thermistor (THM)
Error
detection
circuit
FET FET
Pre-heating
circuit
Q1010
control IC
Light intensity
detention PCB
FET
+24V
FL_S
GND
J1610 -1 -2 -3
J1602
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
J1610
-4
+40V
-5
GND
-6
FL_TH
FLPWN
GND
FLONOUT
YPWM
YON
FLERR*
FLCLK*
Figure 2-501
2-7 R
B.
Controlling the Scanning Lamp
So that the intensity of the scanning lamp may attain an optimum level in a short time after the
Start key is turned on, the filament of the scanning lamp is supplied with power, and this arrangement is called pre-heating. The machines pre-heating mode includes standby-preheating, preactivation pre-heating, and activation pre-heating.
1.
Standby Pre-Heating
When the power is turned on, the filament is supplied with a voltage of 2.9 0.25 V during
initial rotation and at the end of copying. When the lamp turns off at the end of copying, the preheating mechanism turns off once, and then standby pre-heating turns on when the lamp heater
turns on. Thereafter, standby pre-heating remains on until the lamp turns on the next time.
2.
Pre-Activation Pre-Heating
The filament is supplied with a voltage of 4.35 0.45 V 1.5 sec before the scanning lamp turns
on to start copying operation.
3.
Activation Pre-Heating
The filament is supplied with a voltage of 3.8 0.4 V during copying operation; in activation
pre-heating, a level of voltage determined from the light intensity duty ratio read while the scanning lamp remain on is used.
C.
Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp
The scanning lamp is turned on and off in response to signals from the reader controller PCB:
scanning lamp activation ON signal (FLPWM), scanning lamp clock signal (FLCLK*), and scanning lamp ON signal (FLONOUT).
D.
Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp
The FLPWM signal is a pulse signal, and its duty ratio is varied according to the scanning lamp
intensity sensor signal (FL_S) detected by the light adjustment detection PCB and the setting of the
scanning lamp adjusting VR so as to maintain a specific level of the scanning lamp.
E.
Controlling the Temperature of the Scanning Lamp Heater
The machine is equipped with a scanning lamp heater to speed up the activation of the scanning
lamp. Normally, the scanning lamp heater is set to 70 5C, and a thermistor is used to monitor its
temperature, which is controlled as follows:
If the temperature is less than 40C, the filament of the scanning lamp is supplied with power
for 120 sec (standby pre-heating); then, minimum current pre-heating is executed for 60 sec
using a 10% light adjustment duty ratio, during which time the scanning lamp is controlled to
70C. The scanning lamp heater is turned on while the scanning lamp remains on only during
the standby activation period.
If the temperature is 40C or higher at time of power-on, the scanning lamp standby activation period (about 20 sec) is started immediately without turning on the scanning lamp
heater.
After the scanning lamp standby activation, the temperature is controlled so that it remains as
set (about 70C). When the temperature falls below the setting, the scanning lamp heater is
turned on, and the heater is turned off when the temperature exceeds the setting.
2-8 R
F.
Detecting the Life of the Scanning Lamp
The life of the scanning lamp is checked as follows:

1. The light adjustment duty ratio while the scanning lamp is on is read about every 100 msec;
a warning is issued if the ratio is higher than specified.
2. The scanning lamp thermistor is used to detect the temperature of the scanning lamp when it
is on; a warning is issued if the temperature is higher than specified (130C).
3. The intensity start-up period of the scanning lamp is monitored for each activation; a warning
is issued if it fails to reach a specific level within a specific period of time (about 2 sec).
4. If the characteristic of light distribution of the scanning lamp deteriorates and threatens to
affect the range allowed for shading correction.
If any of the foregoing four applies, the condition is assumed to indicate a warning
for the life of the scanning lamp, and a warning will be issued in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>FL-LIFE. In addition, if the thermistor registers 150C or
higher, E210 will be indicated. (For how to replace the scanning lamp, see p. 12-10.)
G.
Detecting Errors
The following is a list of errors related to the scanning scanning/scanning lamp heater:
Code
Cause
Timing of detection
E211
The scanning lamp thermistor

has an open circuit.
The temperature falls below 0C while controlled to 70C.
E215
The scanning lamp thermistor

has a short circuit.
The thermistor of the scanning lamp heater registers 170C or higher when the
FLONOUT signal is off (including at power-on).
E216
The scanning lamp fails to

turn on in 15 sec or more.
The intensity sensor does not detect lamp from the scanning lamp in 15 sec.
E217
The scanning lamp heater

has exhausted its life.
While the scanning lamp heater is used to control the temperature to a specific
level, the temperature does not exceed the specified level when the lamp heater
is supplied with power for 3 min or more.
E219
The scanning lamp has

reached the end of its life.
The thermistor of the scanning lamp detects 150C or higher while the scanning
lamp is on.
E220
The scanning lamp is absent

(exhausted).
The scanning lamp has not been mounted (as after replacement work).
The filament of the scanning lamp has broken.
Table 2-501
2-9 R
VI. Detecting the Size of Originals

1.
Outline
The size of an original is detected by sensors when it is placed on the copyboard glass. The size
data obtained by the sensors is used for the following mechanisms:
Auto paper selection
Auto ratio selection
Sensor 3 Sensor 4
(PS105) (PS106)
B5R
A4R
A5
Sensor 2 B5
(iPS104)
Sensor 1
(PS103)
B4
A3
A4
Sensor 3 Sensor 4
(PS105) (PS106)
STMT
LTRR
LGL
Sensor 2
(PS104)
LTR
11x17
Figure 2-601
2-10 R
2.
Detection by Original Size Sensors

Sensors of a reflecting type are mounted under the copyboard glass to detect the size of originals placed on the copyboard glass.
When the copyboard cover is closed to about 30, the photointerrupter (PS102) turns on (i.e.,
the light-blocking plate covers PS102). The output level of each sensor is read at intervals of about
0.1 sec for 15 sec after PS102 turns on or until the Start key is pressed. If the output level remains
the same, the condition will be identified to indicate the presence of an original over the sensors in
question. The data is checked (Tables 2-601, -602) to find out the size of the original.
This way of detecting the size also enables detecting the size of a black original. However, the
output level of the sensor will not change for the conditions shown as a. and b. below; in addition,
in the case of c., a scanner will be shown on the control panel to ask the user to select a cassette for
auto paper selection or an original size for auto ratio selection after the Start key is pressed.
a. Black original of A3
b. Book original (changes in the sensor level are difficult to detect because of the thickness)
c. Copyboard cover (not closed, i.e., PS102 remains off)
Reference:
In the case of a., b., or c., above, the machine can detect the wrong size.
Copyboard cover
Original
30
PS102: ON
Copyboard
glass
ON
Original
detection 1
OFF
ON
Original
detection 2
ON
No change Change
in level
in level
Figure 2-602
2-11 R
3.
Detecting the Size of Originals

In addition to the data indicating the presence/absence of an original (by the original detection
mechanism), the reader controller circuit detects the size of originals as shown in Tables 2-601 and
-602.
Same:
The output of the sensor in question remains the same when read about every 100
msec after the copyboard cover open/closed sensor turns on (detecting an original).
Different: The output of the sensor in question is different when read about every 100 msec
after the copyboard cover open/closed sensor turns on (not detecting an original).
Original size sensor
Original
size
A3
Same
Same
Same
Same
B4
Different
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Different Different
A4R
A4
Same
Same
Different Different
B5
Different
Same
Different Different
Different
Same
B5R
Different Different
None
Different Different Different Different
Table 2-601 A/B-Series Original

Original size sensor
Original
size
1117
Same
Same
Same
LGL
Different
Same
Same
LTRR
Different
Same
Different
LTR
Same
Different Different
Table 2-602 Inch-Series Originals
2-12 R
VII. Disassembly/Assembly
The descriptions that follow explain the mechanical features of the machine and how it may be
disassembled/assembled; be sure to observe the following during the work:
1. Unless otherwise mentioned, reverse the steps used to disassemble the parts when assembling
them.
2. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
3. One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is equipped with a toothed washer to protect
against static charges. Be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
4. The mounting screws for the grounding wire and varistors are equipped with a toothed washer
to ensure electrical continuity. Be sure to use the washers when assembling the parts.
5. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed.
6.
Do not throw the toner cartridge into fire. It could explode.
7. If the cartridge must be removed for disassembly/assembly of the machine, be sure always to
protect it with a cover regardless of how short the work may be.
8. When handling PCBs, be sure to touch the metal portion of the machine before the work to
discharge any buildup of static charges, thus avoiding damage to the PCBs.
2-13 R
A.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Reader Unit External

Covers
Front lower cover
Right upper cover
Rear upper cover
Left upper cover
Rear cover
Front upper cover
[6]
[2]
[1]
Figure 2-701
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 2-702
2-14 R
1. Removing the Front Lower Cover

the control panel lower cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Figure 2-703
[3]
2) Remove the five screws [3], and detach

the cable cover [4].
[4]
[3]
Figure 2-704
2-15 R

the control panel cover [6].
[6]
[5]
Figure 2-705
4) Remove the face cap [7] and two screws

[8] each, and detach the front lower cover
[9].
[8]
[7]
[7]
[8]
Figure 2-706
2-16 R
2. Removing the Right Upper Cover

the delivery tray [2].
the right upper cover [4].
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Figure 2-707
3. Removing the Rear Upper Cover
1) Remove the interface cable [1], and detach the DADF [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 2-708
2) Remove the three face caps [3] and five
screws [4]; then, detach the rear upper
cover [5].
[5]
[3],[4]
Figure 2-709
2-17 R
4. Removing the Left Upper Cover

1) Remove the cable cover.
2) Disconnect the connector from the control
panel.
3) Remove the control panel lower cover.
4) Remove the control panel cover.
5) Remove the control panel.
6) Remove the rear upper cover.
the left upper cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
Figure 2-710
2-18 R
B.
Scanner Drive Assembly
1.

Motor
1) Remove the front lower cover.
the cable clamp [2] and the three screws
[3]; then, detach the original scanner motor [4] together with the support plate. (Be
sure to pay attention to the drive belt when
detaching it.)
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
Figure 2-711
[4]
2.
Adjusting the Tension of the Belt

When Mounting the Original
Scanner Motor
Move the original scanner motor (w/
support plate) to the right, and be sure to
tighten the screws securely.

Motor Driver PCB
2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and
free the cable clamp [2]; then, remove the
two screws [3], and detach the original
scanner motor driver PCB [4].
[1]
3.
[3]
[2]
Figure 2-712
2-19 R
4.
Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Before starting to route the scanner cable,
obtain the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040).
[1]
[2]
1) Remove the copyboard cover.

the right glass retaining cover [3].
[1]
Figure 2-713
[4]
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Remove the copyboard glass.

Remove the front lower cover.
Remove the control assembly.
Remove the front upper cover.
Remove the rear upper cover.
Remove the standard white plate cover as
show in step 4) on p. 2-30R.
9) Remove the four screws [4], and detach
the right reinforcing tray [3].
[3]
[4]
Figure 2-714
2-20 R
10) Remove the left upper cover.

11) Remove the rear cover.
12) Remove the reader unit main power supply PCB [5].
13) Move the No. 1 mirror mount [5] so that
the cable metal fixing of the No. 1 mirror
mount is visible through the long hole [6]
in the side plate.
[5]
[6]
(front)
[5]
[6]
(rear)
Figure 2-715
2-21 R
14) Engage the scanner cable on the pulley

and the hook as shown in the figure.
Caution:
Take care not to damage the cable
against the edge of metal plates.
[6]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7]
Fix in place
temporarily.
Wind 7
times.
[5]
Put the steel ball through

the hole in the pulley.
[4]
Be sure to wind so that there is no gap

between the runs of the cable.
Figure 2-716
2-22 R
15) Loosen the screws of the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040), and contract the arm
fully.
Figure 2-717
16) Fit the mirror positioning tool between the
No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror
mount; then, insert the pin that comes
with the mirror positioning tool.
Pin
Mirror positioning tool
Holes
(front)
Mirror positioning tool
Pin
Hole
Holes
(rear)
Figure 2-718
2-23 R
17) Secure the cable metal fixing temporarily

tightened in e. of step 14) using two
screws [8] through the long hole [8] of the
side plate.
[8]
[7]
(front)
[8]
[7]
(rear)
Figure 2-719
18) Detach the mirror positioning tool.
19) Mount the parts by reversing steps 1)
through 12).
Reference:
The machine does not require adjustment of the tension of the cable.
2-24 R
5.
Points to Note About the Flexible

Cable
Do not disconnect the connector (connected to the No. 1 mirror base) of the flexible
cable unless you are replacing the No. 1 mirror
mount (if you have to clean the mirror, do so
without removing the cable).
[2]
[1]
Removing the Flexible Cable

the right glass retaining cover [2].
[1]
Figure 2-720
[3]

3) Move the No. 1 mirror base [3] to the center.
Figure 2-721
4) Remove the Warning label [4] from the
flexible cable [5].
[4]
[5]
Figure 2-722
2-25 R
5) Free the flexible cable [7] of the connector

by pushing the claws [6] inward.
[6]
(released)
[7]
Figure 2-723
[8]
6) Using a small screwdriver [8], push the

protrusions (2 pc.) used to hook the flexible cable; while pushing it, disconnect
the flexible cable [9] off the connector.
Caution:
When connecting the flexible cable to
the connector, check to make sure that
the metal portion of the cable is free of
iron powder and dust; if found, remove
it.
[9]
Figure 2-724
2-26 R
C.
Original Exposure
System
[1]
[2]
1.
Removing the Scanning Lamp/

Scanning Lamp Heater
magnet catcher [2] and the scanning lamp
cover [3].
[3]
Figure 2-725
[5]

the scanner inside cover [5].
[4]
Figure 2-726
[7]
5) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to where the

scanning lamp cover was removed.
the anti-reflection plate [7].
[6]
Figure 2-727
2-27 R
Caution:
When mounting the anti-reflection plate,
be sure to fit the anti-reflection plate into
the cut-off (front, rear) of the No. 1 mirror base. In addition, be sure that the
connector is fully fitted to the anti-reflection plate.
Cut-off (front)
Cut-off (rear)
Figure 2-728
[9]

the two screws [7]; then, detach the scanning lamp [9] from the electrode plate
(front) [8].
[6]
[7]
[8]
Figure 2-729
2-28 R
8) Remove the scanning lamp [10] (w/ scanning lamp heater) to the front.
9) Remove the scanning lamp heater and the
heater rings (front, rear) from the scanning lamp.
[10]
figure 2-730
2.
Points to Note When Replacing

the Scanning Lamp
If the surface of the scanning lamp is hot,
wait until it has cooled.
Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of
the scanning lamp.
If the surface of the scanning lamp is
soiled, dry wipe it clean.
When mounting the scanning lamp heater
to the scanning lamp, be sure to refer to
the marking (the connector of the scanning lamp heater is toward the front of the
machine).
Whenever handling the scanning lamp,
avoid touching the light window.
When mounting the scanning lamp, be
user that the text/marking is toward the
upper front of the machine.
Marking
Light window
4 mm
(approx.)
Figure 2-731
2-29 R
When mounting the heater ring, be sure it

is about 4 to 8 mm from the light window.
When mounting a new scanning lamp or
when removing and then mounting the existing one, be sure to make the appropriate
adjustments. (p. 12-10, -11)
4 to 8 mm (approx.)
Claw
Light
window
Heater ring
Light window
Claw
4 to 7 mm (approx.)
(front)
(rear)
Figure 2-732
[2]
3.
Removing the Standard White

Plate Cover
1) Remove the right glass retainer
3) Remove the standard white plate small
cover [1] (1 each at front and rear) using a
flat-blade screwdriver [2].
[1]
Figure 2-733
[3]

the standard white plate cover (standard
white plate) [4].
Caution:
When replacing the standard white plate
cover (standard white plate), see p. 4-8.
[4]
Figure 2-734
2-30 R
D.
PCBs
1.
Removing the Light Adjustment

Detection PCB
3) Remove the screw [1], and remove the
three claws [2] while pushing them down.
[1]
[2]
Figure 2-735
4) Disconnect the connector [3] (J2001), and
remove the screw [4]; then, remove the
light adjustment detection PCB [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 2-736
2. Removing the Inverter PCB Unit

1) Remove the reader unit main power supply PCB.
2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and
remove two screws [2]; then, detach the
inverter PCB unit [3].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
Figure 2-737
2-31 R
E.
Fans
[2]
1. Power Supply Cooling Fan

1) Remove the rear upper cover, left upper
cover, and rear cover in the order given.
[3].
[4]
[1]
[2]
Figure 2-738
[2]
[3]
2. Scanner Motor Cooling Fan

the two screws; then, detach the fan [3].
[1]
Figure 2-739
2-32 R
CHAPTER 3
IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
I . Outline
The image processing system of the reader unit consists of a CCD, CCD driver PCB, and
reader controller PCB, and is designed to convert optical images directed by the original exposure
system into electric signals for correction and processing for subsequent output to the controller
unit.
Scanning lamp
No. 2 mirror
(forward)
CCD
No. 1 mirror
Lens
No. 3 mirror
CCD driver
Image processing system

Reader controller
PCB
Reader unit
Controller unit
Figure 3-101
3-1 R
II . CCD/CCD Drive
A.
CCD
The CCD (charge-coupled device) used by the machine consists of three CCD lines having
about 7,500 photocells, each line covered with a particular filter (B, G, R).
Each line is composed of two segments (transfer and output), and the output of an odd-number
light-receiving segment and the output of an even-number light-receiving segment are each generated by output segment A and output segment B, respectively. All in all, the machines CCD is
designed to send out image signals of six channels all at the same time.
Clock pulses A
(front)
(rear)
Transfer
segment A
Light-receiving
segment
Filter
Light-receiving
segment
Transfer segment,
etc.
CCD shift
pulse
Gate
Transfer
segment B
6 5 4 3 2 1
Output
segment B
Clock pulse B
Figure 3-201
B.
Output A
Gate
Figure 3-202
CCD Driver
The image signal generated by the CCD moves through a buffer (low-impedance circuit), and
is sent to the reader controller PCB after its impedance has been reduced.
CCD driver PCB

CCD
B
OSAB
OSBB
OSAG
OSBG
OSAR
OSBR
B-ODD
B-EVEN
Reader controller
PCB
Buffer
Low-impedance
circuit
G-ODD
G-EVEN
R-ODD
R-EVEN
Reference
pulse generation
circuit
Cross pulse, shift pulse
Figure 3-203
3-2 R
III . Image Processing

1.
Outline
The circuit executes the following processing on the output of the CCD:
Odd/even-number bit integration
BGR level matching
A/D conversion circuit
ABC circuit
Shading correction
3-line CCD positioning
The image signals of six channels (separately between odd- and even-numbered bits) are
sample-held by the work of the sample hold signal (SH1 through 4) for extraction of signal components.
Then, to correct the photo conversion efficiency of each CCD line (B, G, R), level matching of
BGR signals is executed according to B, G, and R gain signals and B, G, and R offset signals; the
results are then integrated into image signals of three channels (B, G, R) in keeping with the select
signal (SEL).
The A/D conversion circuit converts B, G, and R image signals into 8-bit digital signals in
keeping with the ADCLK signal.
3-3 R
2.
a.
ABC (auto background control) Circuit

ABC (auto background control) Circuit
The A/D conversion circuit converts B/G/R analog image signals for each scanned line in main
scanning direction into 8-bit digital image signals; it uses a reference voltage for A/D conversion,
and an increase or a decrease made to the reference voltage accordingly increases/decrease the
range (i.e., difference between maximum output level and minimum output level), affecting the
signal level after A/D conversion.
Taking advantage of this fact, the reference voltage is varied to suit the level of the A/D conversion circuit output signal, changing the level of the background density of originals and thereby
adjusting the density of a background so that it is reproduced as a white background (auto background control or ABC).
<original with white background>
<original with colored background>
Original
surface
The range is lowered
to suit the density
of the background.
FFH (white)
A
FFH (white)
B
00H (B)
00H (B)
Figure 3-301 G Image Signal

As shown in the above figure, the height of the range A used for a white background original is
shifted to use the range B of a colored background original, thereby turning a colored background
into a white background.
The ABC circuit is designed to return the image signals after A/D conversion to the ABC
circuit for level evaluation; the result of evaluation is sent to the A/D conversion circuit as a reference voltage (Figure 4-301).
3-4 R
3.
Shading Correction
The output of CCD occurring as a result of detecting the light reflected by an original of perfectly even density is not necessarily even for the following reasons:
The sensitivity of each pixel of the CCD is different from those of the rest.
The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between its ends and middle.
The scanning lamp is subject to deterioration.
Mechanism of Shading Correction
a) The correction target value indicated by means of a bar code at time of shipment is stored
in the machines memory. (The value indicated under the bar code must be entered in
service mode only when the standard white plate is replaced.)
b) The CCD measures the light reflected by the standard while plate, and generates measurement data.
Standard while plate
Bar code
Copyboard glass
Glass
Scanning lamp
CCD
Lens
Figure 3-302
c) The shading correction circuit compares b) measurement data against a) target value in
memory, and stores the resulting ratio as shading correction value.
The shading correction value thus obtained is used to correct the data occurring at time of
scanning originals.
These measurements are taken each time the Start key is pressed.
CCD output
Characteristic
after correction
255
Target value
(TRGT)
Characteristic
before correction
Measurement
value
Original density
0
Black
White
Standard white plate
Figure 3-303
3-5 R
Reference:
1. The color balance of the light area may be adjusted by making the following selections:
ADJUST>COLOR>OFST-Y/M/C/K.
2. The presence of scratches or dirt on the standard white plate will increase shading correction in the area in question, showing up as vertical white lines on copies.
If the problem is not corrected after cleaning the standard while plate, replace the standard white plate.
4.
3-Line CCD Position Matching

The machines CCD consists of three CCD lines, each covered with a R, G, or B filter. The line
image generated by the CCD at a given point in time would have a displacement of about 0.33 mm
(12 lines) in reference to the copyboard glass.
To correct the displacement, the R and G image signals are temporarily stored in line memory,
and are generated after synchronization with the B image signal.
Reference:
The delay of a B image signal will be maximum at 400% enlargement, requiring a delay of 96
lines for the R image signal and a delay of 48 lines for the G image signal.
For instance, in the case of enlargement by 320%, the R image signal must be delayed by an
equivalent of 51.2 lines, and the following correction will be made using the data of its adjacent pixels:
pixel data of the 76.8th line
= 0.2 x (pixel data of the 76th line)
+ 0.8 x (pixel data of the 77th line)
Control circuit
0.3 mm (8 lines)
Original
BGR
Scanning direction
Line memory
R'
Line memory
G'
B
R
G
B
CCD
Figure 3-304
3-6 R
Line memory
Gm
Character
evaluation
(character edge
detection) block
B'
MJ
Figure 3-305
IV . Disassembly/Assembly
The mechanical characteristics and operations of the machine are as described herein; disassemble/assemble the machine as needed while observing the following:
1. Unless otherwise mentioned, assemble parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them.
2. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
3. One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is equipped with a toothed washer to protect
against static charges. Take care not to leave it out.
4. The mounting screw for the grounding wire and varistors is equipped with a toothed washer
to ensure electrical continuity. Take care not to leave it out.
5. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed.
6.
Do NOT throw a toner cartridge into fire. It can explode.
7. If the cartridge must be taken out as part of disassembly/assembly work, be sure to protect it
with a cover regardless of how long it must be kept outside the machine.
8. Before disassembling/assembling or moving the machine, be sure to remove the cartridge
and the intermediate transfer drum.
9. When handling PCBs, be sure to touch a metal area of the machine in advance to be rid of
static charges, thereby preventing damage to the PCBs.
3-7 R
A.
CCD Unit
1.
Removing the Lens Base Cover/

CCD Unit
3) Remove the ten screws [1], and detach
the lens mount cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Figure 3-401

the CCD unit retaining spring [4] and
the cable retaining metal plate [5].
[4]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[3]
Figure 3-402
3-8 R
5) Free the cable clamp [6] from the machine, and disconnect the two connectors [7] (J101, J102); then, detach the
CCD unit [8].
[7]
[8]
[7]
[6]
Figure 3-403
Caution:
Do NOT move the No. 1 mirror base
left/right when the CCD cover is removed, or do not attempt to make a
copy. Otherwise, the leaf spring of the
CCD unit can hit the No. 1 mirror base,
damaging the leaf spring.
3-9 R
B.
PCBs
1.
Removing the Reader Controller

PCB
1) Remove the reader unit front lower
cover.
2) Disconnect the three connectors, and remove the two screws; then, detach the
original scanner motor driver PCB. (See
p. 2-19R.)
3) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the four connectors [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-404
4)
5)
6)
7)
Remove the right glass retaining cover.

Remove the copyboard glass.
Remove the lens mount cover.
Remove the two screws [3], and disconnect the three connectors [4].
[3]
[4]
[4]
Figure 3-405
3-10 R
8) Remove the DADF, reader unit rear upper cover, left upper cover, and rear
cover.
9) Remove the seven screws [5].
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
Figure 3-406
10) Slide out the electrical unit [6] toward
the rear of the machine to detach.
[6]
Figure 3-407
3-11 R
Caution:
While sliding out the electrical unit, you
may hear some noise caused by contact
with plastic film. This is a normal condition.
Take care, however, not to displace the
cable and connectors at the front of the
machine when sliding the electrical unit
into the machine.
Figure 3-408
11) Remove the seven screws [7], and detach the electrical unit cover [8].
[7]
[8]
[7]
[7]
Figure 3-409
12) Disconnect the even connectors [9], and
remove the six screws [10]; then, detach
the reader controller PCB.
[10]
[10]
[9]
[10]
[9]
[10]
Figure 3-410
3-12 R
V . Upgrading
A.
Replacing the DIMM on

the Reader Controller
PCB
1.
Removing the ROM DIMM (on the

reader controller PCB)
2) Remove the original scanner motor
driver PCB.
the ROM DIMM cover [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-501
4) While spreading the claws [3] of the
slot, lift the ROM DIMM to detach.
[3]
Figure 3-502
3-13 R
Figure 3-503
3-14 R
2.
Mounting the ROM DIMM (on the

reader controller PCB)
1) Insert the ROM DIMM into the slot
while holding it at an angle.
Figure 3-504
Figure 3-505
2) Shift down the ROM DIMM.
Shift downward in the direction of
the arrow until a click is heard.
Caution:
Be sure not to force down the ROM
DIMM. It can break.
Figure 3-506
3-15 R
PRINTER
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
I.
A.
B.
C.
II.
A.
BASIC OPERATION .................... 1-1P

Functions ....................................... 1-1P
Basic Operation Sequences ........... 1-2P
Power On Sequences ..................... 1-3P
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ... 1-4P
DC Controller Circuit .................... 1-4P
1.
2.
3.
Outline ...................................... 1-4P

Explanation of operations of
each block ............................... 1-4P
DC Controller Input/Output
Signals ..................................... 1-5P
CHAPTER 2 LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM

I.
LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM ..... 2-1P

A. Outline ........................................... 2-1P
B. Laser Control Circuit..................... 2-2P
1.
Outline ...................................... 2-2P
2. Automatic power control of
laser diode............................... 2-3P
3. Horizontal synchronization
control ..................................... 2-3P
4. Laser diode emission control 2-3P

C. Scanning System ......................... 2-5P
II. Disassembly/Assembly .............. 2-6P
A. Laser/Scanner Unit ..................... 2-6P
1. Laser/Scanner Unit................. 2-6P
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I.
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM . 3-1P

Outline ........................................... 3-1P
Printing Process ............................. 3-3P
Electrostatic latent image
formation stage ......................... 3-3P
Developing stage ....................... 3-3P
Transfer stage ............................ 3-3P
Fixing stage ............................... 3-3P
Drum cleaning stage ................. 3-4P
C.
1.
2.
II.
A.
B.
1.
High-Voltage Power Supply .......... 3-5P

Outline ...................................... 3-6P
Principle of operation ............... 3-6P
Disassembly/Assembly ................. 3-8P
Transfer Charging Roller............... 3-8P
High-Voltage Power Supply PCB . 3-8P
High-Voltage Power
Supply PCB ............................. 3-8P
P1
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM

I.
A.
B.
1.
2.
C.
II.
A.
B.
C.
D.
III.
A.
1.
B.
1.
2.
IV.
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.
PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM ........... 4-1P

Outline ........................................... 4-1P
Paper Pick-up ................................ 4-4P
Pick-up operation ...................... 4-4P
Manual feed
(multi-purpose tray) ............. 4-15P
Delivery Unit............................. 4-16P
Duplexing Unit ......................... 4-18P
Outline ....................................... 4-18P
Reversing Movement ............... 4-21P
Adjusting the Horizontal
Registration ............................... 4-22P
Re-Pickup .................................. 4-23P
Envelope Feeder ....................... 4-24P
Outline ....................................... 4-24P
Inputs to and Outputs from the
Envelope Feeder Driver .......... 4-25P
Pickup/Feeding System ............... 4-26P
Pickup/Feeding Operations..... 4-26P
Preventing Double Feeding .... 4-28P
Paper Jam Detection .................... 4-29P
Outline ......................................... 4-29P
Pick-up delay jam 1 ................ 4-30P
Pick-up delay jam 2 ................ 4-30P
Fixing unit delivery delay jam 4-30P
Fixing unit delivery stationary
jam .......................................... 4-30P
Face-down delivery delay jam 4-30P
Face-down delivery stationary
jam .......................................... 4-30P
Residual paper jam ................. 4-30P
Dupelxing Unit ............................ 4-31P
Reversing Assembly Delay
Jam ......................................... 4-31P
C. Envelope Feeder ....................... 4-32P

1. Detecting a Jam .................... 4-32P
2. Reversing Assembly
Stationary Jam ...................... 4-32P
V. Disassembly/Assembly ............ 4-33P
A. Drive Unit .................................. 4-33P
B. Pickup Unit ................................ 4-35P
1. Pickup Unit ........................... 4-36P
2. Pickup, Feed, and Separation
Rollers ..................................... 4-36P
3.
Pickup Motor .......................... 4-37P
4.
Feed Clutch ............................. 4-37P
5.
Cassette Pickup Solenoid........ 4-38P
6.
Pickup PCB ............................. 4-38P
7.
Pickup Unit Paper Sensor ....... 4-38P
8.
Pickup Unit Door Sensor ........ 4-39P
C. Multifeeder Tray Pickup Unit ..... 4-40P
1.
Multifeeder Tray Pickup Unit . 4-40P
2. Multifeeder Tray Pickup
Roller ..................................... 4-41P
3. Separation Pad ...................... 4-42P
Clutch .................................... 4-42P
5. Copyboard Cover Solenoid . 4-42P
6. Multifeeder Tray PCB .......... 4-43P
D. Registration Roller Unit ........... 4-44P
1. Registration Roller Unit ...... 4-44P
2. Registration Lower roller .... 4-44P
E. Feed Unit ................................... 4-46P
1. Feed Unit ............................... 4-46P
F. Delivery Unit............................. 4-47P
1. Delivery Unit ........................ 4-47P
2. Face-Up Solenoid Unit ........ 4-48P
CHAPTER 5 FIXING CONTROL

I.
1.
2.
P2
Fixing Control ............................... 5-1P

Fixing temperature control ....... 5-1P
Protective function .................... 5-4P
3.
4.
Fixing unit failure detection ..... 5-4P

Envelope position lever
function ................................... 5-5P
CONTENTS
II. Disassembly/Assembly .............. 5-6P
A. Fixing Unit .................................. 5-6P
1. Fixing Unit .............................. 5-6P
2. Fixing Roller Heater .............. 5-7P
3. Fixing Upper Roller ............... 5-8P
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fixing Lower Roller ............. 5-12P

Cleaning Roller .................... 5-12P
Thermal Switch ..................... 5-12P
Thermistor............................. 5-13P
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I.
A.
II.
A.
B.
III.
A.
B.
IV.
A.
B.
V.
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
D.
E.
1.
2.
VI.
A.
1.
2.
B.
C.
VII.
Control Panel ................................. 6-1P

Outline ........................................... 6-1P
Upgrading ...................................... 6-2P
Outline ........................................... 6-2P
Downloading ................................. 6-3P
Counters ........................................ 6-4P
Outline ........................................... 6-4P
Incrementing the Count ................. 6-5P
Fans................................................ 6-6P
Arrangement, Functions, and
Error Codes ................................. 6-6P
Sequence of Operations ............. 6-7P
Power Supply .............................. 6-9P
Outline ......................................... 6-9P
Sequence of Operations ........... 6-11P
Outline ................................... 6-11P
Power Supply at Main Power
Switch ON .............................. 6-12P
Power Supply at Main Power
Switch ON/Control Panel
Switch OFF ............................. 6-13P
Printer unit DC Power
Supply PCB ........................... 6-14P
Rated Outputs of the Controller
Unit DC Power Supply PCB ..... 6-15P
Protective Mechanisms ............ 6-15P
Backup Battery ......................... 6-16P
System Controller PCB ........ 6-16P
SRAM Board ......................... 6-16P
Others ......................................... 6-17P
Sleep Mode ................................ 6-17P
Outline ................................... 6-17P
Operations............................. 6-18P
Silent Mode ............................... 6-21P
Power Save Mode ..................... 6-21P
Disassembly/Assembly ............ 6-22P
A. External Covers ........................ 6-22P

1. Removing the Face-Down
Tray ........................................ 6-23P
2. Front Cover ........................... 6-23P
3. Removing the Upper Cover
Unit ........................................ 6-25P
4. Rear Cover ............................ 6-26P
5. Removing the Delivery
Cover Unit ............................. 6-27P
6. Removing the Multifeeder
Tray ........................................ 6-27P
7. Removing the Right Cover
Unit ........................................ 6-28P
8. Removing the Left Rear
Cover ..................................... 6-29P
9. Removing the Left Lower
Cover ..................................... 6-30P
B. Control Panel............................. 6-31P
C. LCD Unit .................................... 6-33P
D. Motors/Fans .............................. 6-36P
1. Main Motor ........................... 6-36P
2. Fixing/Laser Scanner
Unit Fan ................................. 6-36P
3. Removing the Power
Supply Fan ............................ 6-38P
4. Removing the Controller
Unit Fan ................................. 6-38P
5. Fixing Unit Fan ..................... 6-39P
Unit Fan ................................. 6-39P
E. PCBs ........................................... 6-40P
1. DC Controller PCB ............... 6-40P
2. Switch/Sensor PCB............... 6-40P
3. Cassette Paper Size Detection
PCB (upper, lower) ............... 6-42P
4. Power Supply Unit ............... 6-43P
P3
CHAPTER 1
OPERATION
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
I . BASIC OPERATION
A.
Functions
Printer functions can be divided into four groups: the engine control system, the laser/scanner
unit, the image formation system, the paper pick-up/feed system.
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
OVERALL CONTROL SYSTEM

(Controller)
Image Processor PCB

DC controller PCB
Face-down tray
High-voltage
power supply
LASER/SCANNER UNIT
Low-voltage
power supply
Scanning mirror
Laser diode
BD circuit
Envelope feeder (accessory)
Scanner
motor
Cleaning
unit
Finisher
(accessory)
Fixing
unit
Envelope feeder
pick-up unit
Primary
charging
roller
Developing unit
Photosensitive
drum
Transfer
charging
roller
Pick-up
control unit
IMAGE
FORMATION
SYSTEM
Duplexing unit (accessory)
Multi-purpose tray
Paper Deck
(accessory)
Upper cassette
Lower cassette
PAPER PICK-UP/FEED
SYSTEM
Figure 1-101
1-1 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
B.
Basic Operation Sequences
Operation sequences of the printer are controlled by the microcomputer on the DC controller
PCB. Descriptions of each period from ON until the main motor stops are as shown below. See the
appendix for timing chart.
Purpose
Period
WAIT
(WAIT
period)
From power-ON until the fixing

roller temperature reaches 170C .
(Less than 90 sec.)
STBY
From the end of the WAIT period
(STANDBY) until a /PRNT signal is input from
the Image processor, or from the
end of the LSTR period until a
/PRNT signal is input from the
video controller or until the power
is switched OFF.
Remark
Warms up the fixing rollers to

put the printer in the standby
mode. Cleans the transfer
charging roller.
During this period, the

printer checks if the cartridge is installed and if
there is toner in it.
Maintains the printing

temperature of the fixing roller
so that the printer is ready to
print.
If the printer stays in the

standby mode for longer
than five hours, it drives
the main motor for one
second to rotate the
fixing roller, to prevent it
from deforming.
INTR
(INITIAL
ROTATIONS
period)
After the /PRNT signal has been

input from the Image processor
until the scanner motor becomes
ready (about 7 seconds).
To stabilize the sensitivity of

the drum in preparation for
printing and to clean the
transfer charging roller.
PRINT
(Print)
From the end of the INTR period

until the primary DC voltage
switches OFF.
To form an image on the

photosensitive drum according
to the VDO and /VDO signals
input from the Image processor
and to transfer the image to
paper.
During this period, the

printer maintains the
printing temperature of
the fixing rollers.
To deliver the final page and

to clean the transfer charging
roller.
If a /PRNT signal is input

from the video controller,
the INITIAL
ROTATIONS period
begins immediately.
After the primary DC voltage turns

LSTR
OFF until the main motor stops.
(LAST
ROTATIONS
period)
Table 1-101
1-2 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
C.
Power On Sequences
Sequences of the printer from power ON until it enters the standby mode are as shown below.
Power ON
CPU initialization
/PPRDY signal output
Fixing heater ON
Duplexing unit
connection
NO
Duplexing unit
initialization
Main motor, scanner motor, pick-up roller, registration

roller, primary AC, transfer negative bias ON
Development AC bias ON (Checks if
the cartridge is installed and if there is
toner in it)
Has fixing temperature

reached 145C?
NO

Has fixing temperature

reached 170C?
During this period, checks if there is

residual paper in the printer. If automatic
paper delivery is required as a result of
the check, residual paper is delivered
automatically.
NO

Standby
Figure 1-102
1-3 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
II . ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

A.
DC Controller Circuit
1.
Outline
Operation sequences of the printer are controlled by the CPU of this circuit. When DC power
is supplied from the power supply by turning ON the power switch of the printer and the printer
enters the standby mode, the CPU outputs the signals that drive the loads such as laser diode,
motors, and solenoids, based on the print start command and image data.
2.
a.
Explanation of operations of each block

CPU (IC201)
An 8-bit single chip microcomputer (UPD78056) by NEC is used.
The CPU is a one-chip type in which ROM and RAM are built in, and controls the operation of
the engine according to the control program stored in the ROM.
b. Gate array (IC202)
Its functions are to:
1) control the laser/scanner,
2) control the video interface,
3) communicate with the envelope feeder,
4) communicate with the printer driver tester, and
5) operate as the expansion I/O.
DC controller
Serial line
IC 202
Gate array
Envelope feeder
(accessory)
I/O
Bus
Serial line
Serial line
IC 201
CPU
Duplex unit
(accessory)
I/O
Figure 1-201
1-4 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
3.
DC Controller Input/Output Signals

DC controller PCB
Registration
paper
sensor
PS1
J11-3
-1
-2
J15-3
-1
-2
J14-1
-3
-2
J209-5
-3
-4
P5VB1
/REGS
"L" when the sensor detects paper.
Pick-up PCB
Pick-up unit
paper sensor
Paper pick-up
unit door
sensor
PS2
PS3
J13-3 J1205-1 P5VB1

-2
-2 GND
-1
-3 /FEEDS
J14-3 J1206-1 P5VB1
-2
-2 GND
-1
-3 /RDOORS
J1201-4 J219-18
-14
-8
-6
-16
-12
-10
-16
-6
-10
-12
P5VB1
/FEEDS
"L" when the sensor detects paper.
/RDOORS "H" when the pick-up unit door

is open.
PS1201
Lower cassette
sensor
LDECKC
"H" when the sensor detects

the lower cassette.
UDECKC
"H" when the sensor detects

the upper cassette.
PS1202
Upper cassette
sensor
Lower cassette
paper-level
sensor 1
Lower cassette
paper-level
sensor 2
Upper cassette
paper-level
sensor 1
Upper cassette
paper-level
sensor 2
Lower cassette
paper-out
sensor
Upper cassette
paper-out
sensor
PS1203
LPVS2
PS1204
-7
-13
-8
-14
LPVS1
These sensors detect the

amount of paper remaining in the
lower cassette.
PS1205
UPVS2
PS1206
-5
-15
-9
-11
-15
-5
UPVS1
These sensors detect the

amount of paper remaining in the
upper cassette.
PS1207
/LDECKS
"L" when there is paper in

the lower cassette.
PS1208
/UDECKS "L" when there is paper in
the upper cassette.
Multi-purpose tray PCB

Multi-purpose
tray paper
sensor
PS1301
J1301-7 J214-7
/MPTPS
"L" when there is paper on

the multi-purpose tray.
MPTLS
P5VB1
"H" when the lifting plate has risen.
PS1302
Lifting plate
position sensor
-6
-3
-6
-3
Figure 1-202
1-5 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
DC controller PCB
Switch/sensor PCB
PS1401
Face-down
tray paper
full sensor
J1401-10 J205-7
FDFULS
"H" when the face-down tray

is fully loaded with paper.
FDOUTS
"H" when the sensor detects paper.
FPOUTS
+24VB
"H" when the sensor detects paper.
PS1402
Face-down
tray delivery
sensor
-12
-9
-11
-8
PS1403
Fixing unit
delivery sensor
-1 J221-1
-2
-2
-4
-3
SW1401
+24VA
-5 J205-3
-7
-4
-8
-5
-9
-6
Door switch
Tonner cartridge
Toner
sensor
ANTIN
UDOORS "H" when either the upper

or delivery cover is open.
High-voltage
power supply PCB
TB705
J701-A10 J220-A10
TONSNS
Detects no cartridge installed

and toner out.
Cassette paper-size sensing switch PCB
Lower cassette
paper-size
sensing switch
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
J1601A-1 J215-5
-2
-4
-3
-3
-4
-2
-5
-1
LSIZE1
LSIZE2
LSIZE3
LSIZE4
Detects the lower cassette

paper-size.
USIZE1
USIZE2
USIZE3
USIZE4
Detects the upper cassette

paper-size.
Cassette paper-size sensing switch PCB
Upper cassette
paper-size
sensing switch
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
J1601B-1J215-10
-2
-9
-3
-8
-4
-7
-5
-6
Figure 1-203
1-6 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
DC controller PCB
Laser/scanner unit
Laser diode
J10018 -10 -1
-2 -5 -3
-4/-7/-9
J202-4 -2 11 -10 -7 9 -3/-5/-8
+5V
DRVES
/LENBL
/LON
VDO
/VDO
Laser driver
J6-3/-4
BD PCB
Scanner
motor
High-voltage
power
supply PCB
MT1
Main motor
Analog signal in proportion to the laser

intensity is input.
"L" to switch the laser ON according to the
VDO and /VDO signals.
"L" to turn the laser ON compulsively.
The laser is turned ON only when the
/LENBL, VDO, and /VDO are "L", "H", and
"L" respectively. (LOW-VOLTAGE
DIFFERENTIAL signal)
J206-1/-2
-2
-3
-1
-4
-1
-7
-6
-5
-3
-2/-4
J1-1
-7
-6
-5
-3
-2/-4
J701
-A12/-B12
-A1
-B1
-A2
-B2
-A3
-B3
-A4
-B4
-A6
-A7
-B7
-A8
-B8
-A9
-B9
-B10
-A11/-B11
J18
-1
-7
-6
-5
-3
-2/-4
J207-7
-1
-2
-3
-5
-4/-6
J220
-A12/-B12
-A1
-B1
-A2
-B2
-A3
-B3
-A4
-B4
-A6
-A7
-B7
-A8
-B8
-A9
-B9
-B10
-A11/-B11
/BDI
+5V
BD input signal (pulse)
+24VA
+5V
/SCNRDY
/SCND
SCNCLK
"L" when the scanner motor reaches

the prescribed speed.
"L" to drive the scanner motor.
Scanner motor reference clock signal.
+24VB
TRFVCNT Transfer bias drive signal
/TRFNVD Transfer negative bias drive signal
TRFVSNS Transfer bias monitor signal
/HRLBD
Fixing roller bias drive signal
/TRFCCD Transfer bias constant current drive signal
/DCHGBD Discharge bias drive signal
/TRFCLK Transfer bias frequency output signal
/DCHGUP Discharge bias switch signal
HVTCLK
High voltage bias frequency output signal
/DEVACD Developing AC bias drive signal
PRIACCLK Primary AC bias frequency output signal
DEVACCLK Developing AC bias frequency output signal
/PRIACD
Primary AC bias drive signal
/DEVDCD Developing DC bias drive signal
/PRIDCD Primary DC bias drive signal
DENADJ
Image density adjustment signal
J12-1
J218-1
/MMRDY
"L" when the main motor runs normally.
-2
-3/-4
-2
-3/-4
/MMOTD
"L" to run the main motor.
+24VB
-5/-6
-5/-6
Figure 1-204
1-7 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
DC controller PCB
Fixing unit/
Scanner unit
fan
Power supply
fan
Electrical
unit fan
Fixing unit fan
Multi-purpose
tray fan
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4
FAN5
J208-1
-2
-3
FAN1D
/FAN1S
"H" to rotate at high speed, "L"

to rotate at low speed.
"L" when the exhaust fan runs
normally.
J216-1
-2
-3
FAN2D
/FAN2S

normally.
J13-1
-2
-3
J12-3
-2
-1
J210-1
-2
-3
FAN3D
/FAN3S

normally.
J26-1
-2
-3
J25-3
-2
-1
J225-1
-2
-3
FAN4D
/FAN4S

"L" when the suction fan runs
normally.
J35-1
-2
-3
J34-3
-2
-1
J229-1
-2
-3
FAN5D
/FAN5S

normally.
+24VA
Registration
clutch
CL1
J17-2
-1
J16-1
-2
J209-2
-1
/REGCLD
"L" to run the registration roller.
FEDAD
FEDAND
FEDBD
FEDBND
Pick-up motor rotation

control signal
Pick-up PCB
Paper pick-up
motor
SMT1
J1202-1
-2
-3
-4
J1201-20 J219-2
-19
-1
-18
-4
-17
-3
+24VA
Cassette feed
solenoid
SL1
J1203-2
-1
-11
-9
Feed clutch
CL2
J1204-2
-1
-13
-7
/PUPSLD
"L" to lower the arm.
/FEEDCLD "L" to turn the feed roller.
Figure 1-205
1-8 P
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION
DC controller PCB

Lifting plate
solenoid
SL2
J1302-2
-1
Manual feed
clutch
CL3
J1303-2
-1
+24VA
J1301-2 J214-2
-5
-5
-4
/MPTSLD "L" to drive the lifting plate. If the

plate is up it will drop, if down it
will rise.
-4
/MTPCLD "L" to rotate the manual

feeding pick-up roller.
Switch/sensor PCB
+24VA
Face-up
solenoid
J1402-2
-1
SL3
J1401-13 J205-10
Power
supply
AC power
Power
switch
S101
Fixing unit
J10-1
FSRN1
-4
FSRL1
-3
FSRL2
-2
FSRN2
J50-3
J50-5
J50-6
J50-4
J53
J55
Relay
H2
Fixing sub heater
J52
J54
RY152
Thermo-switch
TSW
J56-2
-1
"L" to deliver printed paper face up.
RLD
"L" to turn OFF the relay and interrupt

the power to the fixing heater.
The main heater is turned ON when
the FSRDE signal is output and this
signal is "L."
The sub heater is turned ON when
the FSRDE signal is output and this
signal is "L."
Fixing heater drive enable signal
(pulse signal)
"L" when the current transformer
detects the power to the fixing heater.
Inverter circuit control signal.
-6
-6
/FSRD1
-7
-7
/FSRD2
-8
-8
FSRDE
-9
-9
FSRCT
-10
-10
SUPSLT
-11
-11
/RLDSNS "L" when the relay is turned ON.
-12
-12
PSTYP
-13
-13
/REMT24
-1
-3
-5
-1
-3
-5
-4
-4
"L" when the line voltage is 200V

(for 200V model only)
When "L", the power supply unit
outputs 24V to the DC controller.
RY151
H1
Fixing main heater
Fixing roller
surface
temperature
sensor
TH
J102-2 J217-2
/FUSLD
J50B6 -3
J2221 -4
TSWOUT
TSWIN
J51-2 J50B-5
-4
-1
J222-2
-3
FSRTH
The voltage drops as the

fixing roller temperature
rises.
Figure 1-206
1-9 P
CHAPTER 2
LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM
I . LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM
A.
Outline
Controller
External device
Image processor PCB

/BD
/VSYNC
/VDO
VDO
DC controller
/VDO VDO /LENBL /LON
DRVES
/SCND
/SCNRDY
/BDI
Cylindrical lens
Laser driver
Scanner motor
BD mirror
Scanning mirror
Mirror
Focusing lens
BD PCB
Photosensitive drum
Figure 2-101
The DC controller PCB receives the VIDEO signals (/VDO, VDO) from the Image processor
PCB and sends then to the laser driver in the laser/scanner unit.
The laser driver turns the laser diode ON and OFF according to the video signal (/VDO,
VDO) and generates the modulated laser beam only when the VIDEO ENABLE signal (/LENBL)
from the DC controller is L.
The modulated laser beam is aligned by a collimator lens and a cylindrical lens into a parallel
beam which strikes the scanning mirror that is rotating at a specified speed.
The beam reflected from the scanning mirror is brought to a point of focus on the photosensitive drum with the focusing lens and the mirror located in front of the scanning mirror.
As the scanning mirror rotates at a specified speed, the beam is scanned across the drum at a
specified speed.
The drum also rotates at a specified speed and the laser beam successively scans across its
surface. Thus the laser beam builds up an image on the drum surface.
2-1 P
B.
1.
Laser Control Circuit

Outline
DC controller PCB
Laser driver PCB

PD
(Photo diode)
IC201 CPU
J201-C6
/PRNT 66
P05/
INTPS
P14/ 80
AN14
LD
(Laser diode)
J202
J1001
DRVES
-2
-10
+5V
J202-4
IC202
NLON
NENBL
J1001-8
49
-10
/LON
-2
48
-11
/LENBL
-1
-9
/VDO
-3
-7
VDO
-5
VCC
Drive IC
Logic IC
/VDOUT
G.A.
Receiver
Power
adjustment
circuit
-5/-8
-4/-7
Analog
adder
circuit
GND
Laser driver IC
NBDI
-C2
/VDO
-C1
VDO
56
J206
-3
/BDI
J6-2
BD PCB
Figure 2-102
This circuit switches ON and OFF the laser diode (LD) with a constant intensity in response to
the video signals (/VDO, VDO) sent from the Image processor PCB.
The /VDO and VDO signals are converted into the low voltage differential signals to suppress radiation noise from the Image processor PCB and sent to the DC controller PCB, and then
sent to the receiver in the laser driver circuit. The receiver demodulates the low voltage differential
signals and transmits it as a VIDEO OUT signal (/VDOUT) to the logic circuit in the laser driver
IC.
If the VIDEO ENABLE signal (/LENBL) from the microprocessor (CPU: IC201) is L, the
laser driver circuit turns the laser diode ON and OFF according to the /VDOUT signal.
The CPU monitors the LASER FAILURE DETECTION signal (DRVES) sent from the laser
driver PCB to check whether the laser diode is generating laser normally or not.
The CPU emits laser forcibly when the /BDI signal is not input for 0.7 continuous seconds
from the BD PCB while the scanner motor runs at the specified speed, and notifies the Image
processor of the BD failure when the DRVES signal is 3.805V or less and the laser failure when it
exceeds 3.805V.
2-2 P
2.
Automatic power control of laser diode

The laser driver IC controls the automatic power control (APC) of the laser diode so that the
laser diode emits a beam of constant intensity.
When the FORCED LASER ON signal (/LON) becomes L, or the VIDEO ENABLE signal (/ENBL) and /VDOUT signal become L, the laser diode emits light according to the standard
voltage of the laser driver PCB. The photo diode in the laser diode detects the beam intensity and
feeds back the corresponding current value to the control amplification circuit. It is then compared
with the current value set in the power adjustment circuit, and the intensity of the current to the
laser diode is controlled.
The printer uses the APC method that conducts the beam intensity detection and control for
each dot while the laser driver is emitting laser.
While in the conventional method, the beam
intensity was measured by emitting laser for a certain period of time between pages or during
unblinking, this method controls the laser output, detecting the intensity of the laser which is actually forming an image. Therefore, the APC of this printer has higher reliability of control over the
conventional APC.
3.
Horizontal synchronization control

The CPU generates an UNBLANKING signal inside the IC201 based on the BD input signal (/
BDI) sent from the BD PCB of the laser/scanner unit.
IC201 sets the FORCED LASER ON signal (/LON) to L during unblanking period. The
laser driver turns the laser diode ON when the /LON signal is L.
The laser beam turned ON by the /LON signal is reflected at the small fixed BD mirror
located in the light path where the laser beam scanning starts, and is input to the BD PCB in the
laser/scanner unit.
The BD PCB detects the laser beam, generates a BD INPUT signal (/BDI), and sends it to the
CPU. The CPU generates a BEAM DETECTION signal (/BD) according to the /BDI signal and
sends it to the video controller PCB.
4.
Laser diode emission control

Based on the paper size data, the CPU generates a VIDEO ENABLE signal (/LENBL) and
sends it to the logic circuit of the laser driver IC. The /VDOUT signal is masked by the /LENBL
signal in the logic circuit, which controls the emission period of the laser diode.
The paper size data is supplied to the CPU by the cassette paper size switches for cassette
pick-up and by the paper size specification command from the Image processor PCB for multipurpose tray pick-up.
The CPU generates the IMAGE TOP ERASE AND BOTTOM ERASE signal (TOPE) and
HORIZONTAL IMAGE MASK signal (MSK) according to the paper size data. (TOPE and MSK
are used inside the CPU and are not output externally.)
To prevent the laser beam from writing on non-image area during the non-unblanking period,
the CPU sets the VIDEO ENABLE signal (/LENBL) to L only when the TOPE and MSK signals
are L. The laser driver turns the laser diode ON when the /LENBL signal and /VDOUT signal
are L.
2-3 P
TOPE
/BD
T1
2 mm
T2
2 mm
MSK
/VSYNC
3 mm
3 mm
Figure 2-103
Notes:
1. The shaded area indicates the area where the laser beam writes on the drum.
2. T1 and T2 vary according to the paper size. If no paper size is specified by the paper size
specification command from the Image processor during manual feed, the printer does
not recognize the paper width. So the T1 and T2 values are assumed to be UNIVERSAL
size (297.0mm x 635.0mm), the maximum paper width for this printer.
3. The CPU determines the actual size of the paper being fed by detecting the time from the
leading edge of the paper passes through the registration paper sensor (PS1) until its
trailing edge clears the sensor. The image is then masked according to the detected paper
size.
2-4 P
C.
Scanning System
Figure below shows the scanner motor control circuit.
DC controller PCB
+5V
J207-7
IC201
(CPU)
-1
+5V
XT1/P07
Scanner motor
+24VA
-2
73
/SCNRDY
J18
-1
J1-1
-7
-7
-6
-6
M1
+5V
IC202
(G.A.)
DB22
SCNCLK
X1AO
-3
/SCND
-5
-5
54
-5
/SCNCLK
-3
-3
70
-4
GND
-4
-4
-6
24VGND
-2
-2
52
X202
X1AI
71
Figure 2-104
The scanner motor is a three-phase, eight-pole DC brushless motor with a HALL element. It
forms a unit with the scanner driver, which controls the scanner motor rotation at a constant speed.
When the printer is turned ON, the oscillation frequency of the crystal oscillator (X202) is
divided by the gate array (IC202), and the /SCNCLK signal is sent to the scanner driver.
When the /PRNT signal sent to the CPU (IC201) on the DC controller becomes L, the CPU
sets the /SCND signal to L through the gate array. When it goes L, the scanner driver rotates
the scanner motor using the SCNCLK signal. When the scanner motor reaches its prescribed
speed, the scanner driver sets the SCANNER MOTOR READY signal (/SCNRDY) signal to L.
The CPU on the DC controller PCB monitors the /SCNRDY signal to make sure that the
scanner motor runs at the correct speed.
The CPU notifies the video controller of a scanner failure in the following cases:
a. When the /SCNRDY signal does not become L within 30 seconds after the scanner motor
starts rotation.
b. When the /SCNRDY signal goes H for 1.5 continuous seconds after going L.
2-5 P
II . Disassembly/
Assembly
A.
Laser/Scanner Unit
[1]
1. Laser/Scanner Unit
1) Remove the upper cover unit.
2) Disconnect the three connectors [1]
from the laser/scanner unit.
Figure 2-201

the laser/scanner unit [3].
[2]
Caution:
Do not disassemble the laser/scanner
unit. (Adjustments during assembly cannot be made in the field.)
[3]
Figure 2-202
2-6 P
CHAPTER 3
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I . IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

A.
Outline
The image formation system is the central hub of the printer, and consists of the photosensitive
drum, developing unit and charging roller etc.
When the PRINT signal (/PRNT) is sent from the Image processor to the DC controller, the
DC controller drives the main motor to rotate the photosensitive drum with the laser diode, developing cylinder, primary charging roller, and transfer charging roller.
The primary charging roller uniformly applies a negative charge on the surface of the photosensitive drum. To form a latent image on the photosensitive drum, the laser beam modulated by
the VIDEO signals (VDO, /VDO) is exposed to the photosensitive drum surface.
The latent image formed on the photosensitive drum is changed to a visible image by the
toner on the developing cylinder then transferred onto paper by the transfer charging roller. Residual toner on the photosensitive drum surface is scraped off by the cleaning blade. The potential
on the drum is made uniform by the primary charging roller in preparation for the next latent image.
The cartridge has a toner sensor that detects whether there is enough toner remaining and
whether the cartridge is installed.
If the toner in the cartridge becomes lower than the prescribed level or there is no cartridge
installed in the printer, the high-voltage power supply notifies the DC controller through the
TONER LEVEL signal.
3-1 P
Laser beam
Cartridge

Blade
Developing cylinder
Cleaning blade
Manual feeding pick-up roller
Upper fixing roller
Photosensitive
drum
Lower fixing roller
Transfer charging
roller
Static charge
eliminator
Upper cassette
pick-up roller
Lower cassette
pick-up roller
/PRNT
Image
Processor
PCB
VDO
/VDO
DC
controller
PCB
Transfer bias drive signal (TRFVCNT)

Transfer negative bias drive signal (/TRFNVD)
Transfer bias monitor signal (TRFVSNS)
Fixing roller bias drive signal (/HRLBD)
Transfer bias constant current drive signal (/TRFCCD)
Discharge bias drive signal (/DCHGBD)
Transfer bias frequency output signal (/TRFCLK)
Discharge bias switch signal (/DCHGUP)
High voltage bias frequency output signal (HVTCLK)
Developing AC bias drive signal (/DEVACD)
Primary AC bias frequency output signal (PR1ACCLK)
Highvoltage
power
supply
Developing AC bias frequency output signal (DEVACCLK)
Primary AC bias drive signal (/PR1ACD)

Developing DC bias drive signal (/DEVDCD)
Primary DC bias drive signal (/PR1DCD)
Image density adjustment signal (DENADJ)
Figure 3-101
3-2 P
B.
Printing Process
A major portion of the image formation system is contained with a cartridge as shown in Figure
2-4-2.
Laser beam
Cartridge
Blade
Cleaning blade
Developing
cylinder
Photosensitive drum

Static charge
eliminator
Figure 3-102
The printing process can be divided into five major stages.

1. Electrostatic latent image formation stage
Step 1 Primary charge (-)
Step 2 Scanning exposure
2. Developing stage
Step 3 Development
3. Transfer stage
Step 4 Transfer (+)
Step 5 Separation
4. Fixing stage
Step 6 Fixing
Step 7 Fixing roller cleaning
3-3 P
5.
Drum cleaning stage
Step 8 Drum cleaning

Electrostatic latent
image formation stage
Paper path
Direction of drum rotation
2. Scanning exposure
1. Primary charge
3. Development
Drum cleaning stage
8. Drum cleaning
Fixing stage
Print delivery
7. Fixing rollre cleaning
Developing stage
5. Separation
4. Transfer
Registration
Multi-purpose tray feed
6. Fixing
Transfer stage
Cassette feed
Figure 3-103
3-4 P
C.
High-Voltage Power Supply
J701-B7
PR1ACCLK
J701-B8
/PR1ACD
[T701]
Primary AC
PR1
Transformer
AC Transformer
Drive Circuit
AC Current
detection Circuit
J701-B9
J701-A6
J701-B10
/PR1DCD
HVTCLK
[T702]
Primary DC
Transformer
AC Transformer
Drive Circuit
DENADJ
TB701
To primary
charging roller
Image Density
Adjustment Circuit
[T704]
J701-A9
J701-A7
J701-A8
J701-A10
J701-A3
J701-A1
J701-A4
J701-A2
J701-B1
J701-B2
J701-B3
J701-B4
/DEVDCD
J701-A11
J701-B11
Developing DC
Transformer
[T703]
/DEVACD
Developing AC DEV
Transformer
AC Transformer
Drive Circuit
DEVACCLK
TONSNS
Toner detection
Circuit
/TRFCCD
Transfer Constant Current

Control Circuit
TRFVCNT
TRFCLK
/TRFNVD
/HRLBD
/DCHGBD
/DCHGUP
+24VB
GND
GND
TB702
To developing
cylinder
TONAN TB703
From toner
sensor
[T705]
Transfer
Positive Voltage
Transformer
Transfer Positive Voltage

Transformer Drive Circuit
To transfer
charging roller
Transfer Positive
Voltage Sense Circuit
TRFVSNS
J701-A12 +24VB
J701-B12
DC Transformer
Drive Circuit
[T706]
Transfer Negative
Voltage Transformer
Drive Circuit
Transfer Negative
Voltage Transformer
Upper Fixing Roller

Voltage Transformer
Drive Circuit
[T707]
Upper Fixing
Roller Voltage
Transformer
Discharge Voltage
Transformer Drive
Circuit
[T708]
Discharge
Voltage
Transformer
Negative Voltage
Generation Circuit
Upper Fixing Roller

Voltage generation
Circuit
HRLB
TB705
To upper
fixing roller
Discharge
DCHGB TB706
Voltage
To static charge
Generator Circuit
eliminator
+24V
+21.5V
+24V
Reference
Voltage
Power Supply
GND TB704
Figure 3-104
3-5 P
1.
Outline
In response to the instruction from the microprocessor (CPU) on the DC controller PCB, the
high-voltage power supply applies a voltage to the primary charging roller, developing cylinder,
transfer charging roller, static charge eliminator, and upper fixing roller. It applies a voltage of DC
voltage and AC voltage to the primary charging roller and developing cylinder, applies a positive
or negative DC voltage to the transfer charging roller, and a negative DC voltage to the static
charge eliminator and the upper fixing roller.
2.
a.
Principle of operation
Primary charging roller voltage generation
When the /PRNT signal sent from the Image processor becomes L, initial rotation starts, and
the DC controller sets the PRIMARY AC BIAS DRIVE signal (/PRIACD) to "L." The circuit then
applies the primary AC bias to the primary charging roller. After the specified period of time has
elapsed the PRIMARY DC BIAS DRIVE signal (/PR1DCD) goes L and the voltage superimposing primary AC bias onto primary DC bias is applied to the primary charging roller.
The primary DC bias changes with the developing DC bias according to the IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT signal (DENADJ) sent from the DC controller.
b.
Developing bias generation

When the DEVELOPING DC BIAS DRIVE signal (/DEVDCD) from the DC controller becomes L, a developing DC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.
When the VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC) is sent from the Image processor, the DC
controller outputs the DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE signal (/DEVACD) and DEVELOPING
AC BIAS FREQUENCY OUTPUT signal (/DEVACCLK). This circuit then applies the voltage
superimposing developing DC bias and developing AC bias to the developing cylinder.
The developing DC bias changes according to the IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT signal (DENADJ), making the image density adjustable.
c.
Transfer charging roller voltage generation

The negative, between-page, and print bias are applied to the transfer charging roller according
to the print sequence.
The negative bias voltage is applied to the transfer charging roller at an appropriate timing to
move the toner attached to the transfer charging roller onto the photosensitive drum to clean the
roller.
For the between-page bias, a positive low voltage is applied to the transfer charging roller at
an appropriate timing so that the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum is not attracted to the
transfer charging roller.
For print bias, a positive voltage is applied to the transfer charging roller in order to transfer
the toner on the photosensitive drum surface to the paper.
When the /PRNT signal sent from the Image processor becomes L, initial rotation starts
and a negative bias is applied to the roller for a certain time to clean the transfer charging roller.
Between-page bias is then applied, and a print bias is applied to the transfer charging roller after the
prescribed time has elapsed since the /VSYNC signal going L.
A print bias is applied during the print sequence to transfer the toner onto the paper. A
between-page bias is applied between pages.
After the completion of printing, a between-page bias and a negative bias are applied again to
clean the transfer charging roller.
d.
Generation of print voltage to the discharger

2 voltage loads, high and low output bias are applied to the discharger according to the various
print sequences.
The discharger bias drive signal (/DCHGBD) output from the DC Controller is L, and
when the discharger bias switch signal (/DCHGUP) turns H the low output bias changes to L
3-6 P
and the circuit applies a high voltage output bias. The high voltage output bias is applied only at the
trailing edge of a single side print and during the second side of a duplex print.
e.
Toner sensing/cartridge sensing

The toner cartridge has a toner sensor.
The DC controller detects the toner level and whether a cartridge is installed when the developing AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder by the DEVELOPING AC BIAS DRIVE
signal by checking the TONER LEVEL signal (TONSNS) voltage.
3-7 P
II . Disassembly/
Assembly
A.
Transfer Charging Roller
[2]
[3]

2) Open the transfer charging roller guide
[1].
3) Pick the gear [2]; then, lift it slightly, and
move it to the left to detach the transfer
charging roller [3].
Caution:
When mounting the transfer charging
roller, be sure to work while holding the
roller shaft or the bushing.
Do not hold it by its sponge area.
[1]
Figure 3-201
B.
High-Voltage Power
Supply PCB
1. High-Voltage Power Supply PCB

1) Remove the right rear cover and the rear
cover.
2) Remove the controller unit.
3) Disconnect the two connectors [1].
4) Remove the screw [2] and the two screws
[3], and detach the high-voltage power
supply PCB [4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
Figure 3-202
3-8 P
CHAPTER 4
PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM
I . PICK-UP/FEED SYSTEM
A.
Outline
Presence of paper on the multi-purpose tray is detected by the multi-purpose tray paper sensor
(PS1301), and presence of paper in the upper and lower cassettes is detected by the cassette paperout sensor (PS1207 or PS1208).
If the cassette pick-up motor (SMT1) in the paper pick-up unit rotates for cassette feeding,
pick-up roller, feed roller 1, and separation roller turn to feed a sheet of paper into the printer.
If the manual feed clutch (CL3) in the manual feed pick-up unit engages for manual feeding,
the manual feeding pick-up roller turns and feeds a sheet of paper from the multi-purpose tray into
the printer.
The paper is controlled by the registration roller so that the leading edge of the toner image on
the photosensitive drum matches the leading edge of the paper. The paper is fed, transferred, then
separated from the drum, fed to the fixing unit, and delivered onto the face-down tray or Finisher
(accessory).
There are four photointerrupters (PS1, PS2, PS1402, and PS1403) on the paper path for sensing paper reaching or passing through each area.
If the paper does not reach or clear each sensor within the pre-set time, the microprocessor on
the DC controller assumes a paper jam has occurred and notifies the System controller PCB.
4-1 P
DC controller PCB
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
Switch/sensor PCB
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10][11][12][13]
[14]
[15] [16]
[17]
Pick-up PCB
PS1401
PS1402
PS1403
PS1
PS1301
PS1302
PS2
PS1208
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
PS1202
PS1205
PS1206
PS1207
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
PS1201
PS1203
PS1204
[1] : FACE-DOWN TRAY DELIVERY SENSE signal (FDOUTS)

[2] : FACE-DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL SENSE signal (FDFULS)
[3] : FIXING UNIT DELIVERY SENSE signal (/FPOUTS)
[4] : UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-SIZE SENSE signal
[5] : LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-SIZE SENSE signal
[6] : LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE signal 1 (LPVS1)
[7] : LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE signal 2 (LPVS2)
[8] : LOWER CASSETTE SENSE signal (/LDECKC)
[9] : LOWER CASSETTE PAPER-OUT SENSE signal (/LDECKS)
[10] : UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE signal 1 (UPVS1)
[11] : UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-LEVEL SENSE signal 2 (UPVS2)
[12] : UPPER CASSETTE SENSE signal (/UDECKC)
[13] : UPPER CASSETTE PAPER-OUT SENSE signal (/UDECKS)
[14] : REGISTRATION PAPER SENSE signal (/REGS)
[15] : MULTI-PURPOSE TRAY PAPER SENSE signal (/MPTPS)
[16] : LIFTING PLATE SENSE signal (/MPTLS)
[17] : PICK-UP UNIT PAPER SENSE signal (/FEEDS)
PS1:
PS2:
Pick-up unit paper sensor
PS1201: Lower cassette sensor
PS1202: Upper cassette sensor
PS1203: Lower cassette paper-level sensor 1
PS1204: Lower cassette paper-level sensor 2
PS1205: Upper cassette paper-level sensor 1
PS1206: Upper cassette paper-level sensor 2
PS1207: Lower cassette paper-out sensor
PS1208: Upper cassette paper-out sensor
PS1301: Multi-purpose tray paper sensor
PS1302: Lifting plate position sensor
PS1401: Face-down tray paper full sensor
PS1402: Face-down tray delivery sensor
PS1403: Fixing unit delivery sensor
SW1601: Cassette paper-size sensing switch
Figure 4-101
4-2 P
DC controller PCB
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
Pick-up PCB
Switch/sensor PCB
[8]
Face-down
delivery roller
MT1
Flapper
CL1
Upper
fixing
roller
Fixing unit
delivery
roller
Face-up
delivery roller
SL3
CL2
CL3
Photosensitive
drum
Transfer
charging
roller
Lower
fixing
roller
Registration
roller
Manual feeding
pick-up roller
Lifting plate
Feed
roller 2
SL2
Pick-up
roller
SL1
Upper cassette
Separation
roller
Feed
roller 1
SMT1
Separation
roller
Lower cassette
[1]: FACE-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal (/FUSLD)

[2]: REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE signal (/REGCLD)
[3]: MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal (MMRDY)
[4]: PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE signal
[5]: FEED CLUTCH DRIVE signal (/FEEDCLD)
[6]: CASSETTE PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal (/PUPSLD)
[7]: MANUAL FEED CLUTCH DRIVE signal (/MPTCLD)
[8]: LIFTING PLATE SOLENOID DRIVE signal (/MPTSLD)
MT1: Main motor

SMT1: Cassette pick-up motor
SL1: Cassette pick-up solenoid
SL2: Lifting plate solenoid
SL3: Face-up solenoid
CL1: Registration clutch
CL2: Feed clutch
CL3: Manual feed clutch
Figure 4-102
4-3 P
B.
Paper Pick-up
1.
Pick-up operation
This printer conducts paper pick-up operation by lifting the paper to the paper pick-up position
with the lifter and lowering the rotating cassette pick-up roller to the paper level.
Paper pick-up operation is conducted only when the multi-input tray driver receives the pickup command from the option controller. The pick-up roller is lowered to the paper level by the
rotational force of the main motor (MT1). At the same time, the pick-up roller is rotated by the
rotational force of the pick-up motor.
Paper pick-up operation is conducted as follows.
On receiving the /PRNT from the System controller PCB, the DC controller PCB runs the main
motor (MT1) and the pick-up motor (SMT1). When the cassette pick-up solenoid (SL1) is turned
ON, the main motor rotates the cassette pick-up cam via the gear to drive the shaft drive arm.
At the same time, the rotational force of the pick-up motor is transmitted to the cassette pick-up
roller via the feed roller gear. As a result, the rotating cassette pick-up roller goes down to the paper
level, picks up a sheet of paper, goes up to the paper pick-up standby position, and stops rotation.
When the pick-up motor rotates clockwise, the paper is picked up from the upper cassette by
rotating the cassette pick-up roller, feed roller 1 and separation roller of the upper cassette. When
the pick-up motor rotates counterclockwise, the paper is picked up from the lower cassette by
driving the cassette pick-up roller, feed roller 1 and separation roller of the lower cassette.
Paper lifting plate

Pick-up roller
Feed roller 1
Cassette pick-up cam
Print paper
Main motor drive

Shaft drive arm
Pick-up roller shaft
Gear
Separation roller
Cassettte pick-up
solenoid
Pick-up motor drive
Lift-up release arm
Feed roller gear
Lift-up cam
Pick-up roller shaft fixing arm
Figure 4-103
4-4 P
Pick-up timing from the upper cassette (A4: two pages continuously print)
Power switch ON
(Unit: Seconds)
STBY
PRINT
INTR
LSTR
STBY
PRINT signal (/PRNT)

VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC)
3.0
Main motor (MT1)
0.06
Pick-up motor (SMT1)

0.5
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL1)
1.97
0.5
About 1.5
Feed clutch (CL2)

Registration clutch (CL1)
0.06
0.06
0.03
0.03
Pick-up unit paper sensor (PS2)

Fixing unit paper sensor (PS1403)
Figure 4-104
Pick-up timing from the lower cassette (A4: two pages continuously print)
Power switch ON
(Unit: Seconds)
STBY
PRINT
INTR
LSTR
STBY

3.0
Main motor (MT1)

Pick-up motor (SMT1)
Reverse high-speed rotation
Cassette pick-up solenoid (SL1)
0.52
Feed clutch (CL2)

About 1.1 About 0.9

About 1.5
Reverse rotation
0.52
0.06
0.06
0.03
0.03

Fixing unit paper sensor (PS1403)
Figure 4-105
4-5 P
a.
Cassette detection/cassette paper size detection/cassette paper level detection

The upper and lower cassettes detection is executed by the upper cassette sensor (PS1202) and
the lower cassette sensor (PS1201). The paper detection in the upper and lower cassettes is executed by the upper cassette paper out sensor (PS1208) and the lower cassette paper out sensor
(PS1207). The paper size detection is executed by the upper and lower cassette paper size detection
switches (SW1601 to SW1604) installed to each cassette. Each cassette has the four switches. The
combinations of the cassette paper size detection switches are shown in Table 2-5-1.
Cassette paper-size sensing switch

Paper size
SW1601
SW1602
SW1603
SW1604
Ledger
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
B4
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Legal
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Letter
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
A4
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Table 4-101
The remaining paper level in the cassette is detected according to the lifter position. The lifter
contains a light blocking plate which blocks two sensors on the pick-up PCB. The lifter position is
detected by these sensors. And, as a result, the remaining paper level in the cassette is detected.
The remaining paper level in the upper cassette is detected by the combination of outputs from
the upper cassette paper level sensor 1 (PS1205) and the upper cassette paper level sensor 2
(PS1206). The paper level in the lower cassette is detected by the combination of outputs from the
lower cassette paper level sensor 1 (1203) and the lower cassette paper level sensor 2 (PS1204).
Figure 2-5-6 shows the combinations of PS1205/PS1203 and PS1206/PS1204.
4-6 P
Pick-up unit
Pick-up PCB
Remaining
paper level
Almost full
Remaining number
of sheets (note)
430 sheetes or more
High
200 - 490 sheetes
Low
50 - 260 sheetes
Almost empty
110 sheetes or less
Note : Plain paper (75g/m2 recommended paper)
PS1204 or PS1206
PS1203 or PS1205
Light blocking
plate
Lifter
Figure 4-106
4-7 P
b.
Lift-up operation
The lift-up operation is executed by the Main motor when a cassette is installed or the pick-up
roller shaft is set lower than certain level due to the paper reduce.
The two cases for the lift-up operation are as follows.
Paper lifting plate
Pick-up roller
Feed roller 1
Print paper
Main motor drive

Shaft drive arm
Gear
Separation roller
Cassettte pick-up
solenoid
Pick-up motor drive
Lift-up release arm
Feed roller gear
Lift-up cam
Figure 4-107
4-8 P
1) Cassette is installed
[1] When a cassette is installed, the multi-input tray drive motor rotates, and the cassette paper
pick-up solenoid (SL3) is turned ON. Then, the shaft drive arm is driven by the cassette paper
pick-up cam rotation through the gear.

Shaft drive arm
Main motor drive
Pick-up roller shfat fixing arm
Lifter gear
Cassette pick-up solenoid

Lift-up cam
Figure 4-108
4-9 P
[2] As the shaft drive arm goes down, the pick-up roller shaft goes down. Then, the lift-up release
arm is pushed, and the lift-up cam is unfixed. At the same time, the shaft drive arm is fixed to
the pick-up roller shaft fixing arm, and the pick-up roller shaft is stopped in the designated
position.
shaft drive arm

Lift-up release arm
Lift-up arm
Lifter gear
Lift-up cam
Print paper
Paper lifting plate
Figure 4-109
[3] The lift up cam starts rotating when unfixed, and the lift up arm pushes up the lifter gear by one
tooth. The paper lifting plate is lifted by repeating this operation.
Main motor drive
Lift-up arm
Lift-up cam
Print paper
Lifter gear
Paper lifting plate
Figure 4-110
4-10 P
[4] The pick-up roller shaft is lifted up when the paper on the paper lifting plate touches the pickup roller. Then, the pick-up roller shaft fixing arm is released, and the lift-up release arm lifts
up the pick-up roller shaft to the waiting position by force of the spring. At the same time, the
lift-up cam is fixed by driving the pick-up roller shaft fixing arm and the lift-up release arm.
Then, the lift-up arm is stopped, and the lift-up operation is completed.
Lift-up operation
Cassette pick-up roller
Shaft drive arm

Lift-up release arm
Lifter gear
Print paper
Paper lifting plate

Lift-up arm
Lift-up cam
Completion of lift-up operation
Figure 4-111
4-11 P
2) Paper level is lower than certain level

[1] As the paper level lowers, the moving distance of the pick-up roller increases. When the
moving distance reaches the specified value, the pick-up roller shaft pushes the lift up release
arm, and the lift up cam is unfixed.
Certain paper level
Cassette pick-up roller

Moving distance of pick-up roller
Lift-up release arm
Lifter gear
Print paper
Paper lifting plate

Lift-up cam
Lift-up arm
Less than certain paper level
Falling width of pick-up roller
Figure 4-112
4-12 P
[2] When the lift-up cam is unfixed, the lift-up arm lifts up the lifter gear one tooth by the rotation
of the lift-up cam. The paper lifting plate is lifted up by repeating the operation. (See Figure 4111)
[3] When the paper on the paper lifting plate touches the pick-up roller, the pick-up roller shaft is
lifted up. Then, the pick-up roller shaft fixing arm is released, and the lift-up release arm lifts
up the pick-up roller shaft to the waiting position by force of the spring. At the same time, the
pick-up roller shaft fixing arm and the lift up release arm are driven to fix the lift up cam. As a
result, the lift up arm is stopped and lift up operation is competed. (See Figure 4-112)
4-13 P
c.
Multi-feed Double-feed mechanism

When feeding from the cassette, the printer uses the separation roller to prevent double-feeding. Normally, the separation roller is imparted with a rotational force opposite to that of the feed
roller. However, since the separation roller is equipped with a torque limiter, it rotates with feed
roller 1 by transmission of its rotational force via the transported paper. On the other hand, if
multiple sheets of paper are picked up, the low friction force between the sheets of paper result in a
weak rotational force being transmitted to the separation roller from feed roller 1. Consequently,
the separation rollers own rotational force separates the extra sheet.
Feed roller 1
Pick-up roller
Driving force
transmitted from feed
roller 1
Separation roller
Print paper
Driving force transmitted from the pick-up motor

through the torque limiter.
Normal
Muitifeed
Figure 4-113
4-14 P
2.
Manual feed (multi-purpose tray)

The presence of paper on the multi-purpose tray is detected by the multi-purpose tray paper
sensor (PS1301).
When the DC controller receives the /PRNT signal from the video controller, the lifting plate
solenoid (SL2) turns ON, the lifting plate is unlocked (the lifting plate rises), and the paper touches
the pick-up roller.
The lifting plate position is detected by the lifting plate position sensor (PS1302). If the sensor
detects that the lifting plate is up while waiting, SL2 is turned ON to lower the lifting plate.
The manual feed clutch (CL3) turns ON, and the main motor (MT1) power is transmitted to the
manual feeding pick-up roller.
Paper pressed against the manual feeding pick-up roller by the lifting plate is picked up by the
pick-up roller. Unnecessary sheets are removed by the separation pad, and one sheet is fed into the
printer by feed roller 2. The subsequent operations are almost the same as for those of cassette
feeding, except that SL2 is turned ON again right after the rotation of the registration roller to lower
the lifting plate.
The CPU turns ON SL2 to lower the lifting plate. If it is normal, the lifting plate position
sensor detects the lifting plate within about 0.5 seconds. The CPU notifies the video controller of
a lifting plate position failure if the lifting plate position sensor fails to detect the lifting plate 5
times in a row when the CPU repeats this operation 5 times.
Pick-up timing from the munual feed (A4: tow pages continuously print)
Power switch ON
(Unit: Seconds)
PRINT
INTR
STBY
LSTR STBY

Main motor (MT1)
Lifting plate solenoid (SL2)
Munual feed clutch (CL3)
About1.1
3.0
0.27
0.03
0.55
2.03

0.27
1.87
0.14
1.87
0.14
Figure 4-114
4-15 P
C.
Delivery Unit
The upper and lower rollers of the fixing unit, and the face-up and face-down delivery rollers
are driven by the main motor (MT1).
The paper separated from the photosensitive drum is fed into the fixing unit, and sent from the
fixing unit by the fixing roller and fixing unit delivery roller.
The paper sent from the fixing unit is detected by the fixing unit delivery sensor (PS1403).
DC controller PCB
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
PS1401
PS1402
Face-down
delivery roller
MT1
Flapper
PS1403
Lower fixing roller
Face-up
delivery roller
SL3
Fixing unit
delivery roller
Upper fixing roller
[1]: FACE-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal (/FUSLD)

[2]: FACE-DOWN TRAY DELIVERY SENSE signal (FDOUTS)
[3]: FACE-DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL SENSE signal (FDFULS)
[4]: FIXING UNIT DELIVERY SENSE signal (/FPOUTS)
[5]: MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal (/MMOTD)
PS1401: Face-down tray paper full sensor

PS1402: Face-down tray delivery sensor
PS1403: Fixing unit delivery sensor
SL3:
Face-up solenoid
MT1:
Main motor
Figure 4-115
4-16 P
The printer switches between face-up and face-down tray delivery with the face-up deflector.
When the FACE-UP SOLENOID DRIVE signal (/FUSLD) becomes L, the face-up solenoid
(SL3) moves the face-up deflector to the face-up tray and the paper is delivered through the face-up
tray. If /FUSLD is H, the paper is delivered through the face-down tray on the top of the printer.
The paper delivered through the face-down tray is detected by the face-down tray delivery
sensor (PS1402). When the face-down tray becomes full, this is detected by the face-down tray
paper full sensor (PS1401).
4-17 P
II . Duplexing Unit
A.
Outline
Copy paper is guided to the copiers reversing assembly through the duplexing unit by the
work of the duplexing flapper.
Once inside the reversing assembly, the paper is shifted by the reversing roller and is led to the
duplexing unit. The paper izs then adjusted for horizontal registration by the horizontal registration
guide inside the duplexing unit (p. 4-22), and then is moved forward by the duplexing feed roller.
The reversing roller is rotated by the drive from the duplexing motor (M8). The duplexing feed
rollers 1 and 2 are rotated by the drive from the duplexing motor (M8) under the control of the
duplexing feed clutch.
The duplexing motor (M8) is a stepping motor, and is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise
by the microprocessor on the duplexing driver PCB; it is also controlled for either normal or highspeed rotation.
The horizontal registration guide receives drive from the horizontal registration motor (M7),
and moves to suit the selected paper size.
4-18 P
DC controller PCB
Duplexing driver PCB

[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
Duplexing SL6
flapper
[6]
[7]
[8] [9]
Fixing
delivery
roller
Fixing
rollers
SL7
Reversing roller
releasing plate
PS25
PS23
Re-pickup wait
position
PS24
Feed
roller 2
Duplexing
lower
guide
Horizontal
Reversing registration Duplexing
roller
feeding
guide
roller 1
M7
CL
5
Duplexing
feed
roller 2
Upper
cassette
Reversing
assembly
M8
Lower
cassette
[1] Horizontal registration motor drive signal

[2] Reversing roller release solenoid drive signal
(PRRESLD*)
[3] Duplexing flapper solenoid drive signal
(DUPSLD*)
[4] Reversal paper detection signal (SWBKS*)
[5] Horizontal registration guide home position
detection signal (HREGS)
[6] Duplexing feed roller 1 home position detection
signal (DRPS)
[7] Duplexing unit paper detection signal (DUPPS*)
[8] Duplexing feed clutch drive signal (DUPCLD*)
[9] Duplexing motor drive signal
M7: Horizontal registration motor

M8: Duplexing motor
SL6: Duplexing flapper solenoid
SL7: Reversing roller releasing solenoid
CL5: Duplexing feeding clutch
PS23:Duplexing feed roller 1 home position
sensor
PS24:Duplexing unit paper sensor
PS25:Horizontal registration guide home position
sensor
PS26:Reversal paper sensor
Figure 4-201
4-19 P
[1][2] [3]
[10][11]
[4] [5]
[12]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1] Reversing roller releasing plate
[7] Duplexing unit paper sensor (PS24)
[2] Reversing roller releasing solenoid (SL7)
[8] Duplexing feed roller 1
[3] Duplexing motor (M8)
[9] Duplexing feeding clutch (CL5)
[4] Duplexing flapper solenoid (SL6)
[10] Horizontal registration guide home position
[5] Duplexing feed roller 1 home position

sensor (PS23)
sensor (PS25)
[11] Reversal paper sensor (PS26)
[6] Horizontal registration guide
[12] Horizontal registration motor (M7)
Figure 4-202 Top View
4-20 P
B.
Reversing Movement
When the duplexing unit select command arrives from the DC controller PCB, the duplexing
driver PCB turns on the duplexing flapper solenoid (SL6), thereby driving the duplexing flapper to
send paper to the duplexing unit.
When the reversal paper sensor (PS26) detects the leading edge of paper, the duplexing driver
PCB rotates the duplexing motor (M8) counterclockwise (CCW; see Note) to move the paper to the
machines reversing assembly. Thereafter, when PS26 detects the trailing edge of the paper, the
duplexing driver PCB switches the duplexing motor to clockwise direction (CW) to change the
direction of the movement of the paper. At this time, the paper is moving along the duplexing lower
guide so that the change will guide it in the direction of the feed roller inside the duplexing unit.
Caution:
If the paper is not 11x17, A3, B4, or LGL, the duplexing driver PCB switches the duplexing
motor (M8) to high speed rotation after a specific period of time, moving the paper toward the
reversing assembly.
Duplexing upper guide

Reversing
roller
releasing
plate
PS26
Duplexing feeding
roller 1
Duplexing lower guide

Duplexing unit
Reversing roller (CW)
Revering
assembly
M8 Duplexing motor
Reversing
roller
releasing
plate
Revering
assembly
Duplexing feeding
roller 1
PS26

Duplexing unit
Reversing roller (CW)
M8 Duplexing motor
Figure 4-203
4-21 P
C.
Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
The horizontal registration is adjusted so that the middle of main scanning direction for the
second side of a double-sided copy will match the middle of the effective print area of the drum by
butting the horizontal registration guides against both sides of the copy.
The presence of the horizontal registration guides in home position is checked by the horizontal registration guide home position sensor (PS25).
At power-on, the duplexing driver PCB drives the horizontal registration motor (M7) to return
the horizontal registration guide to home position. If the horizontal registration guide is in home
position at the start, it is once moved away from it and then is moved back to home position.
When the paper is moved inside the duplexing unit by the work of the reversing roller rotating
clockwise, the duplexing driver PCB checks the home position of the duplexing feed roller 1. If it
is not in home position, the duplexing driver PCB turns on the duplexing feed clutch (CL5) to rotate
the duplexing feed roller 1; it turns off the duplexing feed clutch upon detection of home position to
stop the duplexing feed roller 1.
In response, the paper will stop without coming into contact with the duplexing feed roller 1.
Thereafter, if the paper is not A4R, LTRR, or A5, the duplexing driver PCB turns on the reversing
roller releasing solenoid (SL7) to fully free the reversing roller and, as a result, the paper to prepare
for the adjustment of the horizontal registration.
Reversing
roller
releasing
plate
ON
Reversing
assembly
Duplexing roller 1
Duplexing feed
Re-pickup
roller 2
sensor lever

Duplexing unit
Duplexing unit paper sensor
Reversing roller
Figure 4-204
When ready, the duplexing driver PCB drives the horizontal registration motor for as long as
needed to meet the paper size data from the DC controller PCB (in terms of pulses) so as to move
the horizontal registration guide to suit the selected paper size, thereby adjusting the horizontal
registration (see Note) of the paper.
When the duplexing unit paper sensor (PS24) detects the leading edge of paper, the horizontal
registration guide is returned to home position. The horizontal registration motor is a stepping
motor, ensuring accurate control of moving the guide.
If the distance the horizontal guide moves from home position exceeds the maximum distance
stored in memory, the duplexing driver PCB identifies the condition as being a horizontal registration guide error, and will communicate it to the system controller PCB by way of the DC controller
PCB.
Reference:
E055: Indicates a fault in the drive of the duplexing unit horizontal guide.
Caution:
If the paper is not A3, 11x17, A4R, LTRR, or B4, the horizontal registration guide must move
farther. To make up for the extra distance, the duplexing driver PCB drives the horizontal
registration motor while the reversing roller is rotating counterclockwise to move the horizontal registration guide to a point suited to the selected paper size.
4-22 P
D.
Re-Pickup
The duplexing driver PCB turns on the duplexing feeding clutch (CL5) when the horizontal
registration has been adjusted, causing the paper to move once again.
The duplexing driver PCB turns off the reversing roller releasing solenoid (SL7) about 0.5 sec
after the duplexing unit paper sensor (PS24) detects the leading edge of paper (unless the paper is
A4R, LTRR, or A5); then, it turns off the duplexing feeding clutch in about 1.0 sec.
The duplexing driver PCB keeps the paper in wait for re-pickup by the copier (i.e., in wait for
a re-pickup command from the DC controller PCB).
When the duplexing driver PCB receives a re-pickup command from the DC controller PCB, it
controls the feed speed of the duplexing motor (M8) so that it is the same as the paper feed speed;
it then turns on the duplexing feed clutch to move the paper to the copiers feeding assembly.
M8
SL7
Reversing
roller
releasing
plate
OFF
Reversing
assembly
Reversing roller releasing solenoid

CL5
Duplexing unit paper
sensor lever
Duplexing feed roller
Duplexing feed
roller 2

Duplexing unit
Reversing roller
Figure 4-205
4-23 P
III . Envelope Feeder

A.
Outline
The envelope feeder is designed to send envelopes as far as the printer unit of the copier.
The envelope feeder is controlled by the pickup command (1st start, 2nd start) from the DC
controller of the copiers printer unit.
The sequence of operations of the envelope feeder is controlled by the envelope feeder driver
PCB, which consists of a 4-bit microprocessor (CPU, IC932) and a gate array (GA, IC931). The
CPU communicates with the DC controller of the copiers printer unit by way of the gate array.
The CPU drives the pickup motor in response to the pickup command (1st start, 2nd start) from
the DC controller.
The envelope feeder is supplied with +24 VDC from the printer unit, and the +24 VDC is used
to generate +5 VDC for ICs and sensors.
The following figure shows the flow of signals between envelope feeder and printer.
Envelope feeder driver PCB
DC controller
PCB
iR3250
Serial
communications
line
+24VA
IC931
Gate array
Envelope
feeder
sensor
Bus
IC 932
CPU
Pickup
motor
driver
circuit
Pickup
motor
Figure 4-301
4-24 P
1.
Inputs to and Outputs from the Envelope Feeder Driver

To copier
Pickup motor SMT1
J136-1
-2
-3
-4
J931-1
-2
-3
-4
+24VA
ENV0
ENV1
J932-1
-2
-3
-4
A
/A
B
/B
Serial signal (input)

Serial signal (output)
Pickup motor rotation control signal
Envelope
feeder paper
sensor
PS931
When sensor detects paper, '0'.
Figure 4-302
4-25 P
B.
1.
Pickup/Feeding System
Pickup/Feeding Operations
Serial communication
DC controller PCB
[1]
[1] : Envelope feeder paper detection signal

[2] : Envelope feeder pickup motor driver signal
[2]
Envelope
Envelope feeder
pickup rollers
feeder
Torque
limiter
PS931
Envelope feeder
separation upper roller
Envelope feeder
separation lower
roller
SMT11
Envelope feeder
feed rollers
Photosensitive drum
PS1
Transfer
charging
roller
SMT1 : envelope feeder pickup motor

PS931 : envelope feeder paper sensor
PS1 : registration paper sensor (printer)
Registration
roller
Figure 4-303
The envelope feeder pickup motor (SMT11) is a stepping motor, and is rotated clockwise or
counterclockwise by the envelope feeder driver PCB.
When the motor rotates clockwise, all rollers of the envelope feeder rotate; when it rotates
counterclockwise, on the other hand, the separation upper roller and the feed roller rotate.
When the 1st start command arrive from the copiers DC controller, the envelope feeder driver
PCB rotates the pickup motor clockwise for about 1.0 sec; in 0.1 sec later, it rotates the motor
counterclockwise for about 1.9 sec, thereby picking up the envelope and moving it to the copiers
printer unit.
The envelope is stopped 16 mm past the registration paper sensor (PS1) of the copiers printer
unit. When the 2nd start command arrive from the copiers DC controller, the envelope feeder
driver PCB rotates the pickup motor counterclockwise for about 1 sec to move the envelope once
again.
4-26 P
Power switch ON
STBY INTR
PRINT
(unit: sec)
LSTR STBY
Print start command (/PRNT)

Vertical sync signal (/VSYNC)
Main motor (MT1)
Envelope feeder pickup motor (SMT11)
1.0 (approx.)
0.1
Pickup command
(approx.) (approx.)
1st Start
2nd Start
CW CCW
2.7
(approx.)
(approx.)
1st Start
2nd Start
Fixing delivery sensor (PS1403)
Figure 4-304
4-27 P
2.
Preventing Double Feeding

The machine uses a separation roller method as a mechanism to prevent double feeding.
The separation upper roller receives drive from the motor through a torque limiter.
Normally, the separation upper roller receives drive for rotation in the same direction as both
the pickup roller and the separation lower roller; since the separation upper roller, envelope, and
separation lower roller are in contact with each other, the separation upper roller receives the drive
for rotation from the separation lower roller through the envelope, rotating in the direction opposite
the normal direction of its rotation (arrow in the figure).
When double feeding occurs, the envelopes do not have much friction; as such, the drive of
rotation of the separation lower roller is not adequately transmitted to the separation upper roller so
that the separation upper roller rotates in the direction opposite the normal direction of its rotation
(reversed arrow in the figure).
This mechanism serves to move back the double-feeding envelope, preventing it from moving
into the printer unit.
Drive from pickup motor
through torque limiter
Envelopes
Separation upper roller

Drive from separation
lower roller
Pickup roller
Separation lower roller
Normal
Double feeding
Figure 4-305
4-28 P
IV . Paper Jam Detection

A.
Outline
The following paper sensors are provided to detect whether paper is present and whether the
paper is fed normally.

Fixing unit delivery sensor (PS1403)
The microprocessor (CPU) determines whether paper is jammed by checking whether paper is
present or absent at the sensors, at times stored in memory.
If the CPU determines that a jam has occurred, it stops print operation and notifies the jam to
the Image processor PCB.
PS1402
PS1403
PS1
PS2
Figure 4-401
4-29 P
1.
Pick-up delay jam 1

The CPU assesses a pick-up delay jam 1 if the paper does not reach the pick-up unit paper
sensor (PS2) within the specified period of time after the pick-up operation.
Upper/lower cassettes:
about 6.4 seconds
Duplexing unit (Option): about 2.4 seconds
Paper deck (Option):
about 7.0 seconds
2.
Pick-up delay jam 2

The CPU assesses a pick-up delay jam 2 if the registration paper sensor (PS1) cannot detect the
leading edge of the paper within about 0.7 seconds after the pick-up unit paper sensor (PS2) detects
the leading edge of the paper.
The CPU also assesses a pick-up delay jam 2 if the registration paper sensor (PS1) cannot
detect the leading edge of the paper within about 9.5 seconds after start of pick-up operation from
the multi-purpose tray or envelope feeder.
3.
Fixing unit delivery delay jam

The CPU assesses a fixing unit delivery delay jam if the leading edge of the paper does not
reach the fixing unit deliver sensor (PS1403) within about 2.2 seconds after receiving the VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC).
4.
Fixing unit delivery stationary jam

The CPU assesses a fixing unit delivery stationary jam if the trailing edge of the paper does not
pass through the fixing unit delivery sensor (PS1403) within the specified period of time (T1) after
receiving the VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC).
Ledger=about 5.3 seconds, Legal=about 4.7 seconds, Letter=about 3.8 seconds,
A3=about 5.2 seconds, B4=about 4.8 seconds, A4=about 3.7 seconds
5.
Face-down delivery delay jam

The CPU assesses a face-down delivery delay jam if the leading edge of the paper does not
reach the face-down tray delivery sensor (PS1402) within about 3.9 seconds after receiving the
VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC).
6.
Face-down delivery stationary jam

The CPU assesses a face-down delivery stationary jam if the trailing edge of the paper does not
pass through the face-down tray delivery sensor (PS1402) within the specified period of time (T2)
after receiving the VERTICAL SYNC signal (/VSYNC).
Ledger=about 7.0 seconds, Legal=about 6.4 seconds, Letter=about 5.5 seconds,
A3=about 6.9 seconds, B4=about 6.5 seconds, A4=about 5.4 seconds
7. Residual paper jam
a. The CPU assesses a residual paper jam if the fixing unit delivery sensor (PS1403) detects the
paper after the power-ON.
b. The CPU assesses a residual paper jam if it does not receive an automatic delivery command
within 3 minutes after notifying the video controller of the presence of paper which can be
automatically delivered out of the printer.
c. The CPU assesses a residual paper jam if one of the following sensors detects the paper after
the printer has performed an automatic delivery of the relevant paper after the power switch is
turned ON and the fixing roller has reached the specified temperature (150C).

Fixing unit delivery sensor (PS1403)
4-30 P
B.
Dupelxing Unit
The following sensors are used to monitor the presence/absence of and the movement of paper:
A jam is identified in terms of the presence/absence of paper over a specific sensor at such
times as programmed in the microprocessor (CPU) mounted on the duplexing driver PCB.
When the CPU identifies a jam, it will stop the movement of paper inside the duplexing unit,
and will communicate the presence of a jam to the system controller PCB by way of the DC controller PCB.
Caution:
T1 and T2 indicate the minimum and maximum paper sizes.
1.
Reversing Assembly Delay Jam

The duplexing driver PCB will signify a reversing assembly delay jam if paper does not reach
the reversal paper sensor (PS26) within a specific period of time after the duplexing flapper solenoid has turned on.
(unit: sec)
COPY
(unit: sec)
COPY
Duplexing flapper solenoid

drive signal (DUPSLD*)
1.5
Jam check
Duplexing motor (M8)
1.5
Normal
Error
CCW rotation
Figure 4-402
4-31 P
C.
Envelope Feeder
1.
Detecting a Jam
A jam is detected for pickup/feeding from the envelope feeder in the same way as for the
copier.
2.
Reversing Assembly Stationary Jam

The duplexing driver PCB will detect a reversing assembly stationary jam if paper does not
reach the reversal paper sensor (PS26) within a specific period of time after the duplexing flapper
solenoid has turned on.
(unit: sec)
COPY
(unit: sec)
COPY
Duplexing flapper solenoid

drive signal (DUPSLD*)
T1
Jam check
Normal

Duplexing motor (M8)
T1
CCW rotation
Error
CW rotation
T1=3.2 sec. (approx.) A4R/ 6.3 sec. (approx.) LDR
Figure 4-403
4-32 P
V . Disassembly/
Assembly
A.
Drive Unit
1) Remove the pickup unit. (See p. 4-35P.)

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cassette support [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-501
3) Free the claw [3], and detach the clutch

cover [4].
4) Remove the high-voltage power supply
PCB. (See p. 3-8P.)
5) Remove the controller power supply unit.
(See 6-43P.)
[4]
[3]
Figure 4-502
4-33 P

the four screws [6]; then, detach the main
motor [7].
[6]
[5]
[7]
[6]
Figure 4-503

drive unit [8].
[7]
[8]
Figure 4-504
4-34 P
B.
Pickup Unit
1. Pick up Unit
cassette.
2) Remove the multifeeder tray pickup unit.
(See p. 4-40P.)
3) Remove the right cover.
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the
cable [2] from the cable clamp [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 4-505
[5]
5) Remove the pickup roller, feed roller, and

separation roller. (See p. 4-36P.)
6) Remove the screw [4].
7) Remove the three screws [5], and detach
the pickup unit [6].
[4]
[6]
Figure 4-506
4-35 P
Caution:
1. When replacing parts inside the
pickup unit, be sure to remove the
following in advance to avoid contact with grease: pickup roller, feed
roller, separation roller.
2. To prevent abnormal noise, be sure
to apply grease to parts indicated by
an asterisk (*); the application must
comply with the following requirements:
Use HY9-0007; put a drop (1 mm in
diameter) in the area of contact between roller holder [1] and shaft [2].
Use CK-8009; put several drops (5
mm dia in total) on three consecutive teeth of gear [3] and gear [9].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[10]
[2]
[1]
a
[10]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
Roller holder
57T gear
Pickup cam
20T/40T gear
31T/4T gear
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[9]
Shaft
Ascent lid cam
100T gear
Descent lid cam
Lifter
Figure 4-507
2.
Pickup, Feed, and Separation

Rollers
cassette.
2) Pick the knob of each, and detach the
pickup roller [1], feed roller [2], and separation roller [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Caution:
Be sure to always replace the pickup
roller and the separation roller at the
same time.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 4-508
4-36 P
3. Pickup Motor
2) Disconnect the connector [1].
3) Remove the two screws [2], and slide the
pickup motor [3] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-509
4. Feed Clutch
3) Remove the screw [2], and free the two
claws [3] to detach the pickup PCB [4].
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
Figure 4-510
[8]
4) Free the claw [5], and detach the clutch

fixing plate [6].
5) Remove the E-ring [7], and detach the
feed clutch [8].
[6]
[5]
[7]
Figure 4-511
4-37 P
5. Cassette Pickup Solenoid

3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Figure 4-512
6. Pickup PCB
2) Disconnect the five connectors [1].
3) Remove the screw [2], and free the two
screws [3] to detach the pickup PCB [4].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
Figure 4-513
7. Pickup Unit Paper Sensor
(See p. 4-40P.)
two claws [2] to detach the sensor unit [3].
3) Detach the pickup unit paper sensor from
the sensor unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-514
4-38 P
8. Pickup Unit Door Sensor

1) Remove the pickup PCB. (See p. 4-38P.)
2) Remove the two screws [1].
3) Free the two claws [2], and detach the gear
cover [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-515
4) Disconnect the connector [4] from the

gear cover, and detach the pickup unit
door sensor [5].
[4]
[5]
Figure 4-516
4-39 P
C.
Multifeeder Tray Pickup

Unit
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Multifeeder Tray Pickup Unit

Remove the front cover.
Remove the rear cover.
Remove the multifeeder tray.
Open the pickup unit cover.
Disconnect the connector [1], and free the
cable [2] from the cable clamp [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Figure 4-517
[4]

the multifeeder tray pickup unit [5].
[5]
Figure 4-518
4-40 P
2. Multifeeder Tray Pickup Roller

1) Open the multifeeder tray.
2) Remove the cover [1].
[1]
Figure 4-519
3) While pushing down on the holding plate

[2], pick the knob [3] of the multifeeder
pickup roller and detach the pickup roller
[4].
[3]
[4]
[2]
Figure 4-520
4-41 P
3. Separation Pad
2) Remove the cover.
3) Remove the multifeeder tray pickup
roller.
4) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove
the separation pad [1].
[1]
Figure 4-521
4. Multifeeder Tray Pickup Clutch
1) Remove the multifeeder pickup unit. (See
p. 4-40P.)
2) Remove the multifeeder pickup unit fan.
(See p. 6-39P.)
the clutch cover unit [3]; then, detach the
multifeeder tray pickup clutch [4].
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
Figure 4-522
5. Copyboard Cover Solenoid
(See p. 4-40P.)
2) Remove the multifeeder tray pickup unit
fan. (See p. 6-39P.)
the copyboard cover solenoid [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
Figure 4-523
4-42 P
6. Multifeeder Tray PCB

(See p. 4-40P.)
2) Remove the multifeeder tray pickup unit
fan. (See p. 6-39P.)
3) Remove the multifeeder tray pickup
clutch. (See p. 4-42P.)
[1]
Figure 4-524
[2]
5) Remove the spring [2] and the copyboard

position detecting arm [3].
[3]
Figure 4-525

7) Free the claw [5], and detach the
multifeeder tray PCB [6].
[5]
[6]
[4]
Figure 4-526
4-43 P
D.
Registration Roller Unit
1. Registration Roller Unit

2) Remove the clutch cover. (See p. 4-33P.)
3) Open the transfer charging roller guide
[1].
[1]
Figure 4-527
the registration roller unit [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
Figure 4-528
2. Registration Lower roller
1) Remove the registration roller unit. (See
p. 4-44P.)
2) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the
clutch [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 4-529
4-44 P
3) Remove the spring [3], E-ring, and bushing [5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
Figure 4-530
[6]
4) Remove the gear [6], spring [7], E-ring

[8], and busing [9]; then, detach the registration lower roller [10].
[10]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Figure 4-531
4-45 P
E.
Feed Unit
[1]
1. Feed Unit
1) Remove the registration roller unit. (See
p. 4-44P.)
2) Remove the transfer charging roller.
3) Remove the fixing unit. (See p. 5-6P.)
unit. (See p. 3-8P.)
Figure 4-532
8) Free the four claws [4], and detach the
feed unit [5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
Figure 4-533
4-46 P
F.
Delivery Unit
1. Delivery Unit
1) Remove the upper cover.
3) Remove the right front cover and the rear
cover.
4) Remove the left rear cover.
the upper frame [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-534
the three screws [4].
8) Lift the delivery unit [5] slightly, and pull
it to the front to detach.
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[4]
Figure 4-535
4-47 P
2. Face-Up Solenoid Unit

1) Remove the delivery unit. (See p. 4-47P.)
face-up solenoid unit [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Figure 4-536
4-48 P
CHAPTER 5
FIXING CONTROL
I . Fixing Control
1.
Fixing temperature control

The upper fixing roller contains two heaters: fixing main heater (H1: 600W) and fixing sub
heater (H2: 450W). The fixing main heater heats the center of the upper roller, and the fixing sub
heater mainly heats both ends of the upper roller. The figure below shows the light distribution of
the heaters.
Surface temperature of
the upper fixing roller
Fixing main heater
The center of the upper roller

Thermistor
Fixing sub heater
Drive
side
Fixing upper roller
Figure 5-101
The surface temperature of the fixing roller is detected by the thermistor (TH1) on the fixing
roller. As the surface temperature rises, the resistance of TH1 decreases, and the voltage of the
FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal (FSRTH) lowers.
The CPU (IC201) on the DC controller controls the FIXING MAIN HEATER DRIVE signal
(/FSRD1), FIXING SUB HEATER DRIVE signal (/FSRD2), FIXING HEATER DRIVE ENABLE signal (FSRDE), and INVERTER CIRCUIT DRIVE signal (SUPSLT) based on the voltage
of the FSRTH signal in order to bring the surface temperature of the fixing roller to the specified
value.
This printer sets the TH-L/H signal to H when the fixing roller temperature is low (during
warm-up) and to L when the temperature is high (during normal temperature control) in order to
improve the accuracy of the FSRTH signal detection.
Table 5-101 shows the fixing roller target temperature during wait, standby, and print periods.
When it receives a /PRNT signal from the video controller, the CPU starts the fixing heater
print temperature control. The target fixing temperature and print speed at that point is shown in
Table 5-101. When you make duplex print or select ROUGH in PAPER TYPE MENU from
the control panel, the target fixing temperature and print speed are different from that of normal
printing.
5-1 P
Target temperature (C)

WAIT
STBY
170
169
PRINT (note 1)
PRINT SPEED (note 2)

(ppm)
190
32
195
24
Normal mode
Rough mode
Table 5-101
Notes:
1. The target temperature for the first page in duplex print is 5C lower.
2. The print speed in the above table is for A4 or Letter sized paper.
5-2 P
DC controller PCB
+5V
+5V
Q208
J222-2 FSRTH
Thermistor
+5V
+5V
GATE
ARRAY
IC202
+5V
Q207
51
-3 GNDTH
Thermoswitch
+5V
J222-1 TSWOUT
-4 TSWIN
129
128
125
126
122
Fixing
roller
heater
Fixing
roller
78
+5V
C221
+5V
C296
J217-13 /REMT24
FSRCT
J217-9
J217-10 SUPSLT
TSWIN
TSWOUT
J217-3
-5
J217-12 PSTYP
FSRTH
RLD
FSRDE
J217-1
-2
-8
J217-11 /RLDSNS
/FSRD1
/FSRD2
J217-6
-7
47
+5V
DA21
DA20
DC15
DC16
DC12
P12/
AN12
P15
CPU
IC201
44
FSRL1 J10-2
-3
FSRL2
-4
FSRN2
-1
FSRN1
DB21
48
P30/T00
P33/T11
P34/T12
Q206
+24V
Safety
circuit
Triac drive
circuit
Relay
drive
circuit
Low-voltage
power supply
circuit
AMP
+5V
Triac drive
circuit
Current
transformer
Inverter control circuit

Power supply unit
Figure 5-102
5-3 P
2.
Protective function
The printer has three protection functions to prevent abnormal temperature rise of the fixing
roller.
The CPU monitors the thermistor voltage. If the thermistor voltage becomes lower than about
1.0V (230C), the CPU identifies the fixing unit failure, and interrupts power to the fixing unit
and reports it to the video controller.
If the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller rises abnormally and the thermistor voltage
falls below about 0.8V (235C), the safety circuit in the power supply interrupts power to the
fixing roller heater regardless of outputs from the CPU.
If the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller rises abnormally and the thermoswitch temperature exceeds 200C, the thermoswitch turns off and cuts power to the fixing roller heater.
3.
Fixing unit failure detection

The CPU assesses a fixing unit failure in the following cases and reports it to the video control-
ler.
a. Thermistor broken wire detection
The detected voltage of the thermistor is 4.6V or more when the thermistor voltage detection mode
(note) is in the error detection mode after the fixing heater is activated.
b. Maximum temperature detection
The fixing temperature rises abnormally and the temperature detected by the thermistor exceeds
about 230C, during standby or printing.
c. Warmup error detection
The fixing unit does not reach the target temperature (see Table 5-101) within 180 seconds after the
start of warm-up.
d. Broken wire detection after the fixing unit is ready
The temperature detected by the thermistor is 150C, or below during standby or printing.
e. Heater current detection
The CPU detects a fixing heater broken wire if the FIXING HEATER CURRENT SENSE signal
(FSRCT) level is same as the all heaters OFF level when the fixing main heater or/and fixing sub
heater is/are driven.
The CPU detects a fixing heater excursion if the FIXING HEATER CURRENT SENSE signal
(FSRCT) level is higher than the fixing main heater and fixing sub heater ON level when the
fixing main heater or/and fixing sub heater is/are OFF.
The CPU detects a fixing heater excursion if the FIXING HEATER CURRENT SENSE signal
(FSRCT) level is higher than the specified value when both heaters are OFF.
Note:
There are two thermistor voltage detection modes: error detection mode and normal mode. In
the error detection mode, sensitivity in the initial range (low temperature range) is increased
to improve detection accuracy. When the thermistor temperature exceeds 60C , it changes to
the normal mode.
If the CPU detects a fixing unit failure, it does the following:
1) Stops the fixing roller heater.
2) Sets the RELAY DRIVE signal (RLD) to L, and turns the relay in the power supply OFF to
interrupt the power to the fixing roller heater.
3) Reports the fixing unit failure to the video controller.
5-4 P
4.
Envelope position lever function

This printer can adjust the nip width in two steps by changing the spring pressure of the lower
fixing roller. If an envelope wrinkles after it is printed, set the envelope position lever to the
envelope position.
[2]
[1]
[1] Normal mode

[2] Envelope mode
Figure 5-103
5-5 P
II . Disassembly/
Assembly
A.
Fixing Unit
[1]
1. Fixing Unit
1) Open the pickup cover.
2) Move the locking lever [1] in the direction
of the arrow to release the fixing unit [2].
3) Lift the fixing unit slightly, and pull it to
the front to detach.
[2]
Figure 5-201
Memo:
1. When replacing the fixing unit, be
sure to check the position of the envelope lever before the work so that
it may be set to the same position after the work.
2. When replacing the fixing unit, be
sure to disconnect the power cord
from the power outlet, and wait until
the fixing unit has cooled fully before starting the work.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Normal mode
[2]
Envelope mode
Figure 5-202
5-6 P
2. Fixing Roller Heater

2) Free the two claws [1], and detach cover
[2] from the fixing unit.
[2]
[1]
Figure 5-203
3) Free the claw [3], and detach the fixing
assembly inlet guide [4] from the fixing
unit.
[4]
[3]
Figure 5-204
4) Disconnect the four connectors [5].
[5]
[5]
Figure 5-205
5-7 P
[8]
5) Free the claw [6], and detach the heater

holder [8].
6) Pull out the fixing roller heater [8] slowly
from the fixing upper roller.
[7]
[6]
Figure 5-206
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Fixing Upper Roller

Remove the fixing assembly. (See p.5-6P.)
Remove the wiring cover. (See 5-7P.)
Lift the left/right envelope lever [1].
Remove the two screws [2].
Free the claw [3]; then, while pulling the
separation lower guide [4] to the front, detach the separation upper guide [5].
[2]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[1]
Figure 5-207
6) Remove the E-ring [6] and the spring [7];
then, while pulling the separation lower
guide [8] toward the front, slide it in the
direction of the arrow to detach.
[8]
[7]
[6]
Figure 5-208
5-8 P
7)
8)
9)
10)
Remove the fixing roller heater. (See p. 5-7P.)

Remove the thermal switch. (See p. 5-12P.)
Remove the thermistor. (See p. 5-13P.)
Remove the screw [9], and detach the diode holder [10].
11) Remove the screw [11], and remove the
fixing right cover [12].
[12]
[10]
[11]
[9]
Figure 5-209
[15]
12) Remove the two screws [13] and the

screw [14], and detach the fixing left
cover [15].
[13]
[14]
Figure 5-210
13) Remove the four gears [16], and detach
the lever [17].
[16]
[16]
[16]
[16]
[17]
Figure 5-211
5-9 P

thermal switch [19].
[18]
[19]
Figure 5-212
[20]
15) Remove the screw [20], and free the four

claws [21]; then, detach the fixing roller
cover [22].
[22]
[21]
Figure 5-213
16) Remove the grounding ring [23].
[23]
Figure 5-214
5-10 P
17) Remove the C-ring [24], and detach the

gear [25].
[25]
[24]
Figure 5-215
18) Remove the insulating bushing [26], and
detach the bearing [27].
[27]
[26]
Figure 5-216
[32]
19) Remove the C-ring [28], O-ring [29], insulating bushing [30], and bearing [31];
then, detach the fixing upper roller [32].
[31]
[28]
[29]
[30]
Figure 5-217
5-11 P
4. Fixing Lower Roller

2) Remove the fixing upper roller. (See p. 5-8P.)
3) Remove the fixing lower roller [1].
[1]
Figure 5-218
5. Cleaning Roller
2) Remove the fixing lower roller. (See p. 5-12P.)
3) Remove the cleaning roller [1].
[1]
Figure 5-219
6. Thermal Switch
2) Remove the wiring cover. (See p. 5-7P.)
the lead wire; them, detach the thermal
switch [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 5-220
5-12 P
7. Thermistor
2) Remove the wiring cover. (See p. 5-7P.)
3) Remove the fixing inlet guide. (See p. 57P.)
cable [3] from the fixing left cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Figure 5-221

thermistor [5].
[4]
[5]
Points to Note During Assembly

When mounting the thermistor, check to
make sure that the detecting face of the
thermistor is in even contact with the
surface of the fixing upper roller; if not,
be sure to find out if the leaf spring is
deformed.
Figure 5-222
5-13 P
CHAPTER 6
EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
I . Control Panel
A.
Outline
The machines control panel consists of the PCBs shown in the following diagram and a liquid
crystal display LCD) having a resolution of 1280x960 dots.
Control panel
Control
Panel
inverter PCB
LCD display
PCB (LCD)
Control panel CPU PCB
Control panel
switch unit
LCD display
contrast
adjust unit
CPU
CPU
Control panel
PCB
(keys & LED)
System
Controller PCB
Figure 6-101 Functional Block Diagram
Related Service Mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LCD-CHK
Use it to check for missing dots in the LCD
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-CHK
Use it to start a check on the LEDs on the control panel
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-OFF
Use it to end a check on the LEDs on the control panel
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>KEY-CHK
Use it to start a check on key inputs
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust the coordinates of the touch panel
6-1 P
II . Upgrading
A.
Outline
The machine and its accessories may be upgraded as follows:
ADF
Reader unit
Finisher
Controller block
Printer unit
Paper deck
DC controller
PCB
Paper deck
controller
PCB
Figure 6-201 Functional Diagram
Unit
ADF
Reader unit
Controller unit
Printer unit
Finisher
Paper deck
Method
ROM replacement
DIMM replacement
HDD
: downloading
boot ROM: flash ROM replacement
DC controller PCB replacement
ROM replacement
DC controller PCB replacement
Table 6-201 Upgrading
6-2 P
B.
Downloading
The machine will provide the following functions when it is connected to a PC using a biCentronics interface:
Unit to upgrade
Controller unit
Element
Hard disk drive
Downloading
Yes
Uploading
No
Table 6-202 Additional Functions

The machine may be switched between copying and downloading/uploading modes in service
mode; for specifics, see VII. Upgrading in the System Manual.
6-3 P
III . Counters
A.
Outline
The machine is equipped with counters designed to count prints according to the type of output; all counters are non-mechanical, software counters.
To check a counter reading, press the Counter check key on the control panel so that the appropriate counter reading will appear on the control panel.
Counter Check key
Reset
Guide
C
Stop
Additional
Functions
Start
ON/OFF
Display Contrast
9
Energy Saver
ID
Transmission/Memory
Error
Figure 6-301 Counter check Key
6-4 P
B.
Incrementing the Count

The sensors related to incrementing counters are arranged as shown in the following figure:
PI3
PS1403
PS1
Figure 6-302 Arrangement of the Sensors
System
Machine
Machine + finisher
Operation
Single-sided output
Double-sided output
Single-sided output
Double-sided output
Sensor
PS1403
PS1
PI3
PS1
Remarks
Table 6-301 Sensors Used to Increment the Counts
6-5 P
IV . Fans
A.
Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes
The names and the functions of the fans used in the machine are shown in the following table
together with their associated error codes:
Notation
Name
Function
FAN1 Fixing assembly/scanner fan
2-speed control
Discharges exhaust from around the
(voltage)
Yes (24/18-V)
Error
code
E807
fixing assembly and the scanner unit.
Discharges exhaust from inside of Yes (24/18-V)

the printer assembly power supply.
Draws air to the video controller. Yes (24/18-V)
Electrical unit fan
Discharges exhaust from around Yes (24/18-V)
Fixing assembly fan
the fixing assembly.
Multiple manual feed tray fan Cools the area around the toner cartridge. Yes (24/18-V)
Controller power supply cooling Discharges exhaust from the
None (24V)
fan
controller unit power supply.
FAN2 Power supply cooling fan
E804
FAN3
FAN4
None
E805
FAN5
FAN6
E826
E827
Table 6-401 Fans

The location of each fan and its direction of air current is as follows:
FAN4
FAN1
FAN6
FAN3
FAN5
FAN2
Figure 6-401 Location and Direction of Current
6-6 P
B.
The following is a block diagram of the circuit of each fan and the sequence of operations used:
DC controller PCB
P121
Multiple manual
feed fan
drive circuit
53
J229-1
-2
-3
FAN5D
/FAN5S
GND
J216-1
-2
-3
FAN2D
/FAN2S
GND
J210-1
-2
-3
FAN3D
/FAN3S
GND
J208-1
-2
-3
FAN1D
/FAN1S
GND
J225-1
-2
-3
FAN4D
/FAN4S
GND
J1023-2
-1
-3
FANON
FANS
+24V
J34-3
-2
-1
J35-1
-2
-3
Multiple manual
FAN5 feed fan
IC201
(CUP)
P120
P61
DC14
DA04
52
Fixing assembly/
FAN2 scanner fan
37
J12-3
-2
-1
J13-1
-2
-3
FAN3 Electrical unit fan
124
64
FAN1 Power supply fan
IC202
(G.A.)
DA05
DA03
Fan drive
circuit
65
61
J25-3
-2
-1
J26-1
-2
-3
FAN4 Fixing assembly fan

IC2(CPU)
IC61(G.A.)
P80/D8 90
Fan drive
circuit
PB2 39
+24V
Controller power
FAN6 supply fan
Figure 6-402 Circuit Diagram
6-7 P

,

,

,,,

,
Power switch ON
(unit: sec)
Wait
Standby
Initial
rotation
Print
last
rotation
Standby
30
(approx.)
Fan motor (FAN1 to 4)
Single/double-sided
15
(approx.)
Fan motor (FAN5)
Single-sided
Fan motor (FAN5)
Double-sided
Fan motor (FAN6)
Single/double-sided
half-speed rotation
full-speed rotation
Figure 6-403 Sequence of Operations
6-8 P
V . Power Supply
A.
Outline
The machines DC power supply system is supplied by the following two types of power
supply PCBs:
Function
PCB
Controller unit DC power supply Generates DC power from AC
power
PCB
Protects against over-current
Protects against over-voltage
Generates DC power from AC
Printer unit DC power supply
power
PCB
Protects against over-current
Protects against over-voltage
Remarks
Supplies DC power to the
controller unit
Supplies power to the printer

unit
Table 6-501 Power Supply PCBs
6-9 P
The following is a block diagram showing how power is distributed:
Network
board
FAX board
(accessory)
J1022
Relay PCB
1 J110
Filter
PCB
HDD
Image
processor
PCB
Relay
PCB
EEPROM
board
LCD
Key PCB
Backlight
inverter PCB
J1022
Control panel PCB
Printer
controller
PCB
Relay
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Fixing
assembly
J1022
SRAM
board
Main controller PCB

5 6
5V
5V
5V
Reader
controller
PCB
CCD
Accessories
power
supply PCB
DADF-C1
Main power
supply
switch
24V
5V
5V
5V
Reader unit
SPOWER
5V
3.3V
Controller unit power supply PCB
5V
Main power
switch
24V
3.3V
24V
Power Off
12V
5V
12V
AC Down
3.3V
24V
PDL
board
Controller unit
power supply fan
Leakage
AC input breaker
ELCB
Leakage
AC input breaker
ELCB
5V
5V
Filter
PCB
Reader unit power

supply PCB
5V
5V
3.3V
6-10 P
12V
5V
12V
3.3V
3.3V
5V
24V
3.3V
5V
Figure 6-501 Distribution of Power
B.
1.
Outline
When the main power switch is turned on, the controller unit power supply PCB turns on to
turn on the system controller PCB, which is designed to send signals (RELAYON, POWERON) to
the relay of the printer unit power supply PCB and the reader unit power supply PCB; these PCBs
then turn on in response to the signals.
AC input
Filter
PCB
POWERON
Printer unit
power supply
PCB
Controller unit power

supply PCB
Main power
supply
Leakage switch
breaker
J1022
24V
RELAYON*
24V
12V
5V
3.3V
5 6
Relay
PCB
ELCB2
Reader unit
power supply
PCB
Relay
Main power
supply
switch
Leakage
AC input breaker
J1022
Filter
PCB
Reader unit
ELCB1
Figure 6-502 Sequence of Operations (power-on)
6-11 P
Power Supply at Main Power Switch ON
Leakage
AC input breaker
Filter
PCB
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
Control panel PCB
5V
Reader
controller
PCB
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Rely
PCB
Reader unit power

supply PCB
Relay
ON
Main power
supply
switch
ELCB2
Leakage
AC input breaker
Accessories
power
supply PCB
5V
5V
24V
Printer
controller
PCB
DADF-C1
24V
CCD
J1022
3.3V
24V
Power Off
24V
5V
12V
Fixing
assembly
unit
Backlight
inverter PCB
5V
3.3V
5V
SRAM Memory
board PCB
Main power
switch
Key PCB

J1022
5 6
J1022
3.3V
AC Down
24V
Controller unit
power supply fan
Image
processor
PCB
3.3V
12V
5V
3.3V
Relay PCB
LCD
SPOWER
HDD
12V
5V
12V
5V
FAX board
(accessory)
Network
board
3.3V
5V
PDL
board
3.3V
5V
2.
Filter
PCB
Reader unit
ELCB1
: destination of power supply
Figure 6-503 Power Supply System
6-12 P
Power Supply at Main Power Switch ON/Control Panel Switch OFF
5V
EEPROM
board
Control panel PCB

5V
5V
SRAM
board
Backlight
inverter PCB
5V
5V
3.3V
12V
5V
Key PCB
5V
Image
processor
PCB
Relay PCB
3.3V
LCD
3.3V
5V
HDD
12V
5V
12V
FAX board
(accessory)
5V
Network
board
3.3V
5V
PDL
board
3.3V
5V
3.
CCD
Controller unit
power supply fan
Leakage
AC input breaker
Filter
PCB
Relay
PCB
5V
24V
Accessories
power
supply PCB
5V
Reader unit power
supply PCB
Relay OFF
Main power
supply
switch
ELCB2
Leakage
AC input breaker
DADF-C1
Reader
controller
PCB
24V
5V
3.3V
Printer
controller
PCB
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Main power
supply
switch
Fixing
assembly
J1022
SPOWER
J1022
24V
Power Off
12V
24V
5V
5 6
3.3V
AC Down
24V
J1022
Filter
PCB
Reader unit
ELCB1
Figure 6-504 Power Supply System
6-13 P
4.
Printer unit DC Power Supply PCB

The following shows an outline of how the power supply relates to the printer unit DC power
supply PCB:
Power supply block

Circuit
breaker
Noise
filter
Current
transformer
To fixing heater
DC controller PCB
Relay
Power
switch
(S101)
Fixed
to ON
Current
detection
resistance
Voltage
detection
circuit
Rectification
diode
Rectification
circuit
Switching
FET
Triac
Triac
Inductor
Control
IC
Inverter
control
circuit
Noise
filter
+5V
Safety
circuit
Photocoupler
Over-current
detection
circuit
Photocoupler
Heater
drive
circuit
Anti-rush
current
circuit
FSRTH
RLD
/FSRD1
/FSRD2
/FSRDE
/FSRCT
SUPSLT
/RLDSNS
TSWIN
TSWOUT
Rectification
current
Switching
FET
Smoothing
circuit
Smoothing
circuit
Switching
FET
Transformer
Rectification/
smoothing
circuit
+5V
BD PCB
Sensor
+5V
Control
panel
+24VA
Scanner
motor
+24VB
High-voltage
power supply
+24VA
Solenoid
Clutch
+24V
/REMT24
+5V
Switching
FET
+24VB
Switching
FET
Transformer
Control
IC
Laser driver
Photocoupler
Power
supply
fuse
Photocoupler
+5V
+5 V voltage
control
photocoupler
Smoothing
circuit
Main motor
+3.3V
Switch/
sensor PCB
Current/voltage
detection
circuit
Door switch
(SW1401)
+24VB
Error voltage
latch photocoupler
Low-voltage power supply circuit
+24VA
Figure 6-505 Power Supply System and the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB
6-14 P
C.
Rated Outputs of the Controller Unit DC Power Supply PCB

Output (V)
Connector No.
3.3
J102-1
3.3
J102-2
J102-3
5
J101-1
Output voltage
tolerance (%)
Rated current (A)
3.4V2%
3.4V4%
5.2V4%
3.0
4.1
3.3
4.1
2.2
6.5
Over-voltage protection
5
24
12
J101-2
J104-1
J103-1
J101-3
J101-4
5.2V4% 12V10% 24V10%
3.0
6.5
activation value (V)

Over-current protection
activation value (A)
2.5*
18.9
0.9
0.4
28.2
0.8
7.3 A as a sum of the 7.2 A as a sum of the

outputs of J102-1, -2, outputs of J101-1, -2,
-3, and -4
and -3
Note: The above applies only to the following: if the 100/120-V model, the input must be 85
to 132 V; if the 230-V model, the input must be 187 to 264 V.
*The 12 V over-current protective mechanism will remain disabled for about 5 sec
from the start of output in consideration of procuring current needed to start up the
hard disk.
Table 6-502 Rated Outputs
D.
Protective Mechanisms
The controller unit DC power supply PCB and the printer unit DC power supply PCB are
equipped with the following protective mechanisms:
[1] Over-current protective mechanism
[2] Over-voltage protective mechanism
When any of these mechanisms turn on, all outputs of the DC power supply PCB will automatically be turned off.
To reset the machine, turn off the main power switch, remove the cause, leave the machine
alone for about 3 min, and the turn on the main power switch.
6-15 P
E.
Backup Battery
The machine is equipped with lithium batteries to provide backup current in the event that its
power plug is disconnected: on the system controller PCB and the SRAM board.
1.

Uses
Life
Replacement
After replacement
of PCB
To drive the machine internal clock

To store the job counter history
5 yr (approx., with the power plug disconnected)
Through replacement of the main controller PCB (cannot be recharged)
None
Table 6-503 Functions of the Battery

2.
SRAM Board
Use
Life
Replacement
After replacement of PCB
Stores FAX settings

Stores image file information stored in Boxes
Stores file information on images not yet transmitted
Stores all settings of user mode

Stores all settings of service mode
5 yr (approx., with the power plug disconnected)
Through replacement of the SRAM (cannot be recharged)
Execute SRAM clear in service mode
Table 6-504 Functions of the Battery
6-16 P
VI . Others
A.
Sleep Mode
1.
Outline
Sleep mode is designed to reduce the power consumption during standby (only the control
panel power switch is turned off). When the mode is selected, the destinations of power supply are
limited.
The machine automatically enters sleep mode when standby state continues for a specific period of time. The time interval may be changed in user mode, and the destinations of power supply
may also be selected in service mode (as to prevent condensation in a cold area).
Related User Mode Items
330 min, 1 to 24 hr
Changing auto sleep time
(in units of 1-hr, with 0 disabling the mode)

Factory setting: 2 hr
Related Service Mode Items
COPIER>OPTION>USER>SLEEP-MD
Use it to select the destinations of power supply in sleep

mode (e.g., so as to prevent condensation in a cold area).
0: normal (factory setting)

1: anti-condensation (weak)
2: anti condensation (strong)
Reference:
100-V model 120-V model 230-V model
Power consumption in standby

Power consumption (wh) in sleep mode; service mode setting at 0
234
42
84
89
233
46
84
90
243
76
89
94
6-17 P
2.
a.
Operations
Shift from Standby to Sleep Mode
When the timer on the system controller PCB identifies the passage of a specific interval, it
starts to limit the power supplied to each PCB.
Power Supply in Sleep Mode (factory setting)
5V
5V
Reader
controller
PCB
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Relay
PCB
Reader unit power

supply PCB
Relay
OFF
Main power
supply
switch
ELCB
Leakage
AC input breaker
Accessories
power
supply PCB
5V
24V
5V
24V
Power Off
Printer
controller
PCB
DADF-C1
24V
CCD
J1022
3.3V
Filter
PCB
5V
5V
Control panel PCB

5V
3.3V
5V
3.3V
1
J110
Main power
supply
Leakage switch
AC input breaker
Fixing
assembly
Backlight
inverter PCB
EEPROM
board
5V
SRAM
board
5V
Image
processor
PCB
24V
5V
12V
AC Down
24V
Controller unit
power supply fan
Key PCB

J1022
5 6
J1022
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
Relay PCB
LCD
SPOWER
HDD
12V
5V
FAX board
(accessory)
Network
board
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
PDL
board
3.3V
5V
b.
Filter
PCB
Reader unit
ELCB
Figure 6-601 Power Supply in Sleep Mode
6-18 P
Power Supply in Sleep Mode (service mode settings at 1)
3.3V
5V
Backlight
inverter PCB
5V
5V
Key PCB
EEPROM
board
Control panel PCB

5V
5V
SRAM
board
Controller unit
power supply fan
1
J110
Main power
supply
Leakage switch
AC input breaker
Filter
PCB
5V
Reader
controller
PCB
Relay
PCB
Accessories
power
supply PCB
5V
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Reader unit PCB
Relay
OFF
Main power
supply
switch
ELCB
Leakage
AC input breaker
24V
Printer
controller
PCB
5V
Fixing
assembly
J1022
SPOWER
J1022
3.3V
24V
Power Off
24V
5V
12V
5 6
3.3V
AC Down
24V
DADF-C1
CCD
Main controller PCB

J1022
24V
5V
Image
processor
PCB
3.3V
12V
5V
Relay PCB
3.3V
LCD
5V
HDD
12V
5V
FAX board
(accessory)
Network
board
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
PDL
board
3.3V
5V
c.
Filter
PCB
Reader unit
ELCB
Figure 6-602 Power Supply in Sleep Mode
6-19 P
d.
Power Supply in Sleep Mode (service mode setting at 2)

If the service mode setting is set to 2, each power supply provides the loads indicated in the
figure as long as 2 hours from a specific point in time, thereby preventing condensation. At the end
of the 2-hour period, sleep mode will automatically switch to the state initiated when the service
setting is set to 1.
The time interval used to start a mechanism against condensation may be set on the screen
appearing when the following selections are made in service mode:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>SLEEP-MD.
Caution:
The use of this function requires setting of a time in user mode (date/time under timer set).
Be sure to turn off and then on the printer unit main power switch after changing the setting in
service mode (COPIER>OPTION>USER>SLEEP-MD).
DADF-C1
5V
5V
Reader
controller
PCB
Accessories
power
supply PCB
5V
5V
24V
Printer
controller
PCB
24V
CCD
J1022
3.3V
24V
Power Off
5V
5V
Control panel PCB

5V
3.3V
5V
3.3V
Fixing
assembly
Backlight
inverter PCB
Control panel power supply switch
EEPROM
board
5V
SRAM
board
5V
Image
processor
PCB
24V
5V
12V
AC Down
24V
Key PCB
Main controller PCB

J1022
5 6
J1022
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
Relay PCB
LCD
SPOWER
HDD
12V
5V
12V
5V
FAX board
(accessory)
Network
board
3.3V
5V
3.3V
5V
PDL
board
Controller unit
power supply fan
J110
Printer unit power

supply PCB
Reader unit power

supply PCB
Turns on
by timer
Main power
supply
Leakage switch
breaker
AC input
Filter
PCB
Relay
PCB
Relay
ON
Main power
supply
switch
ELCB
Leakage
AC input breaker
Filter
Reader Unit
ELCB
Figure 6-603 Power Supply in User Mode
6-20 P
B.
Silent Mode
Silent mode is designed to keep the scanner motor at rest while the machine is in standby.
Silent mode shift time interval
None; 1* to 9 min (in 1-min increments)

*Factory setting.
C.
Power Save Mode
Power save mode is designed to limit the destinations of power supply while the machine is in
standby, thereby reducing the power consumption. The rate of saving may be changed in user
mode.
The use of power save mode changes the time used by the machine to warm up as follows:
When set to -66%, about 90 sec.
Changing power save mode
-66%*, no return time (no saving)

*Factory setting
Reference:
100-V model 120-V model 230-V model
Power consumption (wh) in standby
Power consumption in power save mode (wh)
-66%
234
84
233
89
243
117
6-21 P
VII . Disassembly/
Assembly
A.
External Covers
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Upper cover unit

Face-down tray
Upper cover
Right rear cover
Multifeeder tray
Pickup unit cover
Duplex unit cover
Front cover
Delivery cover unit
Left lower cover
Left rear cover
Rear cover
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Figure 6-701
Remove the covers as needed when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of the
machine.
Those covers which may be detached on
their own by mere removal of mounting screw
are omitted form the discussions.
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]
Figure 6-702
6-22 P
1. Removing the Face-Down Tray

1) Open the upper cover [1].
2) Holding the knob [2], remove the fixing
member [3].
3) Close the upper cover, and remove the
face-down tray [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
Figure 6-703
2. Front Cover
1) Remove the upper cassette.
3) Open the duplex unit door [1], and remove
the three screws [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-704
6-23 P
4) Open the delivery cover unit [3], and free

the claw [4].
[4]
[3]
Figure 6-705
5) Open the pickup unit door [5], and free the

claw [6] to detach the front cover [7].
[6]
[5]
[7]
Figure 6-706
6-24 P
3. Removing the Upper Cover Unit

1) Remove the face-down unit.
[1]
Figure 6-707
3) Open the delivery cover unit, and remove
the two screws [2].
[2]
Figure 6-708
4) While pulling ht grip [3] toward the front,
detach the upper cover unit [4].
[4]
[3]
Figure 6-709
6-25 P
4. Rear Cover
2) Open the pickup unit cover.
3) Remove the four screws [1], and free the
claw [2] to detach the right rear cover [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Figure 6-710
4) Remove the eight screws [4], and detach
the rear cover [5].
[4]
[5]
[4]
[4]
Figure 6-711
6-26 P
5. Removing the Delivery Cover Unit

1) Open the delivery cover unit.
2) Detach the shaft [1] used to hold the delivery cover unit in place from the printer
unit.
[1]
PIN
Caution:
The pin at the tip of the shaft tends to slip
off. Take care not to lose it.
3) Lift the delivery cover unit [2], and detach
its right side and then its left side.
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-712
[1]
6. Removing the Multifeeder Tray

2) Remove the two fixing members [1] (left,
right).
3) While spreading the hinge assembly [2] of
the multifeeder tray, remove the
multifeeder tray [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Figure 6-713
6-27 P
7. Removing the Right Cover Unit

cassette.
3) Remove the right rear cover.
4) Remove the hinge and the four screws [2];
then, detach the right cover unit [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-714
5) Free the two claws [4], and remove the

right cover unit [5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 6-715
6-28 P
8. Removing the Left Rear Cover

1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Open the delivery cover unit.
the controller unit [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-716
[3]
4) Remove the six screws [3], and detach the

left rear cover [4].
[4]
[3]
Figure 6-717
6-29 P
9. Removing the Left Lower Cover

cassette.
2) Remove the delivery cover unit.
4) Free the two claws [2], and detach the left
lower cover [3].
[1]
Figure 6-718
6-30 P
B.
Control Panel
[2]

the harness cover [2].
[1]
Figure 6-719

the control panel front lower cover [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
Figure 6-720
6-31 P

the control panel cover [6].
[6]
[5]
Figure 6-721
[8]
4) Remove the two screws [7], and disconnect the connector [8].
[7]
Figure 6-722
[10]
5) Remove the two screws [9], and lift the

control panel [10] to detach.
[9]
Figure 6-723
6-32 P
C.
LCD Unit
1) Remove the control panel.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the rear
hinge cover [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-724
the hinge cover [4].
[3]
[4]
Figure 6-725

the rear cover [6].
[5]
[6]
Figure 6-726
6-33 P

the grounding sheet [8].
[7]
[8]
[8]
Figure 6-727
[9]
6) Remove the 11 screws [9], and detach the

metal plate [10].
[10]
[9]
[9]
[9]
Figure 6-728
7) Free the cable guide [11].
[11]
Figure 6-729
6-34 P
[12]
[13]
Figure 6-730
[14]
9) Disconnect the five connectors [13].
Figure 6-731
[15]
10) Remove the 11 screws [14], and detachthe

LCD unit [15] together with the metal
plate.
[16]
[15]
[15]
Figure 6-732
[17]

the LCD unit [17] from the metal plate.
[18]
[17]
Figure 6-733
6-35 P
D.
Motors/Fans
1. Main Motor
PCB. (See p. 3-8P.)
the four screws [2]; then, detach the main
motor [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
Figure 6-734
2. Fixing/Laser Scanner Unit Fan
1) Remove the right cover and the rear cover.
the delivery assembly upper frame [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 6-735
[3]
Figure 6-736
6-36 P
[4]
Figure 6-737
5) Free the harness [5] from the harness

guide [7].
6) Free the claw [7], and detach the fan duct
[8].
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
Figure 6-738
7) Remove the two screws [9], and remove
the fixing/laser scanner unit fan [10].
[9]
[10]
Figure 6-739
6-37 P
3. Removing the Power Supply Fan

1) Remove the right cover and the rear cover.
[1]
Figure 6-740
[2]
3) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the

power supply fan.
[2]
Figure 6-741
4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Removing the Controller Unit Fan

Remove the right cover and the rear cover.
Remove the left rear cover.
Disconnect the connector [1].
Remove the two screws, and detach the base
[3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 6-742
6-38 P
5) Free the two claws [4], and detach the

controller unit fan [5].
[4]
[5]
Figure 6-743
5. Fixing Unit Fan
3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the fan
grounding plate [3].
4) Free the four claws [4], and detach the fixing unit fan [5].
[4]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Figure 6-744
6. Multifeeder Tray Pickup Unit Fan
(See p. 4-40P.)
3) Remove the screw [2], and free the claw
[3]; then, detach the multifeeder tray
pickup unit fan [4] together with the duct.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
Figure 6-745
6-39 P
E.
PCBs
[2]
1. DC Controller PCB
PCB. (See p. 3-8P.)
2) Disconnect the 15 connectors [1].
3) Remove the two screws [2], and remove
the two screws [3].
4) Free the claw [4], and detach the DC controller PCB [5].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[2]
Figure 6-746
[4]
2. Switch/Sensor PCB
1) Remove the upper cover.
2) Remove the right rear cover and the rear
cover.
3) Remove the left rear cover.
duct [3].
5) Remove the four screws [4].
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-747
6-40 P

the shielding plate [8].
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-748
[10]
[11]
7) Remove the DC controller PCB. (See p. 641P.)

8) Remove the three screws [9].
9) Free the claw [10], and detach the DC
controller PCB [11].
[9]
Figure 6-749
10) Disconnect the connector [12], and remove the two screws [13]; then, slide out
the switch/sensor PCB [14].
Disconnect the connector [15], and detach
the switch/sensor PCB [14].
[12]
[14]
[13]
[15]
Figure 6-750
6-41 P
3.
Cassette Paper Size Detection

PCB (upper, lower)
cassette.
2) Remove the power supply unit. (See p. 643P.)
the screw [2]; then, detach the cassette paper size detection cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 6-751
[5]
[4]
4) Disconnect the connectors [4] form the

PCBs, and remove the three screws [5];
then, detach the upper cassette paper size
detection PCB [6] and the lower cassette
paper size detection PCB [6].
[6]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Figure 6-752
6-42 P
4. Power Supply Unit

1) Remove the left rear cover and the rear
cover.
duct [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Figure 6-753
4) Remove the five screws [5].
[4]
[5]
[5]
Figure 6-754
[6]
Figure 6-755
6-43 P

the power supply fan [9].
the power supply unit [10].
[8]
[10]
[7]
[9]
Figure 6-756
6-44 P
CONTROLLER
CONTENTS
Contents
I.
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Basic Operations .......................... 1-1C

Functional Construction ............... 1-1C
Outline of Electrical Circuitry...... 1-2C
Outline ..................................... 1-2C
System Controller PCB ........... 1-2C
Image Processor PCB .............. 1-2C
Network Interface PCB............ 1-2C
PDL PCB ................................. 1-2C
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) .......... 1-2C
RAM PCB ................................ 1-2C
8.
C.
1.
2.
II.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Memory PCB ........................... 1-2C

Start-Up Sequence ........................ 1-3C
Outline ..................................... 1-3C
Start-Up Sequence ................... 1-4C
Connecting to the Network .......... 1-6C
Outline .......................................... 1-6C
TCP/IP .......................................... 1-7C
AppleTalk ..................................... 1-8C
NetWare ........................................ 1-9C
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE PROCESSING

I.
Flow of Image Data ...................... 2-1C

A. Flow of Image Data During
Copying ....................................... 2-1C
1. Local Copying ........................ 2-1C
2. Remote Copying ..................... 2-2C
3. Tandem Copying .................... 2-3C
B. Transmission ............................... 2-4C
1. Outline ..................................... 2-4C
2. Flow of Image Data
(during transmission) ............ 2-5C
C. Print .............................................. 2-6C

1. Flow of Print Jobs .................. 2-6C
2. TCP/IP ..................................... 2-7C
3. NetWare .................................. 2-8C
4. AppleTalk................................ 2-9C
5. Processing Print Data ........... 2-10C
II. Digital Image Processing ......... 2-11C
1. Outline ................................... 2-11C
2. Read Image Processing
Block ..................................... 2-12C
3. Smoothing ............................. 2-12C
CHAPTER 3 USER SOFTWARE

A. Outline .......................................... 3-1C
B. Printer Driver ................................ 3-1C
C. Utilities ......................................... 3-3C
1.
2.
3.
NetSpot .................................... 3-3C

NetSpot Job Monitor ............... 3-4C
NetSpot Console ...................... 3-5C
C1
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I.
Disassmbly and Assembly ............ 4-1C

A. Controller Assembly ..................... 4-1C
B. Hard Disk Drive ........................... 4-1C
C. PDL PCB ...................................... 4-2C
C2
D.
E.
F.
G.
Removing the Network PCB ........ 4-2C

Relay PCB .................................... 4-2C
System Controller PCB ................ 4-3C
Image Processor PCB ................... 4-4C
CHAPTER 1
BASIC OPERATIONS
I . Basic Operations
A.
Functional Construction
The machine may be broadly divided into the following functional blocks, with the controller
shown in the shaded block:
Reader unit
Control panel
HDD
Image processor
PCB
Relay PCB
PDL
PCB
System controller
PCB
Network interface
PCB
DIMM
RAM
PCB
Memory
PCB
Printer unit
Figure 1-101
1-1 C
B.
Outline of Electrical Circuitry
1.
Outline
The major electrical mechanisms of the controller unit are controlled by the CPU on the system
controller PCB; the following are the major ICs of the system controller PCB and the PCBs found
in the controller unit:
2.

Name
CPU
Main memory
SRAM
ROM
Control and function

Controls copying sequence
Controls printing sequence
Controls transmission sequence
Controls Box image files
Controls page memory
Controls service mode
Controls the control panel, network interface, and hard disk drive
Temporarily stores program data and image data (page memory)
Stores machine-related data
(e.g., service mode, user mode settings; backed up by lithium battery)
Contains boot programs
3.
Image Processor PCB

Processes input images from the reader unit
Processes output images to the printer unit
4.
Network Interface PCB

Controls communication with an external network
5.
PDL PCB
Converts print commands sent through the network interface PCB into image data that may be
printed.
6.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

Sores system programs
Temporarily stores image data for copying, printing, and transmitting
Sores iamge data for the Box function
7.
RAM PCB
Stoers machine-related data (e.g, user data; backed up by lithium battery)
8.
Memory PCB
Stores machine data
1-2 C
C.
Start-Up Sequence
1.
Outline
The system program used to control the machine is stored on the hard disk. The CPU located
on the system controller PCB uses the system program by calling into the main memory mounted
to the DIMM socket of the system controller PCB.
This is why it takes a while before the control panel becomes ready for use after its soft power
switch is tuned on.
When the power is turned on, the control panel will show the following screen; the state of
start-up sequence is shown on the screen by means of a progress bar.
Start-Up Screen
Progress bar
Figure 1-102
1-3 C
2.
Start-Up Sequence
When the soft power switch on the control panel is turned on, the CPU on the system controller
PCB executes the self-diagnostic program stored in the ROM.
The program is deigned to check the condition of the main memory and the hard disk drive; if
it finds an error, it will indicate the fact on the control panel in the form of an error code.
Main memory (DIMM)

System
area
Relay PCB
Image data
area
CPU
HDD
Self-diagnostic
program
Boot
program
ROM
Access to the program during execuction
Figure 1-103
Related Error Code

E606
Indicates that there is an error on the hard disk.
E737
Indicates that the main memory is faulty.
1-4 C
When self-diagnosis ends normally, the boot program also stored in the ROM is started. The
program is designed to read the system program from the hard disk and write to the system area.
When the write operation ends, the system program in the main memory is started to initialize
various parts, at the end of which the normal control screen will appear on the control panel and, at
the same time, the Start key LED changes from red to green to indicate that the machine is ready to
accept a job.
The machines system program consists of multiple modules, and those modules needed at
each specific point in time are called into the system area of the main memory for use.
Main memory
Image
data area
Relay PCB
System
area
CPU
HDD
Self-diagnosis
program
Boot
program
ROM
: access to the program during excution.
: flow of the system program.
Figure 1-104
1-5 C
II . Connecting to the Network

A.
Outline
The machine is equipped with a network PCB which complies with Ethernet standards, offering an RJ-45 connector for 10Base-T/100Base-TX.
The board is capable of automatically identifying 10Base-T and 100Base-TX, switching itself
to suit the type of network to which the machine is connected.
RJ-45 connector
100Base-TX
category 5UTP cable
Network PCB
10Base-T
category 3UTP cable or
category 5UTP cable
Figure 1-201
1-6 C
B.
TCP/IP
The Internet, intranet, and UNIX networks use TCP/IP as the network protocol. Further, Windows NT networks also often use TCP/IP.
The use of TCP/IP requires that the machines IP address and the subnet mask of the network
to which the machine is connected be set; if outside users are expected to use the machine, gateway
addresses must also be set.
An IP address may be set either automatically or manually. For automatic acquisition, the
machine supports three types of protocols: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol),
BOOTP (BOOT Protocol), RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol).
To take advantage of the function, there must be a DHCP server, BOOTP server, or RARP
server on the network with appropriate settings made.
The function enables central control of the IP addresses of the devices connected to the network. If automatic acquisition is enabled, the board will request the server to send the appropriate
IP address when the machine turns on and logs onto the network; in response, the server will send
the IP address assigned to the board and other data.
(Advise the users system administrator to set a fixed IP address for the machine if the use of
the IP address auto acquisition is wanted.)
To set IP address/gateway address: user mode>system control setting>network setting>TCP/IP
setting
RARP server
BOOTP server
DHCP server
Gateway
(router)
To other network
Requests IP address
Provide IP
address data
Figure 1-202
1-7 C
C.
AppleTalk
A Macintosh network uses AppleTalk as its standard protocol, which may be any of three
depending on the type of network used: LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and TokenTalk. The board supports
EtherTalk, and uses PAP (Printer Access Protocol) for AppleTalk print services.
The board supports EtherTalk Phase II, and allows the selection of the zone to which the machine belongs if the network is zoned for AppleTalk.
To set AppleTalk:
user mode>system control setting>AppleTalk setting
Ethernet
Protocol: AppleTalk (EtherTalk Phase II)
Figure 1-203
1-8 C
D.
NetWare
A network based on NetWare from Novell uses IPX as its protocol. The board is designed to
support bindery mode used under NetWare 3.12 and NDS (NetWare Directory Service) used under
NetWare 4.X an 5.0.
To set NetWare: user mode>system control setting>network setting>NetWare
Network Based on Bindary Mode

NetWare file server
NetWare
NetWare
(print server)
client
client
Ethernet
Protocol: IPX
Print service: Bindary Pserver, Rprinter,
NDS Pserver, Nprinter
NetWare
client
NetWare
client
NetWare file
server (print server)
Network Based on NDS
Figure 1-204
1-9 C
CHAPTER 2
IMAGE PROCESSING
I . Flow of Image Data

A.
Flow of Image Data During Copying
1.
Local Copying
Local copying occurs when the machine is selected as the printer on its control panel.
Data flows as shown in local copying mode. All data is first written to the hard disk, and is read
and sent to the printer unit page by page until all copying jobs end; in other words, steps (6) through
(10) in the figure are repeated until all jobs are done.
Reader unit
Main memory
HDD
(5)
Compressed
data
(6)
Compressed
data
Page memory
for reading
(1) 8-bit
Image processor
PCB
(2)
Read-in image
Binary
processing block
(3)
Black-and-white
Binary
compression
(4)
circuit
Compressed data Binary

(7)
Compressed
data
Compressed data
Page memory
for printing
extension circuit
(8)
Binary data
Compressed data
Binary data
Print image
(9)
processing
block
Binary data
Main memory
(10) Binary data

Printer unit
Figure 2-101
2-1 C
2.
Remote Copying
Remote copying occurs when another machine is selected as the printer on the control panel; in
it, image data read by the transmitting side is sent to the output side over the network for printing.
At this time, the image data will be accompanied by such data as on the number of pages,
sorting/stapling instructions, and job information entered from the control panel.
All data is first written to the hard disk on the receiving side, and is read page by page until all
copying jobs are done for transmission to the printer unit of the output machine.
In other words, steps (12) through (16) are repeated inside the output machine until all jobs are
done. To make use of this function, the IP address of the output machine must be registered making
the following selections: user mode>copier mode>remote copy print.
Reference:
If the auto acquisition function for IP address (DHCP, BOOTP, RARP) is used in the user's
network environment, the IP address of the machine is at time forced to change, disabling the
selected machine to serve as the printer of remote copying.
Transmission side
Main memory
Page memory
for reading
HDD
Compressed data
Compressed data
Binary
Main
memory
Work memory
(4)
for transmission
Network
PCB
(1)8-bit
(4)
(5)
(6)
Reader unit
(3)
(7)

Comrpessed data
HUB Network
(2)
Image
processing
block for reading
Binary
Black-and-white
image
Compressed compression
circuit
data
Image processor PCB
(8)
(9) Compressed System controller PCB

Image processor PCB
data
Main memory
(13)
(10)
Extension
Network
Work
memory
Compressed
circuit
PCB
for
data
transmission
(11)
Print image
processing
Main memory
block
(12)
(14)
Print page
(16)
(15)
memory
Printer unit
HDD
Output side
Figure 2-102
2-2 C
3.
Tandem Copying
Tandem copying occurs when an aditional amchien is selected besides the machine on the
printer selection scren; intit, the image read by the machine is printed on the machine and the other
machine, dividing the data automaically so that the highst rate of otupout may be attained.
All image data is writeen to the hard disks of both machines, and is read page by page for
transmission to the output printer units until all copying jobs are done. In other words, steps (6)
through (10) and steps (15) through (19) are repeated on both mahcines.
To make ufse of the function, the following selectiongs must be made, thereby registering the
IP address other machine: user mode>copier use>remote copy printer.
Reference:
If the auto acquisition function for IP address (DHCP, BOOTP, RARP) is used in the user's
network environment, the IP address of the machine is at time forced to change, disabling the
selected machine to serve as the printer of remote copying.
Reader unit
(1) 8-bit
System controller PCB Image

Main memory processor PCB
HDD
(5)
Compressed
data
Page
memory
for
reading
(3)
Black-and-white
compression
Compressed circuit
(4)
(11)
Compressed
data
Page
memory
for
printing
Compressed
data
Binary
data
(6)
Read image
processing unit
Binary
(7)
Compressed
data
Network
PCB
(2)
Binary
Compressed
data (8)
Binary
data
(9)
Binary
data
Main memory
Extension
circuit
Compression
data
Binary data
Print image
processing block
(10)
Binary
data
Printer unit
HUB
(12)
Network
Compressed
data
Network
PCB
System controller PCB Image processor PCB
(13)
Compressed
data
Main memory
(16)
Page
memory for
transmission
(14)
(15)
HDD
Main memory
Print page (17)
(18)
memory
Extension
circuit
Print image
processing block
(19)
Printer unit
Output side
Figure 2-103
2-3 C
B.
Transmission
1.
Outline
The transmission function is used to transmit images scanned by the machine's reader unit to an
external device over a telephone line.
The machine is capable of transmitting images in either of the following five modes:
E-Mail
It sends a scanned image as an attachment to an e-mail message to a computer connected to
the network.
I-Fax
It sends a scanned image as an attachment to an e-mail message to an I-fax machine connected to the network.
File
It sends a scanned image as a file to a file server on the network.
Database
It sends a scanned image to a database on the network. To take advantage of this function,
special software (accessory) and an exclusive database server will be required.
Fax
It sends a scanned image to a destination over a telephone line. To take advantage of this
function, a fax board (accessory) will be required.
2-4 C
2.
Flow of Image Data (during transmission)

In the case of e-mail, I-fax, file, or database, image data takes the route shown in the figures to
reach the network through the network interface PCB. Note that color and black-and-white images
take different flows inside the machine and use different methods of compression:
black-and-white transmission: MMR
color transmission:
JPEG
Flow of Data (black-and-white transmission)
Main memory
Transmission side
Binary
HDD
Compressed
data
(2)
Main
memory
Work memory
for transmission
Network
PCB
Read image
processing
block
Binary
Black-andwhite imge
Compressed compression
circuit
(7)
data
Image processor PCB

Compressed data
To network
(8)
(1) 8-bit
(4)
(5)
(6)
Reader unit
(3)
Page memory
for reading
Figure 2-104
Flow of Data (color transmission)
Transmission side
Page memory
for reading
HDD
Compressed
data
Network
PCB
(7)
Main memory
(6)
(4)
Reader unit
(3)
Main
memory
(5)
Work
memory for
transmission

Compressed data
To network
(1) 8-bit
Read image
processing
block
(2)
Compressed
data
Color image
compression
circuit
Image processor PCB
Figure 2-105
2-5 C
C.
Print
1.
Flow of Print Jobs

A print job from a computer connected to the network flows as follows:
A print job received by the network PCB is first stored on the hard disk in the PDL form, and is
developed into image data (RIP development) in the print data processing circuit on the PDL PCB;
the result is compressed in the compression circuit on the image processor PCB, and stored on the
hard disk.
The data is then read into to the extension circuit of the image processor PCB, and is developed
into image data (decompressed) for transmission to the print image processing block; it is subjected
to smoothing and other processing, and then is printed on the printer unit. In other words, steps (8)
through (11) in the figure are repeated until all jobs are done.

PDL PCB
Main memory
(4)Image data
Print data
processing
block
Memory for
development
Main
(3)PDL data
(7)Compression memory
data
Page
(8)Compression
memory
data
for printing
Image processor PCB

(5)Image data
(6)Compression
data
(9)Compression
data
Compression
circuit
Extension
(10)Binary data circuit
HDD
(11)Binary
data
Network
PCB
Print image
processing unit
(2)PDL data
(12)Image data
Printer unit
(1)PDL data
Figure 2-106
2-6 C
2.
TCP/IP
A UNIX and Windows NT machine is equipped with an LPR port to take advantage of LPD
services so that it is capable of directly sending print data to the printer board without going
through a server (from the work station).
A Windows NT system possesses an LPR port function; standard installation of Windows NT,
however, will not include the LPR port function. To make use of it, select the network on the
control panel, select and add 'TCP/IP' as the protocol, and select and add 'TCP/IP print' as a service.
A Windows 905/98 machine is not equipped with an LPR port, requiring a server with an LPR
port and installation of an LPR utility for printing by taking advantange of LPD services.
Windows NT
UNIX
Ethernet
Protocol: TCP/IP
Service : LPD
Windows 95
LPR utility
pre-installed
Windows 95
Windows NT
Figure 2-107
2-7 C
3.
NetWare
A Novell network uses IPX as the protocol for print data, and the machine supports the following print services used under IPX:
Bindery Pserver
Printer
NDS Pserver
Nprinter
In IPX printing, all print jobs are sent to the machine through the print queue on the print server
constructed within a Novell file server.
The machine checks the presence/absence of a job on the print queue on the connected print
server at specific time intervals (called "polling").
If a print job exits, the machine requests the print server to send it; the machine starts printing
upon its arrival.
To make NetWare settings, make the following selections: user mode>system control
setting>network setting>NetWare
NetWare
client
Network Based on Bindery

NetWare
NetWare file server
client
(print server)
Ethernet
Protocol: IPX
Print service: Bindery, Pserver, Rprinter,
NDS Pserver, Nprinter
NetWare NetWare client

client
NetWare
file server
(Print server)
Network Based on NDS
Figure 2-108
2-8 C
4.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk machines use PAP (Printer Access Protocol) for print services.
The machine will automatically enable PAP services when AppleTalk is turned on by making
the following selections: user mode>system control setting>network setting>AppleTalk setting.
In an AppleTalk environment, a print job is sent to the printer directly from each computer.
Ethernet
Protocl: AppleTalk (EtherTalk Phase II)
Print service: PAP
Figure 2-109
2-9 C
5.
Processing Print Data

The machine processes print data using its PDL PCB.
The PDL PCB is not designed to directly generate image data out of data written in a page
description language. In preparation, it translates data written in a page description language into
data in a language used for internal processing; it then generates image data from the resulting data.
(The work is done by a function called "translator.")
Print data (internal
Print data (internal

Print data
processing
procesisng
Image data
language)
language)
(PDL)
Image data generation block
Translator
Print data processing block
Figure 2-110
2-10 C
II . Digital Image Processing

1.
Outline
The machine processes digital images using its image processor PCB.
The machine's digital image processing is divided into two sections: before image data is
stored on the hard disk (read image processing block) and image data is read from the hard disk
until it is sent to the printer unit.
R
G
B
Read image processing unit
3-line
CCD
positioning
RG B
Sensor
color
correction
Logarithmic
conversion
B
G
R
Density
processing
B
G
R
G
Image editing,
image processing,
line-to-line
correction
L/Ca/Cb
RGB
BG R
RGB
Printer unit
L/Ca/Cb
B
G
R
Binary processing,
random error
diffusion
G`
(black-and-white
copying only)
Spatial
filter processing
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
Print image processing block

Resolution
conversion
(WPD)
Toner saving
Smoothing
Print data
(fax printing only) (PDL printing only)
Figure 2-201
2-11 C
2.
Read Image Processing Block

The read image processing unit performs the following:
3-line CCD positioning
Sensor color correction
RGBL, Ca, Cb conversion
Spatial filter processing
L, Ca, CbRGB conversion
Logarithmic conversion
Density processing
Binary processing (random error diffusion)
Binary processing is only for black-and-white copying. At time of black-and-white copying or

black-and-white scanning, the G signal (of the RGB) is used to generate black-and-white image
data.
3.
Smoothing
The print image processing block performs the following:
Main scanning direction smoothing (6001200 dpi, equivalent)
Toner saving (PDL printing only)
Resolution conversion
2-12 C
CHAPTER 3
USER SOFTWARE
A.
Outline
The product comes with the User Software CD-ROM containing printer drivers and utility
programs.
For detailed instructions on how to install printer drivers and utility programs and for explanations of their functions and how they may be used, see the Network Guide and the Software Guide
that come with the product.
B.
Printer Driver
When the print command is executed from an application program, the printer driver converts
the print image data received by the operating system into commands expressed in a page description language. In addition, it also sends the settings made on the Properties screen of the printer to
the host machine after converting them into commands.
The printer driver must be of a type suited to the page description language used. Moreover,
since each specific operating system generally uses its own set of rules to exchange image data,
there must be as many printer drivers as there are operating systems. The User Software CD-ROM
that comes with the product includes PDL printer drivers designed for the following operating
systems:
Windows 95/98
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Mac OS (version 7.6.1 or later)
The versions of the PDL printer drivers stored on User Software CD-ROM are as follows:
Canon PCL5e Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000 Ver 4.41
Canon PCL6 Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000 Ver 2.10
3-1 C
The following are some of the screens appearing when 'Properties' is selected for the Windows
NT4.0 printer driver.
3-2 C
Figure 3-101
Figure 3-102
Figure 3-103
Figure 3-104
C.
Utilities
1.
NetSpot
NetSpot is a utility program for device management, and is designed for use on a TCP/IP or
IPX network, for indicating the state of devices and the progress of processing work. NetSpot also
enables making protocol settings.
A device supporting NetSpot is equipped with a database of management information called
"MIB" (Management Information Base), and NetSpot installed to the PC of the administrator may
access this database to obtain management information and to make settings. The communication
protocol for this purpose is known as "SNMP" (Simple Network Management Protocol).
A PC to which NetSpot is installed can access all devices supporting NetSpot on the network,
enabling the administrator to centrally control all the devices connected to the network.
The PC for the administrator must be able to use the TCP/IP protocol or the IPX protocol.
Figure 3-105
Figure 3-106
3-3 C
2.
NetSpot Job Monitor

NetSpot Job Monitor is a print utility designed to monitor devices connected to a local, TCP/
IP, or IPX network or devices connected locally to PCs on a network, as for checking the status of
a device or the progress of a print job.
Devices supporting NetSpot Job Monitor are equipped with a built-in database for management information called "MIB" (Management Information Base), and NetSpot Job Monitor installed to the PC of the administrator accesses the database for information.
Since a PC to which NetSpot Job Monitor is installed has access to all devices supporting
NetSpot Job Monitor, the administrator may centrally control information on all devices.
Figure 3-107
Figure 3-108
3-4 C
3.
NetSpot Console
NetSpot Console is a utility program for device control designed for a TCP/IP or IPX network.
It may be installed to a Windows NT server belonging to the same network as the devices do so that
the state of the devices and the progress of processing work may be monitored using the Web
browser running on a client PC on the network.
Devices supporting NetSpot Console is equipped with a built-in database for information management called "MIB" (Management Information Base), and NetSpot Console accesses the database for management information. The communication protocol used for the purpose is known as
"SNMP" (Simple Network Management Protocol).
Figure 3-109
3-5 C
CHAPTER 4
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
I . Disassembly and
Assembly
A.
Controller Assembly
[1]
1) Loosen the four screws [1], and detach the

controller assembly [2] from the machine.
[2]
Caution:
The controller assembly houses a HDD.
Take full care to avoid impact when removing the controller assembly.
[1]
Figure 4-101
B.
Hard Disk Drive

[2]
1) Remove the controller assembly from the

machine.
the mounting metal plate [3] together with
the HDD.
Caution:
Points to Note When Replacing the
HDD
1. Take appropriate measures to prevent static destruction.
2. Keep the HDD protected from impact.
[1]
[1]
[3]
Figure 4-102
the HDD [5].
[4]
[5]
[4]
Figure 4-103
4-1 C
C.
PDL PCB

machine.
the PDL PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-104
D.
Removing the Network

PCB
[2]
1) Remove the controller assembly.

2) Remove the PDL PCB.
the network PCB.
[1]
Figure 4-105
E.
Relay PCB

machine.
3) Remove the network PCB.
4) Disconnect the three connectors [1].
the relay PCB [3] by lifting it.
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 4-106
4-2 C
F.
1) Remove the controller assembly form the

machine.
3) Remove the network PCB.
4) Disconnect the six connectors [1].
the mounting metal plate [3] together with
the relay PCB.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
Figure 4-107
6) Remove the four hex screws [4].
[4]
Figure 4-108
7) Remove the two hex screws [5].
[5]
Figure 4-109
4-3 C

the support metal plate [7].
[6]
[7]
Figure 4-110
[8]
9) Remove the eight screws [8], and detach

the system controller PCB [9].
[8]
[9]
[8]
Figure 4-111
G.
Image Processor PCB
1) Remove the system controller PCB.

2) Remove the two hex screws [1].
3) Remove the ten hex screws [2] and the
screw [3], and detach the image processor
PCB [4].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
Figure 4-112
4-4 C
FAX
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 FAX
I.
II.
A.
B.
III.
A.
Specifications ................................ 1-1F

G3 FAX Board............................... 1-2F
G3 FAX board block diagram ....... 1-2F
G3 FAX board components ........... 1-3F
NCU Board .................................... 1-4F
NCU Board block diagram............ 1-4F
B.
IV.
A.
B.
C.
NCU Board functions .................... 1-4F

Maintenance and Service .............. 1-5F
Troubleshooting............................. 1-5F
Wiring Diagram ............................. 1-6F
Signal Description ......................... 1-6F
F1
CHAPTER 1
FAX
CHAPTER 1 FAX
I . Specifications
Applicable lines
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
Modulation Method
G3 image signals
G3 procedure signals
ITU-T V.27ter (2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps)

ITU-T V.29 (7.2 kbps, 9.6 kbps)
ITU-T V.17 (TC 7.2 kbps, TC 9.6 kbps, 12 kbps, 14.4 kbps)
ITU-T V.33 (12 kbps, 14.4 kbps)
ITU-T V.34 (2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 7.2 kbps, 9.6 kbps,
12 kbps, 14.4 kbps, 16.8 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 21.6 kbps,
24 kbps, 26.4 kbps, 28.8 kbps, 31.2 kbps, 33.6 kbps)
ITU-T V.21 No.2 (300 bps)
ITU-T V.8, V.34 (300 bps, 600 bps, 1200 bps)
Transmission speed
33.6 kbps, 31.2 kbps, 28.8 kbps, 26.4 kbps, 24 kbps, 21.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 16.8 kbps,
14.4 kbps, 12 kbps, TC 9.6 kbps, TC 7.2 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 7.2 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 2.4 kbps
With automatic fallback function
1-1 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
II . G3 Fax Board
A.
G3 Fax board block diagram

SCNT BOARD
RESET IC
4.9152
MHz
51.0
MHz
23.9874
MHz
SYSTEM
CONTROLL
DRAM
4M bit
ROM
8M bit
24.431
MHz
TWINS
TWINS
MPU
V821
DATA BUS
D0~D15
ADDRESS BUS AD0~AD23

MODEM
R288F
NCU BOARD
Figure 1-201 G3 FAX Board
1-2 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
B.
G3 FAX board components
MPU (IC3)
The NEC PD70741GC-25-7EA(V821) MPU controls a line communication.
This MPU is the same as that used for the SCNT board.
System controller (IC7)
The Mitsubishi M66364FP system controller is a standard cell which controls
the MPUs peripheral devices.
This system controller is the same as that used for the SCNT board.
TWINS (IC8, IC9)
The NEC PD65802GJ-117-3EN TWINS is a gate array which controls the
IEEE 1284 bi-directional parallel port.
Line controller ROM (IC1)
This 8Mbit ROM contains the programs for controlling a line communication.
DRAM (IC6)
This 4Mbit DRAM stores image data during transmission and reception, and is also used as
memory for the MPU work area.
Reset IC (IC2)
The reset IC resets this Boards MPU when power is turned on or when there is a drop in
voltage.
MODEM IC (IC13)
During transmission, the Rockwell R288F modem receives transmission data from the MPU,
and performs G3 modulation of these data based on ITU-T V.8, V.17, V.21, V.27ter., V.29,
V.33 and V.34.
During reception, the modem receives data from line and performs G3 demodulation of these
data based on ITU-T V.8, V.17, V.21, V.27ter., V.29, V.33 and V.34.
This modem is the same as that used for the SCNT board.
1-3 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
III . NCU Board

A.
NCU Board block diagram

J1
NCU BOARD
Hybrid circuit
Line interface
Line voltage conversion

Dial pulse generater
Offhook detection
Figure 1-301
B.
NCU Board functions

The NCU board performs the following functions.
Hybrid circuit
Signals sent from the system controller to the telephone line are prevented from entering the
reception circuit.
Dial pulse generator
The dial pulse generator generates a dial pulse to send a dial signal from the fax through the dial
line by turning the relay on and off using the control signal from the SCNT board.
Off-hook detection circuit
Detects the off hook state from the DC current flowing to the circuit, when the extension
telephone (or option handset) is off hook.
Line voltage conversion circuit
The line primary on the NCU board is controlled by a +48 V DC line voltage, therefore, the line
voltage conversion transformer converts the voltage of the control TTL for the line secondary.
1-4 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
IV . Maintenance and Service

A.
Troubleshooting
Unable to make a call using the optional handset
Cause: Telephone line 1 is in use.
Solution: Communication using the handset is only possible with telephone line 1. Try again
after line 1 communication ends.
Cause: Only telephone line 2 is connected to the telephone line.
Solution: To use the unit as a telephone with only one of the lines connected, connect the line to
the telephone line 1 terminal.
Unable to receive call from other party

Cause: The line used for a telephone is connected to the telephone line 2 terminal.
Solution: Connect the line used for the telephone to the telephone line 1 terminal.
1-5 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
B.
Wiring Diagram
CONNECTION BOARD ASS'Y

J101
FG
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
T1
T2
NC
L1
L2
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND21
LINE
+A5V
AGND
NC
AGND
+A5V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PRD
SRD
CMLD
HRD
NC
DCD
+5V
DGND
GND21
+21V
J7
J305
1
2
2 +21V
1 GND21
J5
J2
J3
NCU BOARD ASS'Y
J102
L1
L2
1
2
MODULAR CORD
+A5V
G3 Fax
RELAY BOARD ASS'Y
VD3
VD2
VD1
VD0
VD11
PCLSTR
VD10
GEN/PCL
VD9
DGND
VD8
VD15
VD14
DACK5*
VD13
VD12
VD7
VD6
VD5
VD4
TC*
VUBE*
ESSACT*
TOP*
CLKCTL*
+5V
VA0
VA5
DGND
VA4
VA3
VA2
VA1
INTPIF2*
PCLDAT
INTPIF1*
FIOWR*
FIORD*
+5V
+5V
DREQ5
DACK2*
DREQ2*
ICS7*
DGND
ALLRST*
DGND
PCLCLK
+5V
BD*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
VD3
VD2
VD1
VD0
VD11
NC
VD10
NC
VD9
DGND
VD8
VD15
VD14
NC
VD13
VD12
VD7
VD6
VD5
VD4
TC*
VUBE*
NC
NC
NC
+5V
VA0
VA5
DGND
VA4
VA3
VA2
VA1
NC
NC
INTPIF1*
FIOWR*
FIORD*
+5V
+5V
DREQ5
DACK2*
DREQ2*
ICS7*
DGND
ALLRST*
DGND
NC
+5V
NC
J3
J304
RELAY BOARD ASS'Y
Figure 1-401 Wiring Diagram
C.
Signal Description
G3 Fax board (J3) RELAY BOARD (J304)

J3
J304
Signal
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
VD3
VD2
VD1
VD0
VD11
NC
VD10
NC
VD9
DGND
VD8
VD15
VD14
NC
VD13
VD12
VD7
System Data3
System Data2
System Data1
System Data0
System Data11
Not connected
System Data10
Not connected
System Data9
Ground
System Data8
System Data15
System Data14
Not connected
System Data13
System Data12
System Data7
1-6 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
J3
J304
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Signal
Description
VD6
VD5
VD4
-TC
-VUBE
NC
NC
NC
+5V
VA0
VA5
DGND
VA4
VA3
VA2
VA1
NC
NC
-INTPIF1
-FIOWR
-FIORD
+5V
+5V
DREQ5
-DACK2
DREQ2
-ICS7
DGND
-ALLRST
DGND
NC
+5V
NC
System Data6
System Data5
System Data4
DMA Terminal Count
Upper Bytes Enable
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Logic drive voltage
System Address0
System Address5
Ground
System Address4
System Address3
System Address2
System Address1
Not connected
Not connected
Interrupt1
System I/O Write
System I/O Read
Logic drive voltage
Logic drive voltage
DMA Request5
DMA Acknowledge2
DMA Request2
Chip Select
Ground
System Reset
Ground
Not connected
Logic drive voltage
Not connected
Connection board Line

J4
LINE2
1
2
L1
L2
Signal
Description
Telephone line
Telephone line
G3 Fax board (J5) RELAY board (J305)

J5
CN10
Signal
Description
1
2
2
1
GND21
+21V
Ground
Logic drive voltage
Connection board (J102) NCU board (J3)

J6
J3
Signal
Description
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
L2
L1
NC
T2
T1
Telephone line
Telephone line
Not connected
Not used
Not used
1-7 F
CHAPTER 1 FAX
G3 Fax board (J7) NCU board (J1)

J7
J1
Signal
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+21V
GND21
DGND
+5V
DCD
NC
HRD
CMLD
SRD
PRD
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
+A5V
AGND
NC
AGND
+A5V
LINE
GND21
Off hook detection power supply

Ground
Ground
Logic drive voltage
DC relay control signal
Not connected
H relay control signal
CML relay control signal
S relay control signal
P relay control signal
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Logic drive voltage
Ground
Not connected
Ground
Logic drive voltage
Signal received from telephone line
Ground
NCU board (J2) Frame

J2
FRAME
Signal
Description
ARG
Ground
1-8 F
Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division
Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (JUNE 2000) (17712/18756/28353/30359/35870)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
This publication is printed on

100% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

0600M0.2-1

Canon Ir3250 - SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Ir3250 - SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iR3250

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Features ........................................... 1-1

External View .................................. 1-9

Selecting the Site ............................. 2-1

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

E. Mounting the Reader Unit and the

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Periodically Replaced Parts ............. 3-1

Standards and Adjustments ............. 4-1

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

D. Special Tools ............................... 4-10

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

The controller unit AC power

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Starting Service Mode and

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A-9

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Various Document Handling Functions

Two-Way Communication on a Network

Full Color Scanner as Standard

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Single focal point lens

Light-receiving elements (RGB 3-line CCD)

Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)

Maximum size of original

A3, 279.4 431.8 mm (11" 17")

Direct ( 0.5%), default enlargement/reduction

Main scanning direction

Sub scanning direction

999 copies max.

Yes (2 min standard; may be changed in user mode;

Auto paper selection

Yes (2 hr standard; may be changed in user mode)

Yes (1 min standard; may be changed in user mode)

Power save mode

Yes (- 66% standard; may be changed in user mode)

125 sec or less

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Atmospheric pressure range: 760 to 1013 hPa

1.5 kW or less (approx.)

Reader unit only : 666 315 708 mm

: 1097 764 1181 mm

Reader unit only : 50 kg

COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC.

CANON iR3250 REV.0 JUNE 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

OPC drum (30-mm dia.)

Laser beam indirect electro photographic method

6-facet mirror scanning

Magnetic single-component dry toner